Home

User Manual for STEP 7

1. Default Bee Network 1 HiRaad Ree CALL FEL DBI Mess01 DW 16 1 Press F1 for help y Figure 12 4 Example of the Display of the Function Block Input Variables in the Organization Block 11 Save the organization block with the menu command File gt Save and close the LAD STL FBD window 12 Select the created instance data block in the SIMATIC Manager for example DB1 and open the message configuration application with the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Message Result The Message Configuration dialog box is opened and the selected instance data block with the message number allocated by the system is displayed Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 9 Creating and Displaying Messages 13 Enter the required changes in for the corresponding instance data block in the appropriate tabs and add any additional display devices if required Exit the function with OK Result The message configuration for the selected instance data block is completed You will find more information on creating instance data blocks in the manuals 232 233 and 236 14 Transfer the data you configured as described in Section 12 6 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 10 C790
2. Charts CFC Charts Empty object Symbols created automatically Figure 4 4 Possible Components in an M7 Program In the first part of this chapter you learned about the most important objects in a project The second part teaches you about the basic activities and actions in connection with objects Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 4 Object Oriented Operating Philosophy Aim Simple The graphic user interface is intended to make the handling of the software Handling intuitive You will find objects in the software which are familiar to you from your everyday working environment for example stations modules programs blocks The actions you execute when working with STEP 7 involve creating selecting and manipulating objects of this type Differences to With the existing type of application oriented handling you had to decide Application which application was required to perform which task and then start the Oriented Handling application The principle used with object oriented handling is to decide which object to process and then open the object in order to edit it With object oriented handling no special knowledge of command syntax is required Objects are represented on the user interface by graphic symbols or icons which you open using menu commands or mous
3. CPU CP CP gt o He o o 4 O 4 MPI MPI MPI address address 1 address 2 Figure 8 6 Automatic MPI Address Assignment for Modules STEP 7 takes this feature into account when you assign MPI addresses For this reason when planning the MPI addresses for the CPUs you must leave MPI address gaps for function modules and communications processors so that addresses cannot be assigned twice Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 8 Changing Node Addresses and Downloading the Configuration via the Network Different Node Addresses Changing the Node Address In order that your network functions correctly each node in a subnet must have a different node address MPI subnet with connection via the CPU CPUs are shipped with the default node address 2 However you can only use this address once in a subnet so you will have to change the default node address for any other CPUs PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet subnets with communications processors The CPs of the stations that are run via these subnets must be configured and given node addresses You should always assign this address via the multipoint interface for the station before download and communication processes can be performed via the subnet for more information refer to 500 and 501 If you do have tw
4. Run Time Meter Overflow Elapsed Hours Status 465 Yes Not Running Update Print Help Figure 17 7 Uses Setting the Time and Date Time System Tab This property sheet displays the time base and correction factor with which the module operates and the time and date of the selected module You are also shown information about time synchronization and the run time meter With the menu command PLC gt Set Time and Date in the SIMATIC Manager the editors or in the hardware configuration application you can set the time and the date on the selected module Enter the required values for date and time in the input boxes shown in Figure 17 8 Set Time and Date Path example program online 11 51 02 17 10 96 Cancel Help Time on the Module Date on the Module Figure 17 8 Setting the Date and Time for a Module Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 19 Diagnosing Hardware 17 14 Displaying Performance Data Performance The Performance Data tabbed page shows you the data for the selected Data Tab module see Figure 17 9 Module Information Ss S Se d Process Image Inputs 1024 Bit Process Image Outputs 1024 Bit Number and address area Bit Memory 2048 Bit of inputs outputs timers Timers 128 counters bit memory and Counters 64 number of temporary
5. Figure 4 3 Possible Components in an S7 Program The containers Blocks and Source Files can occur only once in an S7 program You can delete any containers not required and insert them again if you need them You will require a container for S7 blocks for programming in Statement List Function Block Diagram or Ladder Logic for example When you open the blocks container the S7 blocks in it are displayed If you double click a block the corresponding program code is displayed in an editor window You will need a container for source files for programming in the programming languages which are available as optional software packages and for programming STL source files This object is used to define shared symbols A symbol allows you to work with meaningful symbolic names in your programs instead of absolute addresses A Charts container containing the objects for CFC Continuous Function Chart charts is necessary if you are using the CFC software option Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation Content of an M7 Program Read On Figure 4 4 shows a possible structure of an M7 program M7 Program Blocks Blocks Only for DBs VATs UDTs system data C Programs C Programs blocks for RMOS Operating System DOS Windows Programs
6. Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 20 3 Archiving Archiving Projects Libraries Copying to Floppy Disk 20 4 To create an archive follow the steps outlined below 1 Check that no windows are open containing the project you want to archive and that the library you want to archive is closed 2 Select the menu command File gt Archive 3 In the next dialog box select the project or library you want to archive and confirm your entry 4 Depending on your archive settings under Options gt Customize Archive tab another dialog box is displayed Here you can set the target directory the file name and the file type for the archive file STEP 7 uses the file type extension to determine which archive program to use for example zip for PKZIP 5 You can set additional archiving options in another dialog box for example saving to more than one floppy disk The dialog box is displayed only if you activated the option to enable additional archive settings and if your archive program supports other options A DOS window is opened in which the archive process is run The project library is compressed and stored in the target directory You can archive a project library as described above and then copy the archive file to a floppy disk It is also possible to select a floppy disk drive in the Archive dialog box as the target directory Standard
7. M7 C Program 1 i Install gt Delete Figure 19 3 Programs Tab Note If the operating system is installed on the hard disk we recommend you install the applications on a different drive from the operating system to ensure that data are not lost following a power failure see Section 19 2 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Downloading M7 Programs via MPI RFS When downloading online the relevant program parts are downloaded directly via MPI to the mass storage in the programmable control system and the relevant start batch files are entered in the LETC INITTAB file on the programmable control system so that the programs are started automatically the next time the system is booted In addition a special description file containing all the necessary information about displaying and deleting the program is downloaded for every M7 program The name of this description file is formed automatically from the name of the program after checking that the file name is always unique on the programmable control system To download M7 programs via MPI RFS to the M7 programmable control system follow the steps outlined below 1 Start the M7 programmable control system You can use a bootable disk or a memory card to boot the system 2 Start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3
8. This could prevent non STEP 7 applications from functioning correctly Checking the If you use a PC with an MPI card you should always check whether the Interrupt and default interrupt and the default address area are free and if necessary select Address a free interrupt and or address area Assignments You can display the current assignments under Windows 95 NT as follows 1 Open the System dialog box in the Control Panel and select the Device Manager tab 2 Select the entry Computer in the list displayed and click the button Properties 3 In another dialog box you can display the list of occupied interrupts IRQ or the list of occupied address areas I O by selecting the corresponding option button Differences You have to assign interrupts address areas and other resources under between Windows NT in a specific dialog box refer to the online help for a detailed Windows 95 and description Windows NT Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 2 11 Installing and Uninstalling 2 6 Ove Multi User Configuration in a Windows Network rview With STEP 7 you can work in a multi user configuration via a network There are three different possible methods Figure 2 1 e The project is on a local drive and is also used from another workstation Example Workstation 2 accesses project A e The project is on a project group server Example Workstat
9. All other activities depend on the medium you select In the Programming Device list box all the C and C programs are listed which are linked to the M7 PLC system within your project You can select one or more of these to download The list box PLC System displays the programs already downloaded to the programmable control system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 23 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Download Media Selecting the Local Drive and Partner Drive 19 24 Note Before you download a DOS or Windows program you must select all the components to be downloaded with the Add button in the Components tab of the Properties dialog box of the program and specify the destination path if necessary If the Component and Install in Destination Path boxes remain empty nothing is downloaded to the programmable control system There are two methods for downloading M7 applications in STEP 7 e Online via MPI RFS e Offline via floppy disk or memory card If you use the download medium MPI RFS for the installation you can select a local drive and a partner drive just as you can for the operating system installation see page 19 6 Managing M7 PLC Systems Medium Floppy A Local Drive Fe FJ Partner Drive C FJ Install Op System Programs Update Firmware Programming Device PLC System
10. Receiver received new data Sender executed restart complete restart Figure 9 6 Structure of the Global Data Status Word Group Status STEP 7 creates a group status GST for all global data packets The group status which is also a double word with an identical structure to the status double word GDS is formed by linking all the status double words with an OR logic operation Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 9 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 7 Configuration Examples Example 1 One In the first configuration example the CPU with the name Stationl CPU1 CPU Sends Data to sends an array of 22 bytes to several selected CPUs in a network as shown in Other CPUs Figure 9 7 The configuration specifies that CPU1 of Station sends the data starting at MB50 through MB71 The other CPUs receive the data at the same or different addresses Station1 CPU1 eae ee bytes Y y y E i y Station2 CPU1 Station3 CPU1 Station4 CPU1 Figure 9 7 Example One CPU Sends Data to a Number of Other CPUs Table 9 1 shows the global data table for this configuration The table represents one global data circle A CPU 314 for example can handle four circles of t
11. SFC visualization You use this option to transfer SFC data to WinCC e Size of transfer You can transfer all configuration data or only the modified configuration data to the operator station If you select the option All you can delete all previously transferred data at the same time if you click With Memory Reset on OS Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station i r Figure 13 5 Selecting the Transfer Options e Update Variable names As the symbolic names under which the information for the programmable controller is stored are formed from names that can be changed name conflicts may arise if the symbolic names are changed or new symbols or blocks are created The name comparison during transfer recognizes possible conflicts and changes the names if necessary Addresses units IDs operator texts Select this option to ensure that the current configuration data are transferred at the time of transfer This is important if any changes were made to variable addresses or system attributes for the text entry for example S7_shortcut S7_unit between configuring and transferring the data Note Note that running the address and text update and the name update will increase the transfer time If you only made small changes such as changes to the upper or lower limit of a
12. Tab Uses B Stack Opening a Block in the B Stack Stack Opening a Block in the I Stack L Stack The Stacks tabbed page displays the contents of the B stack block stack The CPU must have switched to the STOP mode resulting from a programming error or a stop command for this You can display the contents of the other stacks using the I Stack L Stack and Nesting Stack buttons The stack contents give you information on which instruction in which block led to the CPU going into STOP You obtain further information about the events which led to the STOP in the CPU from the diagnostic buffer see Section 17 8 The B stack or block stack lists all the blocks that were called before the change to the STOP mode and which were not completely processed With the Open Block button you can open the block selected in the B stack list online and edit it The cursor is pointing to the place in the program where processing will continue after the jump to the called block When you click the I Stack button the data at the interrupt location are displayed The I stack or interrupt stack contains the data or the states which were valid at the time of the interrupt for example e Accumulator contents and register contents e Open data blocks and their size e Content of the status word e Priority class nesting level e Interrupted block e Block in which program processing continues a
13. You should also note the settings you can make in the Archive tab Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 11 Creating and Editing Projects 5 7 Access to Programmable Controllers within a Project Overview Within a project you can switch between viewing the project data on your programming device or PC offline and the project data on your programmable controller CPU online Activities in the You use the offline view to create the project structure and to create and Offline View select the objects for all types of project data Activities in the You use the online view to access the programmable controller You can Online View execute a number of functions available in the PLC menu for example Clear Reset Operating Mode Set Time and Date Module Information and obtain information about the software downloaded to the programmable controller Switching to the Use the menu command View gt Online to display a project window Online View containing the online view The Offline View of This setting is used when you first create a project The data and programs in the Project the project on the programming device PG PC are displayed in the Window project window 53 Project o SIMATIC 300 Station D Programmable module s7 S7 Program linked __ P Blocks Source files Charts O e Symbols L Connections pj Programmable module
14. 0 ceeee eee ence eens 4 1 Opening a Project 0 0 eee eee 4 2 4 2 Components for Configuring Hardware and Networks 4 3 4 3 Components for Creating Software 0 ccc eee eee eee 4 4 4 4 Object Oriented Operating Philosophy 00 cece eee eens 4 6 4 5 Creating and Managing Objects 0 06 0 c cece eee eee eee 4 7 4 6 Selecting Objects in a Browser 0000 e eee eee eee 4 10 5 Creating and Editing Projects 0ces eee e cece eee eee 5 1 5 1 Creating Projects cco cane site ne ee comida eviii atiii odid needa eed 5 2 5 2 Inserting and Configuring Stations 000 e eee 5 4 5 3 Basic Procedure for Creating Software 0 0c cece eee 5 6 5 4 Inserting Components for Creating Software in S7 and M7 Programs 5 7 5 5 Creating Software without Configured Hardware 05 5 9 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual f C79000 G7076 C552 01 xI Contents 5 6 Storing Projects 0c cece eee dneni aid eanas 5 7 Access to Programmable Controllers within a Project 5 8 Access to Programmable Controllers without Project Administration 5 9 Access to Programmable Controllers without Configured Hardware 5 10 Adapting PG PC Interfaces on the Programming Device to Configured Network SettingS 00 0 cece eee e eens Assigning SyMbolS 32 o etc ce se dees tee ened ome ed onde ees 6 1 SVIMDOI
15. Blocks in the The existing block cannot be deleted in the EPROM and is simply marked as EPROM invalid when a new version is reloaded The replacement block is loaded in the RAM Procedure This is the same as when downloading a block see Section 15 5 Note Remember that if there is a power failure without battery backup or if you perform a memory reset the old blocks become valid again Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 15 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 8 Editing Blocks from the CPU in the Programming Device Uses Two Distinct Cases User Program in the Programming Device User Program not in the Programming Device Being able to upload blocks from the CPU to the programming device has the following uses e During the test phase you can correct a block directly on the CPU and document the result e You can upload the current contents of blocks from the RAM load memory of the CPU to your programming device via the load function When uploading blocks from the CPU to the programming device remember that there are two distinct situations e In the first situation the user program to which the blocks belong is located on the programming device e In the second situation the user program to which the blocks belong is not on the programming device This means that the program sections listed below that cannot be downloaded to the CPU are not availa
16. Event ID 16 4303 Date 12 02 97 Time 09 08 47 374 Class A S7 Program 1 STOP caused by stop switch being activated Previous op mode RUN Requested op mode STOP internal Event ID 16 9C41 Alarm message incoming Date 18 02 97 Time 10 49 17 155 cpu414_SQ S7 Program 1 Alarm_SQ 05 Test Event ID 16 9041 Alarm message outgoing Date 18 02 97 Time 10 49 17 155 Event ID 16 1 Event message incoming Date 18 02 97 Time 10 51 18 251 cpu414 S7 Program 1 Alarm_S Ready NUM 4 Figure 12 12 Example of Message Display in CPU Messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 23 Creating and Displaying Messages Archive Function Procedure 12 24 There is an archive to back up the messages in which between 40 and 2000 CPU messages can be stored If the set archive size is exceeded the oldest message in the archive is deleted to make space for the new message To configure CPU messages for selected modules follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager start the CPU Messages application via an online project To do this select an S7 program online and call the CPU Messages application for the selected CPU using the menu command PLC gt CPU Messages Result The dialog box Customize appears which lists the registered CPU You can extend the list of registered CPUs by repeating step 1 for other programs or interfaces
17. Inputs 0 1 1 switch_le_sin Bit Memory 0 1 1 gr_int Outputs 0 1 gr_ped_sim Counters 1 Data Word DB1 DBW 1 Timers PLC Variable View Monitor Format Monitor Value BOOL HEX BIN DEC BIN DEC HEX HEX COUNTER DEC SIMATIC_TIME SIMATIC_TIME false BH16 06 2 1 1 2 0 0 No monitor value No monitor value C 0 No monitor value S5T 0ms S5T 0ms Options Figure 16 1 shows an example of a variable table which has been filled out Window Help Modify Value S5T 20ms MPI 2 Direct OVR Online Edt 7 23 7 Figure 16 1 Example of a Variable Table Filled Out Within a variable table you can edit the cells for Address Symbol Monitor Format and Modify Value Editing the Table e You enter the variable you want to modify with your address or as a symbol If the corresponding symbol is defined in the symbol table the symbol column or the address column is filled out automatically e The monitor format defines the format in which the calculated monitor value is to be displayed in the column to the right of it You select the format using the menu command View gt Select Monitor Format gt or by clicking the cell in the table a number of times to scroll through the options until the required format is displayed Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 5 De
18. Optional 2 2 Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT Programming device or PC with e 80486 processor or higher e Minimum 16 Mbytes RAM 32 Mbytes recommended Color monitor keyboard and mouse which are supported by Microsoft Windows 95 NT A programming device PG is a personal computer with a special compact design suitable for industrial use It is fully equipped for programming SIMATIC programmable control systems Memory capacity required on the hard disk e The standard package occupies 70 to 100 Mbytes The memory required depends on the installation options selected for the standard software e STEP 7 should have approximately 60 Mbytes including the main memory available to create Swap files meaning approximately 44 Mbytes if there are 16 Mbytes of main memory e You should reserve at least 50 Mbytes for your user data The Setup requires at least 1 Mbyte of free memory on drive C Setup files are deleted when the installation is completed Memory capacity required for the optional software packages The optional software M7 ProC C with the C development environment requires approximately 100 Mbytes e The other optional STEP 7 packages each require between 10 Mbytes and 20 Mbytes A multipoint interface MPI between the programming device or PC and the programmable logic controller is only required if you want to communicate via the MPI with the programmable logic controller in STEP 7 You ther
19. Overview Setting the Time of Exchange Selecting Suitable Scan Rates 9 8 Global data are exchanged as follows e The sender CPU sends the global data at the end of a scan cycle e The receiver CPU reads these data at the beginning of a scan cycle Using a scan rate which you specify in the global data table you can set the number of scan cycles which must be executed before the CPUs start sending or receiving data To set the time the exchange should take place follow the steps outlined below 1 Compile the global data table if it is not yet in phase 1 see entry in status bar 2 Select the menu command View gt Scan Rates if no scan rate row is displayed in the table 3 Enter the required scan rates If you do not specify a scan rate the default setting is used 4 Compile the global data table again phase 2 Small scan rates increase the frequency of the data exchange The following conditions should be maintained however to keep the communication load on the CPUs at a low level For the sender of a GD packet e S7 300 CPUs scan ratesender X Scan cycle timesender gt 60 ms e S7 400 CPUs scan ratesender X Scan cycle timesender gt 10 ms For the receiver of a GD packet e Scan ratereceiver X Scan cycle timereceiver lt SCAN ratesender X Scan cycle time sender This means The data in a GD packet must be received more often than they are sent otherwise a GD packet may be lost Any loss of a GD p
20. 17 6 With the help of diagnostics symbols you can recognize quickly whether diagnostic information is present and see which module s is are causing the fault Diagnostics symbols are displayed in the project window in the online view and in the hardware configuration window with the online view of configuration tables Use the following procedure to locate faults 1 Start troubleshooting in the online view of your project and find which station s contain modules with a diagnostics symbol project view 2 Then find out in the configuration tables which module s in this station have diagnostic information available station view 3 Now display the diagnostic information for the respective module module view To display diagnostic information follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the online view in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Open all stations so that the programmable modules configured in the stations are displayed 3 Find out which CPU has a diagnostics symbol displayed that indicates a fault 4 Select the corresponding station and select the menu command Edit gt Open Object or double click on the Hardware object The configuration table s for the station is are displayed Modules for which diagnostic information is available are marked with the appropriate diagnostics symbol 5 Click a module for which a diagnostics symbol is displayed The Module Information dialog box is displayed for the re
21. Downloading to Local Stations Downloading to Local and Partner Stations Downloading Selected S7 Connections Deleting Connections in the Programmable Controller 10 18 The programming device or PC must be a node in the MPI PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet subnet via which the connection data are to be downloaded to the programmable modules You must have assigned unique node addresses to all subnet nodes see Section 8 8 You must have switched the programmable module s in the station s and if present the communications processor s via which the connections run to STOP mode You must be in the connection table view In programmable controllers with multicomputing capability such as S7 400 a number of CPUs can be inserted in a station Each of these CPUs can have its own connection table Using the menu command PLC gt Download gt Local Station the connection tables of the local station more than one if there is more than one CPU in the station are downloaded to the CPUs in the local station to each CPU its own connection table This menu command can be used for all types of connection Using the menu command PLC gt Download gt Local and Partner Stations you can download the current connections tables from the local station to the CPUs in the local station and to the CPUs of all stations which are connection partners in the local station This menu command can be used for all types of connecti
22. Glossary Function FC Function Block FB Function Block Diagram FBD Function Module FM G Gateway Global Data Communication HOLD According to the International Electrotechnical Commission s IEC 1131 3 standard functions are logic blocks that do not reference an instance data block meaning they do not have a memory A function allows you to pass parameters in the user program which means they are suitable for programming complex functions that are required frequently for example calculations Note As there is no memory available the calculated values must be processed immediately following the FC call According to the International Electrotechnical Commission s IEC 1131 3 standard function blocks are logic blocks that reference an instance data block meaning they have static data A function block allows you to pass parameters in the user program which means they are suitable for programming complex functions that are required frequently for example control systems operating mode selection Function Block Diagram is a graphic representation of the STEP 7 programming language FBD uses the logic boxes familiar from Boolean algebra to represent logic A function module FM is a module which relieves the CPU in the 7 300 and 7 400 programmable logic controllers of time critical and memory intensive process signal processing tasks Function modules generally use the internal communicati
23. Information Updating the Display Displaying a Number of Modules Simultaneously For each tab the following information is displayed e Online path to the selected module e Operating mode of the relevant CPU for example RUN STOP e Status of the selected module for example fault OK e Operating mode of the selected module for example RUN STOP if the module has its own operating mode for example CP 342 5 The CPU operating mode and the status of the selected module cannot be displayed if the module information function was started from the Accessible Nodes window Every time you change to a different tab in the Module Information dialog box the data are read out from the module again While one tabbed property sheet is displayed its contents are not updated automatically If you click the Update button the data are read from the module again without you changing to another tab Note The display texts for which the module cannot supply data are deactivated and no values are displayed You can display the module information for a number of modules simultaneously To do this you must switch to the appropriate module context select another module and proceed as already described in Sections 17 1 and 17 2 Another Module Information dialog box is then displayed Only one dialog box can be opened for each module It is therefore not possible to compare the status of one module at two di
24. Open the Programs tab 4 Make the following selections see Figure 19 3 Medium MPI RFS Local Drive only on programming devices PCs with Windows 95 the first free drive for example F Partner Drive C for hard disk refer to the notes in Section 19 2 The required applications from the Programming Device list box 5 Click the Install button Result An MPI connection to the M7 programmable control system is established and the selected software components are downloaded to the programmable control system drive The downloaded programs are displayed in the PLC System box The programs are started automatically the next time the system is booted While these steps are being executed messages appear in the dialog box informing you of what is currently happening Caution If files with the same name are present on the programmable control system these are overwritten during the download process There is no automatic rename function and no automatic backup Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 25 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Downloading M7 Programs via Data Medium 19 26 When downloading offline all files are first copied to a floppy disk or a memory card An installation file M7SWINS BAT is also created on the data medium which is used to download the most recently selected programs from the flop
25. Overview Chapter Overview Whereas hardware configuration concentrates on configuring one station network configuration involves all the nodes involved in communication via a network and the settings required for the network It does not matter whether you are intending to communicate in the network using global data or communication function blocks in the user program the basis for communication is always a configured network When you configure a network all the settings are checked for plausibility and consistency Any node addresses which are assigned twice and any invalid settings are recognized as they are entered This avoids any unnecessary errors being made even before you switch on for the first time thus saving time and money This chapter tells you how to create a network configuration and which network and station parameters have to be set Creating Network Configurations An Overview Configuring a Network in the SIMATIC Manager Setting Your Network Configuration Graphically Starting NETPRO Creating Network Configurations with Symbols in the Network View Opening and Editing the Network View with DP Slaves Selecting Context Functions for Subnets Stations and Modules in the Network View Special Feature when Configuring MPI Subnets in 7 300 8 8 Changing Node Addresses and Downloading the Configuration via the Network Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79
26. Overview Opening the Dialog Box Configured Dynamic Connection You use the connection type S7 Connection mainly to connect two modules from the SIMATIC S7 M7 ranges In addition to the entry in the connection table you can set special properties for each S7 connection you configure To open the dialog box for the special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The Object Properties dialog box appears Object Properties Connection m Connection Block Parameter ID inl Configured Dynamic Connection Eocel IB RERI TS v Active Connection Setup 1 j Send Operating Mode Messages Default m Network Connections Local Partner SIMATIC 400 Station 1 CPU414 1 1 SIMATIC 400 Station 2 CPU413 1 1 Via R CP CPU CPU414 1 1 R0 S2 E CPU413 1 1 RO S 2 Interface Type MPI v MPI v Node Address 2 3 Addresses OK Figure 10 4 Cancel Help Object Properties for S7 Connection Activate this check box if you want to set up and break the connection in the user program This has the advantage that the network is only under load when you need the connection The check box can only be selected for a SIMATIC M7 module You trigger communication setup and break with the M7 functions M7K
27. Press F1 for help wN 4 Figure 5 5 Direct Access to the PLC without Project Administration When you have selected a node you can execute the functions available in the PLC menu for this node such as Clear Reset Operating Mode Set Time and Date Module Information When you double click a node a Blocks object is displayed All the blocks downloaded to the programmable controller are contained in this object You can open and edit the blocks You can save any blocks on the programming device which were modified in the block window using the menu command File gt Save As or download them to the programmable controller again with PLC gt Download Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 15 Creating and Editing Projects 5 9 Access to Programmable Controllers without Configured Hardware Overview If One Programmable Controller is Connected If a Number of Programmable Controllers are Connected 5 16 If you create an S7 M7 program offline that is not linked to any hardware meaning it is located directly beneath the project you can download this program to a programmable controller without having to configure any hardware first There are different procedures depending on whether one or more programmable controllers are connected to your programming device Starting from the offline project window following the steps outlined below 1 Use the menu comma
28. RK512 CPU No Sending and Receiving Frames with RK512 Here you specify in which direction communication is to link up by activating the appropriate check box This part of the dialog box shows the route which the connection from the local partner to the connection partner takes You can select the route depending on the configured point to point communications processors Example the local node is a station which contains two point to point communications processors In this case you can select via which communications processor you want the connection to run Local Displays the local partner for the point to point connection Partner Displays the connection partner for the point to point connection Via PTP CP For the local node you can select via which PTP communications processor you want the connection to run by specifying the rack and slot of the CP Interface Type Displays the interface type PTP Interface SIMATIC S7 communications processors have a number of channels interfaces via which point to point connections can be set up The channel and the protocol used for the channel are displayed You can select the channel and you configured the protocol with the special configuration software for the CP The following protocols are possible e RKS512 protocol e 3964 R protocol e ASCII driver e Special driver or e Printer driver Programmable controllers with multicomputing capability suc
29. When you close the properties dialog box the object is renamed and displayed under its new name If you are not allowed to change the name of an object the input field is shown in gray in the dialog box the current name is displayed and text entries are not possible Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 4 9 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 6 Selecting Objects in a Browser Overview Selecting objects in a dialog box browser is an action which you will need regularly for a large number of different edit steps Calling the You call the browser dialog in the hardware configuration application for Browser example using menu commands such as File New Open one exception is the basic application window SIMATIC Manager Structure of a In the browser you have the following selection options as shown in Browser Dialog Figure 4 5 Entry Point Here you select the View You can switch Online Offline Here you can switch type of object in which you want to between the standard between the offline view selection of project start the search such as Project view and the plant view data on the PG PC and the online view Library or entries which permit selection of project data on the connected access to drives or connected programmable controller but only for the programmable controllers Entry Point Project Browser Click this button to search for o
30. a double click opens LAD or STL S7 Graph 2 Created by compiling the corresponding source 4 Can be created with the editor for file om __ SS 7 Graph Figure 11 1 S7 Program in the Project Structure with Relevant Language Editors Where to Find Further Information Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 You will find more information on creating programs in the Programming Manual 234 or in the introductory sections in the manuals on the programming languages Setting up projects and handling objects in the SIMATIC Manager is described in the Chapters 3 4 and 5 of this manual Creating User Programs 11 2 Selecting the Programming Language and the Editor Programming Languages Incremental Input and Text Editors Setting the Programming Language or the Editor Starting the Editor There are a number of programming languages available for you to create the S7 program These are e Ladder Logic LAD or Function Block Diagram FBD e Statement List STL You can also purchase the following programming languages as optional packages e 7 SCL Structured Control Language e S7 Graph Sequential Control Systems e 7 HiGraph State Graphs e CFC Continuous Function Chart e C for M7 This gives you the choice of a number of different programming philosophies machine code or high level languages and the choice of either textual or graphic p
31. available but for which no symbol has been defined in the symbol table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data 14 2 Generating and Deleting Reference Data Overview Generating Reference Data Before Displaying Them Generating Reference Data on Compiling Saving Deleting Reference Data The following possibilities are available for generating reference data e You can generate or update the reference data before displaying them e You can set whether the reference data are generated automatically when a source file is compiled or a block created in incremental edit mode is saved One option does not exclude the other they can be used in conjunction Before you display the reference data a check is made to see whether the current reference data are up to date If not a dialog box appears to inform you that the reference data are inconsistent You can then decide whether you want to update the reference data and to what extent You then have the following possibilities e For modified blocks only The reference data are updated for any modified or new blocks information on any blocks deleted is removed from the reference database e For all blocks The reference data are generated again from scratch for all blocks e Do not update The reference data are not updated In order to update the reference data the blocks are recompiled The appr
32. e Assignment list for inputs outputs and bit memory and for timers and counters e Program structure e List of unused symbols e List of addresses without symbols It is possible to create and display one or more of the lists for one user program or for more than one user program You use the reference data for the following e As an overview of your whole user program e As the basis for changes and tests e To complement your program documentation Table 14 1 shows an overview of which reference lists contain which information Table 14 1 Overview of Reference Data List Purpose Cross Reference List Overview of the addresses in the memory areas I Q M P T C used and access to DBs FBs FCs SFBs and SFCs in the user program Assignment List Overview of which bits of the addresses in the memory areas I Q and M and which timers and counters T and C are already occupied within the user program forms an important basis for troubleshooting or changes in the user program Program Structure Call hierarchy of the blocks within a user program and an overview of the blocks used and their nesting levels List of Unused Overview of all symbols which are defined in the symbol Symbols table but not used in the parts of the user program for which reference data are available List of Addresses Overview of all absolute addresses which are used in the without Symbols parts of the user program for which reference data are
33. force values are displayed in bold face To create a force job follow the steps outlined below 1 In the Address column of the force window enter the variables you want to force 2 In the Force Value column enter the values which you want to assign to the variables 3 Start forcing with the menu command Variable gt Force If no force job is currently active the variables are assigned the force values Caution If a force job is active already you must decide whether you want to replace the existing force job If you did not start the existing force job contact whoever started it before you replace it A force job can only be deleted or terminated with the menu command Variable gt Stop Forcing Caution Closing the force values window or exiting the Monitoring and Modifying Variables application does not delete the force job Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs 16 9 Enabling Peripheral Outputs PQ Overview With the Enable Peripheral Output function you can enable I O outputs PQB PQW PQD in order to modify them in STOP mode with the menu command Variable gt Activate Modify Values Procedure To enable peripheral outputs follow the steps outlined below 1 Use the menu command Table gt Open to open the variable table VAT that contains the I O outputs you want to modify or activate the window for the
34. programmable control system you will require the following e A mass storage module MSM 378 478 in your M7 programmable control system e A boot medium 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or memory card gt 2 Mbytes e MS DOS installation disks MS DOS V6 22 must be installed on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 19 12 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Procedure To install M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on an M7 programmable control system with a hard disk follow the steps outlined below 1 2 In your project select the M7 program linked to the M7 CPU FM Start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System Open the Install Operating System tab Make the following selections Medium MPI RFS Possible Configuration M7 RMOS32 amp MS DOS Local Drive only on programming devices PCs with Windows 95 the first free drive for example F Partner Drive C for hard disk Click the Install button The dialog boxes then display messages about the current processes and tell you how to proceed You must perform the following steps Select a boot medium floppy disk or memory card Result A minimum M7 RMOS32 operating system is installed on the selected boot medium Select drives for the operating system and the data see Section 19 2 Insert the boot medium in
35. the Rest of the M7 intended to be used selectively The following explanations should make it Documentation easier for you to use the user documentation gt This symbol indicates the order in which you should read the manuals particularly if you are a first time user of M7 Symbol Meaning This documentation introduces the methodology Reference works which are only required selectively E This documentation is supported by an online help Manuals on Program System Software for M7 300 M7 400 Manual M7 300 M7 400 ming Program Design Hardware Manual 280 52 Online Help ae Standard Software for S7 and M7 User System Software for M7 300 M7 400 See STEP7 Manual Installation and Operation 231 282 l Pro C C CFC CFC for M7 Vol 1 Vol 2 290 12541 aor te Reference System Software for M7 300 M7 400 7 gt Manual System and Standard Functions Debugging 281 Cc Programs 291 Language Packages xxx Number in the literature list Figure 1 2 M7 Information Landscape vi Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Table 1 2 M7 Documentation Information Content Title M7 300 and M7 400 Program Design Programming Manual Content The M7 300 M7 400 Program Design Programming Manual provides basic in
36. 1 Select a DP master from the Hardware Catalog window for example CPU 315 2 DP 2 Drag the module to a suitable row in the rack The dialog box Properties PROFIBUS Node is opened Here you can do the following Create anew PROFIBUS subnet or select an existing subnet Set properties for the PROFIBUS subnet transmission rate etc Set the PROFIBUS address for the DP master 3 Confirm your settings with OK The following symbol appears EIT This symbol is the connector symbol for the DP slaves in the DP master system When configuring DP slaves there is a distinction between the following types Compact DP slaves Modular DP slaves e Intelligent DP slaves Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules DP Slaves Selecting and Arranging Compact DP Slaves Changing the View You can use the following as DP slaves Modules with integrated digital analog input and outputs compact DP slaves such as ET 200B e Interface modules with assigned S5 or S7 modules modular DP slaves such as ET 200M e 7 300 stations with modules that support the function intelligent slave I slave for example CP 342 5 CPU 315 2DP To configure a compact DP slave follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a compact DP slave for example ET 200B from the Hardware Catalog window 2 D
37. 1 Unspecified partner PTP connection Unused symbols displaying 14 12 Uploading blocks configuration 7 24 URCY USEND User memory compressing 17 17 displaying 17 16 User memory utilization 17 16 Index 8 User program 11 2 creating 11 1 debugging downloading User texts procedure requirements translating and editing User defined data type 11 6 User defined diagnostic message creating and editing 12 15 displaying overview 12 procedure requirements USTATUS V Variable operator control and monitoring 13 1 Variable table 16 4 column width 16 6 displaying columns 16 6 editing 16 5 oe sre 16 6 saving 1 syntax T ck 16 6 uses 16 4 Variables modifying monitoring Version project W WinCC attribute assigning Windows NT 2 12 Work memory 15 4 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Q ox Siemens AG AUT E 146 Ostliche Rheinbriickenstr 50 D 76181 Karlsruhe Federal Republic of Germany From Your Name Your Title Company Name Street City Zip Code Country Phone Please check any industry that applies to you Automotive Chemical Electrical Machinery Food Instrument and Control Nonelectrical Machinery u uuu Petrochemical Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Gy G a EE eel Pha
38. 2 10 2 Creating a Connection 000 c cece eee 10 4 10 3 Properties of S7 Connections 2 0 00 cece eee eee 10 9 10 4 Properties of Point to Point Connections 000 c eee eens 10 12 10 5 Communication Connections to Partners in Other Projects 10 14 10 6 Communication Connections to Other Stations PGs PCs or SIMATIC S5 Stations 0e iaacdlaned caaewrdneedeawinseweada esac 10 7 Downloading the Connection Table to the Programmable Controller 10 17 11 Creating User Programs 00c cece eee eee eee 11 1 11 1 Programming S7 CPUS 22 4 8e0 lene eres dian eee e deem dad 11 2 11 2 Selecting the Programming Language and the Editor 11 4 11 3 Programming Blocks with Ladder Logic Statement List and Function BIOCK Diag ain yere EEE EEEREN EE ENEKE EASKE aetna ENEKE ected 11 5 11 4 Programming Source Files with Statement List and S7 SCL 11 7 11 5 Programming Blocks with S7 Graph 0 000 e cece eee eee 11 8 11 6 Programming Source Files with S7 HiGraph 2000005 11 9 11 7 Programming in the CFC Programming Language 11 11 12 Creating and Displaying Messages 020ce eee e eee 12 1 12 1 Configuring Messages An Overview 0000 eee eee eens 12 2 12 2 Assigning and Editing Block Related Messages 005 12 4 12 3 Assigning and Editing Symbol Related Messages 005 12 11 12 4 C
39. 5 a report is created which provides information about the following existing PLC OS connections errors which occurred during transfer variable names etc To display the transfer log follow the step outlined below Select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Display Log in the SIMATIC Manager Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 11 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data Overview You can create and evaluate reference data to make it easier to debug and modify your user program In this chapter you can read about the following topics e Which reference data you can display for a user program e How you can filter the displayed lists to meet your particular requirements Chapter Overview 14 1 Overview 14 2 Generating and Deleting Reference Data Displaying Reference Data 14 4 Notes on Displaying Reference Data 14 5 Displaying Cross References Displaying Program Structures Displaying Assignments Displaying Unused Symbols Displaying Addresses without Symbols Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 1 Displaying Reference Data 14 1 Overview What Types of Reference Data Are There How to Use Reference Data 14 2 The reference data for a selected user program comprise the following lists e Cross reference list
40. 7 Manual 231 230 ie Cv 1 LAD STL FBD SCL 233 232 236 1 2501 Eee Reference System Software for S7 300 400 IManual System and Standard Functions _ 1 GRAPH HiGraph lerc lerc 2351 for S7 Vol 1 Vol 2 251 252 12541 249 Language Packages xxx Number in the literature list Figure 1 1 S7 Information Landscape Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Table 1 1 S7 Documentation Information Content Title S7 300 Programmable Controller Quick Start Primer Content The Primer offers a basic introduction to the methodology of the structure and programming of an S7 300 S7 400 It is especially suited to first time users of an S7 programmable control system S7 300 and S7 400 Program Design Programming Manual The 7 300 S7 400 Program Design Programming Manual provides basic information on the structure of the operating system and of a user program of an S7 CPU The first time user of an S7 300 or S7 400 should use this manual to acquire an overview of the programming methodology and to use it to base their user program design on S7 300 and S7 400 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual The S7 CPUs have integrated system functions and organization blocks included with their operating system which you can use when programming The manual provides you with an overview of the system functions organiz
41. 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 4 7 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation Building an Object Hierarchy Setting Object Properties Cutting Copying Pasting Printing 4 8 Use the New Project wizard to create the object hierarchy When you open a container the objects it contains are displayed on the screen You can now create more objects in the container using the Insert menu for example additional stations in a project Only the commands for those objects which can be inserted in the current container are active in the Insert menu Object properties are data belonging to the object which determine its behavior The dialog box for setting object properties appears automatically when you create a new object and properties have to be set The properties can also be changed at a later date Using the menu command Edit gt Object Properties a dialog box is opened in which you can display or set the properties for the selected object Using the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties you can open dialog boxes and enter data required for operator control and monitoring functions and for configuring messages For example in order to display the special object properties of a block for operator control and monitoring the block must be marked as being relevant for operator control and monitoring meaning that the system attribute s7_m_c must be set to the value true in the Attributes tab
42. A N Caution If files with the same name are present on the programmable control system these are overwritten during the transfer process 9 The batch files to start the programs are not entered automatically in the ETC INITTAB of the M7 programmable control system Instead a temporary ETC INITTAB INS file containing all the necessary entries is created on the data medium In order to start the programs automatically the next time the M7 300 M7 400 system starts up you must copy these entries to the ETC INITTAB file in the M7 programmable control system using an editor Guidelines for When you download M7 programs offline via data medium to the Downloading programmable control system a special description file containing all the Offline necessary information about displaying and deleting the program is stored on the data medium for each M7 program The name of this description file is formed automatically from the name of the program In order to check that the file name is always unique on the programmable control system one of the following conditions must be fulfilled e The first five characters of the names of the programs defined for an M7 CPU or an M7 function module are different e All programs belonging to a CPU or a function module are always copied to the data medium and downloaded from there to the M7 programmable control system Note If these conditions are not fulfilled there is a danger that when you access
43. An address in your user program can then be accessed via this symbol Chapter Overview 6 1 Symbols 6 2 Symbol Table Incomplete and Non Unique Symbols 6 4 Working with the Symbol Table 6 5 Defining Single Symbols in a Dialog Box 66 Exporting and Importing Symbol Tables Note on How to Following the sections which contain basic information about symbols you Use this Chapter will learn the methods for defining shared symbols e You can enter symbols and their absolute addresses directly in a symbol table Section 6 4 This procedure is recommended if you want to enter a number of symbols and for when you create the symbol table for a project because you have the symbols which were already assigned displayed on the screen making it easier to keep an overview of the symbols e You can open a dialog box in the window where you are entering a program and define a new symbol or redefine an existing symbol Section 6 5 This procedure is recommended for defining individual symbols for example if you realize that a symbol is missing or you want to correct one while you are writing the program This saves you displaying the whole symbol table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 6 1 Assigning Symbols 6 1 Symbols Overview Validity Using Shared Symbols Using Local Symbols Where Do You Define Symbols Note on How to Use this Chapter 6 2 A symbol al
44. Central structure gt ho H of an S7 300 i mj o o m o mj Slot numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 7 3 From a Central Structure to a Configuration Table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 7 6 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Selecting a Rack and Entering It in the Configuration Table Selecting Modules and Arranging Them in the Configuration Table Requirement the station window and Hardware Catalog window must be open To select and place a rack follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a suitable rack for your structure from the Hardware Catalog window Use the rail for SIMATIC 300 and a universal rack UR1 for example for SIMATIC 400 Drag the rack to the station window The rack appears in the form of a small configuration table in the upper part of the station window In the lower part of the window the detailed view of the rack appears with additional information such as the order number MPI address and I O addresses If you want to change the number of the rack Double click the title of the rack in the upper part of the station window You can change the number in the General tab for the rack As an alternative to step 2 you can also double click on the rack in the Hardware Catalog window To arrange modules in the rack follow the steps outlined below 1 2 3 Select a module from
45. Devices PCs with Windows 95 In this list box the free drives available on the PC programming device are displayed for you to choose from Partner Drive In this list box the drives on the M7 programmable control system from which you can select the required mass storage medium are displayed The drives are usually assigned as follows unless other settings have been made Table 19 3 Drive Assignments on the M7 Programmable Control System Default Drive Partner Drive Identifier MS DOS M7 RMOS32 Floppy disk Memory card Hard disk On board silicon disk D E with hard disk C without hard disk If you install the operating system on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system you will also need a boot medium The boot medium is a data medium from which the programmable control system boots when the power supply is switched on The boot medium contains a minimum M7 RMOS32 operating system On booting the parts of the operating system required to run the applications and for communication are loaded into the work memory When the system has started from the boot medium an MPI connection between the PC programming device and the M7 programmable control system can be established Bootable data media for M7 programmable control systems are e 3 5 1 44 Mbyte floppy disks or e Memory cards gt 2 Mbytes Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M
46. Displayed in an Online Project Window Note If you want to change settings for objects in the programmable controller for example parameter data of a module these will not immediately come into effect on the programmable controller You first have to download the new system data blocks in which the settings have been stored to the programmable controller If you download a complete user program the system data blocks are downloaded automatically as part of this process If you make changes to the settings after a program was downloaded you can reload the System Data object to transfer the changed settings to the programmable controller Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 13 Creating and Editing Projects Non Deletable The following objects on the programmable controller are displayed in the Objects online view but cannot be deleted in the online view e System functions SFCs e System function blocks SFBs e System data blocks SDBs Note on the Using the optional software package for PLC simulation you can run and Optional Package debug your program on a simulated programmable controller As the PLC Simulation simulation functions are realized completely by the STEP 7 software you do not require any S7 hardware CPU or signal modules With a simulated S7 CPU you can debug programs for S7 300 and S7 400 CPUs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 Use
47. Editing Symbol Related Messages Creating and Editing User Defined Diagnostic Messages 12 5 Translating and Editing User Texts 12 6 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable Controller 12 7 Displaying CPU Messages and User Defined Diagnostic Messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 1 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 1 Configuring Messages An Overview Overview What Type of Messages Exist Message Number Message and Message Template 12 2 With the S7 Message Configuration application you can create and edit event dependent messages and message templates with their corresponding message texts and message attributes You can also specify which display devices you want to display the messages You can create and edit the following messages with the Message Configuration function 1 Block related messages see Section 12 2 These are assigned to a function block FB You can use so called message blocks in which a message function is already programmed to create a block related message 2 Symbol related messages see Section 12 3 These are assigned to a Boolean signal in the symbol table With a symbol related message you can scan a signal in a predefined time frame to determine whether a signal change has taken place 3 User defined diagnostic messages see Section 12 4 These are made possible via a system func
48. G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Requirements Before you can enter a connection in the connection table you must have done the following e Created a project e Assigned parameters to a subnet e Configured at least two programmable modules CPU function module in the project and connected them in a network between which you want to set up communication connections Opening the You must have opened your project and have opened the station containing Connection Table the module for which you want to create the connection table To open a connection table follow the steps outlined below 1 Double click on the programmable module 2 Select the Connections object 3 Double click the object or select the menu command Edit gt Open Object Result A window opens which contains the table for configuring connections Fi CPU414 2DP Configuring Connections Connection Table Edit Insert PLC View Help tel a s s x2 Station Module SIMATIC 400 Station 2 CPU414 2DP 1 Local Partner Partner Type Active ID hex ID hex yp Connection Sa eee 1 4 SIMATIC 400 Station 3 CPU412 1 1 S7 Connection Yes Yes a 2 5 SIMATIC 400 Station 3 CPU416 1 1 S7 Connection No No _ I gt Ready Row 1 Loc ID 1 Sel 1 of 2 A Figure 10 2 View of the Connection Table Local Node Every program
49. Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems Overview With STEP 7 and the M7 optional software package you can use high level languages such as C or C and graphic programming software such as CFC Continuous Function Chart to create applications for the M7 300 M7 400 automation computer This chapter describes the methods you can use to create applications for M7 300 M7 400 automation computers To create these programs you will require an M7 operating system and a development environment for M7 applications in addition to STEP 7 You will find these software components in the M7 optional software Chapter Section Description Page Overview M7 Optional Software M7 300 M7 400 Operating Systems Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 18 1 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems 18 1 M7 Optional Software Overview 18 2 STEP 7 provides you with the basic functions you require to do the following e Create and manage projects e Configure and assign parameters to the programmable control system hardware e Configure networks and connections e Manage symbol data These functions are provided regardless of whether you are using a SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC M7 programmable controller The different operating systems and executable software used in SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC M7 programmable controllers affect the way you program applications To create M7 applications y
50. List Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram S7 Graph and S7 HiGraph allow incremental input An instance data block stores the formal parameters and static data for function blocks An instance data block can be associated with a function block call or a call hierarchy of function blocks An instruction is part of a STEP 7 statement and specifies what the processor should do SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes which control the processing of the user program These priority classes include interrupts such as hardware interrupts When an interrupt occurs the relevant organization block is called automatically by the operating system in which the user can program the required reaction to the interrupt for example in a function block FB SIMATIC M7 supports the triggering recognizing and processing of diagnostic interrupts and hardware interrupts The reaction to interrupts is freely programmable Ladder Logic is a graphic representation of the STEP 7 programming language Its syntax corresponds to the representation of a circuit diagram A library is a container for blocks source files and charts with multiple usage The load memory is part of a programmable module It contains objects created by the programming device load objects It can be either a plug in memory card or an integrated memory In SIMATIC M7 the load memory can be defined as a directory on the hard disk Standard Software for S7 and M7
51. M7 SYS optional package installed on your programming device Firmware version hardware version The following versions are displayed if an MPI connection to the M7 programmable control system exists e The current firmware version in the programming device e The firmware version available in the programmable control system e The hardware release of the programmable control system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 21 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Procedure In Case of Error 19 22 To update the firmware of an M7 programmable control system follow the steps outlined below 1 In your project select the M7 program container linked to the M7 module CPU FM 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3 Open the Update Firmware tab see Figure 19 2 4 Select the boot medium floppy disk or memory card 5 Select the version of the operating system from the Operating System Version in Programming Device list box This step is only necessary if you have a number of versions of the M7 SYS optional package installed on your programming device 6 Click the Create button Result The boot medium is formatted with a warning and the new firmware is installed on it 7 Insert the boot medium in the M7 programmable control system and start the M7 CPU FM Result If you boot the M7 programmable control system with this data medium
52. MS DOS or MS Windows you will be prompted to format the destination medium hard disk Follow the instructions displayed in the dialog box Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 7 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 2 Data Backup in Case of Power Failure Concept Basic Procedure 19 8 The M7 300 400 automation computer has a number of different mass storage media hard disk floppy disk memory card and on board silicon disk whose file systems are managed by the operating system You should note that if there is a power down during write access to the mass storage media the consistency of the file system may be endangered As the system software operating system configuration files etc are also located on a mass storage medium a power failure during write access may mean that the system can no longer be booted To resolve this problem we recommend you always work with at least two mass storage media or two partitions on the hard disk e One which contains the operating system and the files relevant to the system and which is not accessed using write access during operation and e One which contains the user programs and the read only backup and load memory areas and to which write access is permitted during operation To ensure the consistency of the data on the mass storage media in the case of a power failure you have the following possibilities e Ins
53. PLC gt Module Information Alternatively you can double click the module Depending on the diagnostics capability of the module a varying number of tabs are displayed in the Module Information dialog box The General tab is displayed for every module Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 3 Diagnosing Hardware 17 3 Diagnostics Symbols Overview Diagnostics symbols make it easier for you to detect a fault You can see by a glance at a module symbol whether diagnostic information is available If there are no faults present the symbols for the module types are displayed without additional diagnostics symbols Diagnostics If diagnostic information is available for a module a diagnostics symbol is Symbols for displayed in addition to the module symbol or the module symbol is Modules displayed with reduced contrast Table 17 1 Diagnostics Symbols for All Modules Example CPU Red diagonal line across the Setpoint actual mismatch in the configuration module symbol the configured module is not available or a different module type is inserted Red dot with white cross Fault module has a fault Possible causes diagnostic interrupt I O access error or error LED detected Module displayed with reduced Diagnosis not possible because no online contrast connection exists or the CPU cannot supply diagnostic information for the module for example power supply or
54. Program To link an S7 M7 program that was created independent of the hardware to a Programmable configuration to a programmable module follow the steps outlined below Modula 1 Select the unlinked S7 or M7 program 2 Drag the selected program to the programmable module to which you want to link the program and drop it there Result Any program which already exists in the module is overwritten when you confirm the prompt Note that the configuration data system data are also overwritten 3 Once you have linked the program open the configuration table for the programmable module see also Chapter 10 and save the configuration again Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 9 Creating and Editing Projects Storing Unlinked When you delete a station or module that is linked to a program a dialog box Programs in the is displayed You can then choose whether the program should be deleted as Project well or whether it should be stored in the project without any hardware link Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 5 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects 5 6 Storing Projects Overview Save As Archiving Automatic Archiving In order to back up a project you can save a copy of the project under another name or archive the project To save a copy of the project follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the project 2 Select the menu comman
55. S7 WinCC Mapper you transfer the configuration data for operator control and monitoring generated to the WinCC database You have the choice of a number of different transfer options You can for example select an address and text comparison to ensure that the current WinCC attributes are transferred Before you start the transfer the following requirements must be fulfilled e You have installed the setup program PLC OS connection configuration e You have generated the configuration data for operator control and monitoring as described in Sections 13 2 13 3 and 13 4 For each operator control and monitoring system you must create an OS object in the SIMATIC Manager by following the steps outlined below 1 Open your STEP 7 project 2 Select the menu command Insert gt WinCC Object gt Operator Station Note Note that the number of operator stations for which the data are to be transferred influences the duration of the transfer The following options are available to you when transferring the configuration data to the selected programmable controller as shown in Figure 13 5 e Transfer data Variables and messages This option is already activated when you open the dialog box for the first time If you deactivate the option no transfer is executed This is useful if you want to run the address and text update or name update without a transfer to test whether your settings are correct for creating messages
56. S7 stations which were configured and assigned parameters in another project in STEP 7 and may be nodes in subnets in another project Note If you connect a station to a subnet as an other station because it was configured and had parameters assigned in another STEP 7 project you must assign this station the same node address as in the STEP 7 project where it was configured and had its parameters assigned Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 3 Configuring Networks 8 1 Creating Network Configurations Overview Two Possibilities Procedures Note 8 4 You have two possibilities for creating a network configuration e If you only want to configure one or two subnets you can configure your network quickly and easily in the SIMATIC Manager or in the hardware configuration application e Using NETPRO makes it particularly easy to enter a network configuration because it allows you to create a graphic view of your network in which you can set all the properties for subnets and network nodes If you want to use Industrial Ethernet communications processors you must also have the NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet optional software package installed For some PROFIBUS communications processors you will require the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS software option The diagram below shows both methods for creating network configurations Plan your network topology subnets
57. STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary Logic Block M7 Program Memory Card Memory Reset MRES Message Table Mode Selector MPI Address Multiple Instance In SIMATIC S7 a logic block is a block that contains part of the STEP 7 user program The other type of block is a data block which contains only data The following list shows the types of logic blocks e Organization block OB e Function block FB e Function FC e System function block SFB e System function SFC Blocks are stored in the blocks container beneath the S7 program An M7 program is a container for charts and C programs for M7 programmable modules which also contains the symbol table A memory card is a memory submodule in credit card format for programmable modules and CPUs which can store the user program and parameters The memory reset function deletes the following memories in the CPU e Work memory e Read write area of the load memory e System memory In S7 M7 C7 the MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are retained In M7 the operating system is also rebooted if the M7 was reset via the mode selector In SIMATIC MMI devices all buffers are cleared The MPI address is reset to the default value The message table defines the text for messages and assigning these messages to message events You use the mode selector to set the required operating mode on the CPU In an MPI network every programmable
58. Section Description Page ani 5 2 Inserting and Configuring Stations Programs 5 5 Creating Software without Configured Hardware Storing Projects Access to Programmable Controllers within a Project 5 8 Access to Programmable Controllers without Project Administration 5 9 Access to Programmable Controllers without Configured Hardware 5 10 Adapting PG PC Interfaces on the Programming Device to Configured Network Settings Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 1 Creating and Editing Projects 5 1 Creating Projects New Project Alternative Procedures Alternative 1 Configure Hardware First Alternative 2 Create Software First 5 2 The easiest way to create a new project is by using the New Project Wizard which you open using the menu command File gt New Project Wizard The wizard prompts you to enter the required details in dialog boxes and then creates the project for you To create a project yourself follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command File gt New 2 In the New dialog box select the option New Project 3 Enter a name for the project and confirm your entry with OK When editing a project you are flexible as to the order in which you perform most of the tasks Once you have created a project you can choose one of the following methods e First configure the hardwa
59. This means that the software checks whether for example a STEP 7 statement has been entered correctly In free edit mode the syntax check is run during compilation System Data is an object containing the configuration data and parameters of a station Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary System Data Block SDB System Error System Function SFC System Function Block SFB System Memory T Timer T Upload User Program System data blocks are data areas for a programmable module which contain the system settings and module parameters The system data blocks are created and modified when you configure a station System errors are errors which can occur within a programmable logic controller and are not related to the process Some examples of system errors are program errors in the CPU and defects on modules A system function SFC is a function integrated in the CPU operating system which can be called in the user program when required A system function block SFB is a function block integrated in the CPU operating system which can be called in the STEP 7 user program when required just like a function block FB The system memory is integrated in the S7 CPU and executed in the form of RAM The address areas timers counters bit memory etc and data areas required internally by the operating system for example backup for communication
60. To save the settings for future work sessions follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the menu command View gt Filter A dialog box is displayed showing the property sheet for the current view 2 Make the required settings 3 Select the option Save as Standard in the dialog box 4 Close the dialog box with OK The settings are retained until the next time you set the options Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 5 Displaying Reference Data 14 5 Displaying Cross References Displaying Cross References Uses Structure of Cross Reference Lists 14 6 The cross reference list is the default view when you display reference data You can change this default see Section 14 3 To access the cross reference list from other views in the reference data application use the menu command View gt Cross References or click the corresponding button in the toolbar You are shown an overview of the use of addresses in the memory areas I Q M P T C and DBs FBs FCs SFBs and SFCs within the user program The search function makes it easier for you to find specific addresses and symbols feel Cross Reference List for proj test blocks blocks Address Symbol Block Type Language Details Q96 0 FB1 R STL Nw 1 Ln 4 Q97 1 FB1 R STL Nw 2 Ln Q98 2 FB1 R STL Nw 3 Ln Q99 3 FB1 R STL Nw 4 Ln Q100 4 FB1 WwW STL
61. Windows by double clicking on the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel 2 Select the STEP 7 entry in the displayed list of installed software Click the button to Add Remove the software 3 Ifthe dialog boxes Remove Enabled File appear click the No button if you are in doubt as to how to respond Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 2 9 Installing and Uninstalling 2 5 Setting the PG PC Interface Overview With the settings you make here you set up the communication link between the programming device PC and the programmable logic controller During installation a dialog box is displayed where you can assign parameters to the programming device PC interface You can display the dialog box following installation by calling the program Setting PG PC Interface in the STEP 7 program group This enables you to change the interface parameters independently of the installation Basic Procedure To operate an interface you will require the following e Settings in the operating system e Correct module parameters If you are using a programming device via a multipoint interface MPI connection no further operating system specific adaptations are required If you are using a PC with an MPI card or communications processors CP you should check in the Control Panel of Windows 95 NT to ensure that no interrupt conflicts or address area overla
62. and FM 354 Modules with diagnostics capability are most analog signal modules Modules without diagnostics capability are most digital signal modules Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 7 Diagnosing Hardware 17 6 Tabs in the Module Information Dialog Box Information Functions Table 17 5 Function General Diagnostic Buffer Diagnostic Interrupt Table 17 5 shows an overview of the tabs in the Module Information dialog box When displayed in an active situation only those tabs relevant to the selected module are displayed see Table 17 4 Overview of the Information Functions Information Identification data on the selected module such as the type order number release slot in the rack Overview of events in the diagnostic buffer and detailed information on the selected event Diagnostic data for the selected module The online information from the inserted module can be compared with the data for the configured module To find the cause of a CPU STOP and evaluate the events on the selected module leading to it To evaluate the cause of a module fault DP Slave Diagnostics Memory Scan Cycle Time Time System Performance Data Blocks can be opened from the Performance Data tab Diagnostic data for the selected DP standard slave acc to EN 50170 Current utilization of the work memory and the load memory of the
63. and Standard Functions 235 For M7 300 and M7 400 programmable control systems you can set the parameters for signal modules in the C program You need to call the M7 API function M7StoreRecord in the C program to do this This function transfers the parameters to a signal module You will find more information about the M7 API functions in the manuals on the system software for M7 300 and M7 400 280 281 282 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 11 Assigning Addresses Overview Assigning Node Addresses Input Output Addresses Requirement for Assigning I O Addresses There is a difference between assigning addresses to nodes and assigning input output addresses I O addresses Node addresses are addresses of programmable modules MPI PROFIBUS Industrial Ethernet addresses they are required in order to be able to address the various nodes in a subnet for example in order to download a user program to a CPU Input output I O addresses are required in order to read inputs and set outputs in the user program To assign a node address to a programmable module follow the steps outlined below 1 Double click on the row in the rack containing the module whose node address you want to set or select the module and select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties 2 Select the General tab 3 Click th
64. available for editing the variable table see Chapter 16 e Displaying the content of data blocks inputs outputs and bit memory e Writing the content of data blocks inputs outputs and bit memory Note Forcing variable values is not supported in SIMATIC M7 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 29 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Part 5 Final Tasks Archiving Printing 20 21 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Archiving 20 Overview You archive your user programs projects and libraries using the SIMATIC Manager Chapter Overview Archive Programs 20 2 2 Archiving Projects and Libraries z 20 3 Retrieving Projects and Libraries Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 20 1 Archiving 20 1 Archive Programs Uses You can store projects or libraries in compressed form in an archive file This makes it possible to store the compressed data on hard disk or on transportable data media floppy disks The archive function provides you with an interface to call your preferred archive program Possible Archive You can use the following archive programs Programs e pkzip from version 2 04g e arj from version 2 41a e Iha from version 2 13 e winzip from version 6 0 Requirements You must have installed the archive pr
65. be copied to other projects The individual blocks remain as version 1 blocks as regards their properties The code generated in version remains unchanged and the blocks cannot therefore be used in conjunction with multiple instances If you want to convert the blocks to version 2 blocks with multiple instance capability generate STL source files from the blocks and then compile the source files into blocks again To open a version project follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the menu command File gt Open Version 1 Project in the SIMATIC Manager 2 In the dialog box Open S7 Project select the version 1 project you want to use You recognize a version project by its file extension s7a see default for type 3 In the New Project dialog box enter the name you want to give the project in version 2 4 Ina further step you are prompted whether you want to open the project as a version 2 project or a project from the current version Depending on how you answer this prompt the project is opened either in version 2 or the current version Result STEP 7 converts the version 1 project to a version 2 project The new project is opened in the SIMATIC Manager Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions A 2 Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions Other Than Version 1 Overview With the men
66. communication partners Create the network configuration Create the network with the ai ad Manager configuration with NETPRO y Create a subnet in the Create a network view SIMATIC Manager using the topology Y Create the hardware configuration for the stations Boe EAS be She eee SS Connect nodes to subnets Y Assign different addresses to Enter network parameters all nodes during the for the subnets configuration of the hardware Enter network parameters for each node Y Save data for network configuration and download via network Figure 8 2 Procedures for Configuring a Network You should view the above procedures as an example There are several ways of achieving your goal For example you can first create all the stations in the SIMATIC Manager configure the modules for these stations and then complete the network configuration with NETPRO Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 2 Configuring a Network in the SIMATIC Manager Settings fora Network Configuration Creating a Subnet Setting Subnet Properties To configure a complete network you must do the following e Create the required subnets e Set the subnet properties parameters such as the subnet name and transmission rate used for each subnet e Set the network connection pro
67. creating a network configuration 1 Open the Catalog window using the menu command View gt Catalog 2 In the Catalog window select a subnet hold the mouse button pressed and drag the subnet to the window for the network view Repeat this for all subnets you require 3 In the Catalog window select a station hold the mouse button pressed and drag the station to the window for the network view Repeat this for all stations you require 4 Save the network view 5 Before you create the the network connection you must arrange the programmable modules CPU CP FM for each station in the configuration table To do this double click on the station and open the configuration table for this station hardware configuration see Chapter 7 6 After you have arranged the programmable modules for a station save the hardware configuration 7 Arrange the programmable modules for all the other stations and save the hardware configuration 8 Switch to the network view and drag the connection lines from the stations to the subnets 9 Double click the subnet line and enter the network parameters for the subnet Repeat this for all subnets 10 Double click the network connection line and enter the network parameters for the node Repeat this for all nodes 11 Save the network view 12 Download the network configuration to the programmable controller via the network see Section 8 8 Standard Software f
68. cycle time might cause a time error This can be avoided if you extend the maximum cycle time watchdog time of the user program If the duration of the shortest cycle is less than the configured minimum scan cycle time the cycle is automatically extended by the CPU FM to the configured minimum cycle time so that no time error can occur You can set the maximum and minimum cycle times when you configure the hardware To do this double click in the offline view of the configuration table on the CPU FM to define its properties You can enter the appropriate values in the Cycle Clock Memory tab Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 13 Setting Time Information Time System Tab The following information is displayed in the Time System tabbed page Time system of the selected CPU Information on time synchronization with other systems Display of operating hours elapsed Module Information CPU Operating Mode STOP Module Operating Mode Path project station CPU Status General Diagnostic Buffer Memory Scan Cycle Time Time Syster Perf Data Communication Stacks r Clock m Clock Synchronization Time on Module 11 57 40 010 Interval Master Slave F Bate on Module 17 10 95 l Correction Factor 0 IM PAUCs s aes Resolution 1ms on MPI a F Time Format BCD Real Time Clock Available on MFI Bed ave gt
69. data or only the modified configuration data to the operator station If you select the option All you can delete all previously transferred data at the same time if you click With Memory Reset on OS Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 19 Creating and Displaying Messages Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station i Figure 12 10 Selecting the Transfer Options e Update Variable names As the symbolic names under which the information for the programmable controller is stored are formed from names that can be changed name conflicts may arise if the symbolic names are changed or new symbols or blocks are created The name comparison during transfer recognizes possible conflicts and changes the names if necessary Addresses units IDs operator texts Select this option to ensure that the current configuration data are transferred at the time of transfer This is important if any changes were made to variable addresses or system attributes for the text entry for example S7_shortcut S7_unit between configuring and transferring the data Note Note that running the address and text update and the name update will increase the transfer time If you only made small changes such as changes to the upper or lower limit of a block parameter you do not need to activate these options e Create logs Cross reference lists This option is not r
70. depending on the modules with communication capability and how they are networked You will find special cases explained in the online help Example the local node is a CPU which is a node in an MPI subnet and in a PROFIBUS subnet its connection partner is a CPU which is also a node in the same MPI and PROFIBUS subnets In this case you can choose whether the connection runs via the MPI subnet or the PROFIBUS subnet Local Displays the local partner for the connection Partner Displays the connection partner for the connection The following are displayed for both the local partner and the connection partner Via CP CPU For the local node you can select via which module you want the connection to run by specifying the rack and slot of the module STEP 7 immediately matches up the selection boxes Interface Type and Via CP CPU for the local and the connection partners You can change the module of the connection partner only for the set interface type Interface Type For the local node you can select via which interface of the module you want the connection to run for example PROFIBUS or MPI of a CPU STEP 7 immediately matches up the selection boxes Via CP CPU and Interface Type for the local and the connection partners You cannot change the interface type of the connection partner Node Address The node address of the module directly connected to the subnet for example MPI address of th
71. disks MS DOS V6 22 and MS Windows V3 11 must be installed on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 19 14 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Procedure Starting Windows Automatically To install M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows on an M7 programmable control system with a hard disk follow the steps outlined below 1 In your project select the M7 program linked to the M7 CPU FM and start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System Open the Install Operating System tab and make the following selections Medium MPI RFS Possible Configuration M7 RMOS32 amp MS Windows Local Drive only on programming devices PCs with Windows 95 the first free drive for example F Partner Drive C for hard disk Click the Install button The dialog boxes then display messages about the current processes and tell you how to proceed You must perform the following steps Select a boot medium floppy disk or memory card Result A minimum M7 RMOS32 operating system is installed on the selected boot medium Select drives for the operating system and the data see Section 19 2 Insert the boot medium in the drive on the M7 programmable control system and start the M7 programmable control system Result The M7 system boots with the new operating system and an MPI connectio
72. exist e RUN with access rights to the STEP 7 user program using for example the programming device RUN P e RUN with access protection RUN e STOP e Memory reset MRES The SIMATIC S7 M7 programmable logic controllers recognize the following operating states STOP STARTUP RUN and HOLD A collective term for all functions which in conjunction with the hardware control and monitor the execution of the user programs the distribution of the operational equipment among the individual user programs and the maintenance of the operating mode for example MS DOS Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary Organization Block OB Process Image Process Image Input Table PII Process Image Output Table PIQ Program Programmable Logic Controller PLC Programmable Logic Control Programmable Module Programming Device Organization blocks form the interface between the S7 CPU operating system and the user program The sequence in which the user program should be processed is laid down in the organization blocks The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in a process image There is a process image input table PID and a process image output table PIQ The process image of the inputs is read in from the input modules by the operating system before the user program is processed The process image of the outputs is
73. for a new installation and was already described in Sections 19 4 19 5 and 19 6 Table 19 4 Reinstallation Existing When You Reinstall Operating System M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 with M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS MS Windows M7 RMOS32 As for a new Format the Format the destination installation of destination medium medium install M7 RMOS32 install MS DOS MS DOS and locally and reinstall MS Windows locally M7 RMOS32 and reinstall M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 As for a new Only a new Install MS Windows with MS DOS installation of M7 RMOS32 locally and reinstall M7 RMOS32 component is M7 RMOS32 reinstalled M7 RMOS32 As for a new Format the Only a new with installation of destination medium M7 RMOS32 MS Windows M7 RMOS32 install MS DOS component is locally and reinstall reinstalled M7 RMOS32 Note If you reinstall M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows via MPI RFS Windows must not be started already on the programmable control system If you reinstall M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows on an M7 programmable control system with M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS M7 RMOS32 must not be started meaning you must boot the M7 from a DOS boot disk before you install MS Windows 3 11 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Reinstalling on Reinstalling M7 RMOS32 on memory card is always a new installation For Memory Card M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS only the RMOS componen
74. local eta 1536 Byte data Figure 17 9 Performance Data Tab Uses You can use this function when you download a user program to a CPU and want to check first whether the CPU has the necessary requirements for example regarding the size of the load memory or the size of the process image Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 20 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 15 Displaying Available Blocks Blocks Dialog You open the Blocks dialog box using the Blocks button in the Box Performance Data tabbed page All the block types that can be processed by the module are displayed e User Blocks The maximum number of organization blocks OBs function blocks FBs functions FCs and data blocks DBs and their maximum permitted total block length The available OBs are listed with a description of their function e System Blocks The number of system functions SFCs and system function blocks SFBs and their maximum permitted total block length The available SFCs and SFBs are listed with their symbol and their block family Note It is not the blocks currently available in the module that are displayed but the standard blocks provided by the module SFCs SFBs or which can be processed by the module OBs You can display which blocks are currently downloaded to the module in the SIMATIC Manager Blocks Block Type Number Max Length Proper
75. of a module fault e Determining the causes for errors in user program processing with the help of the diagnostic buffer and the stack contents e Checking whether a user program can run on a particular CPU Diagnosing the hardware offers support with troubleshooting without you having to spend any additional time programming and enable you to recognize errors and faults quickly locate them exactly and correct them This reduces considerably the down times resulting from faults Chapter Overview 17 1 Displaying Module Information from the SIMATIC Manager 17 3 Diagnostics Symbols Tabs in the Module Information Dialog Box 17 14 Displaying Performance Data 17 15 Displaying Available Blocks 17 16 Displaying Communication Connections Displaying the Contents of Stacks S7 CPUs Only Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 1 Diagnosing Hardware 17 1 Displaying Module Information from the SIMATIC Manager Overview To display the status of the module you will require an online connection to the programmable controller either via the online view of a project or via the Accessible Nodes window Starting Point Starting from an open project in the SIMATIC Manager follow the steps Project outlined below 1 Display the project window with its online view 2 Select a station 3 Select a module or the S7 program in the station 4 Select the menu c
76. of the diagnostic buffer is retained following a memory reset The following entries are displayed as diagnostic events for example e Faults on a module e System errors in the CPU e Operating mode transitions for example from RUN to STOP e Errors in the user program e User messages entered in SFC52 see 234 Using the diagnostic buffer errors in the system can still be analyzed at a later time to find the cause of a STOP or to trace back and categorize the occurrence of individual diagnostic events The diagnostic buffer is designed as a cyclic buffer for a maximum of entries dependent on the module This means that when the maximum number of entries is reached the next diagnostic buffer event causes the oldest entry to be deleted All entries then move back one place This means that the newest entry is always the first entry in the diagnostic buffer For the S7 300 CPU 314 for example the maximum number of entries is 100 see Figure 17 3 Position 1 2 3 4 99 100 101st E 100th 99th oath 97th Ji 2nd ist 7 gt E Event entry Figure 17 3 Organization of the Entries in the Diagnostic Buffer The number of entries displayed in the diagnostic buffer is dependent on the module and its current operating mode Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 11 Diagnosing Hardware Displaying the Diagnostic Buffer 17 12 M
77. of the block properties Most objects can be cut copied or pasted as usual under Windows The menu commands for these functions are found in the Edit menu You can also move or copy objects by dragging and dropping If you attempt to move or copy to an illegal destination the cursor displays a prohibited sign as a warning When you copy an object the whole hierarchy beneath it is also copied This enables components you create in an automation task to be used again and again First open the object to display its content The print command is listed in the first menu at the left edge of the window for example File The command opens a dialog box in which you can set the printer the print range and the number of copies to be printed Some dialog boxes allow you to print parts of their contents These dialog boxes contain a Print button Click this button to start a printout Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation Renaming Objects You can change the name of an object directly or using the object properties e Directly When you slowly click twice on the name of a selected object or click F2 a frame appears around the text You can then change the name by typing a new name via the keyboard e Using object properties Select the required object and select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Change the name in the dialog box
78. partners of only one programmable module can be highlighted at any one time To display the properties of a station follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a station in the network view 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The object properties dialog box for the station is opened To display the properties of a module follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a module in a station in the network view 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The object properties dialog box for the module is opened Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 13 Configuring Networks Additional Context Functions for a Module You can execute the following functions if you have selected a module in the network view You will find the menu commands for these functions in the PLC menu in NETPRO e Display module information e Change the operating mode of a module e Clear reset a module e Set the date and time for a module 8 7 Special Feature when Configuring MPI Subnets in S7 300 Special S7 300 CP and FM Characteristic Rule 8 14 Communications processors CP and function modules FM with their own MPI address have a special feature their MPI address is calculated automatically by the CPU according to the pattern shown in Figure 8 6
79. programmable control system and start the M7 system Result The M7 programmable control system boots with the new operating system and an MPI connection is established between the PC programming device and the M7 programmable control system Partition the hard disk via the RTI Remote Terminal Interface or on the local console of the M7 programmable control system optional see Section 19 2 and format it see 282 Result The hard disk is partitioned and formatted Then the M7 RMOS32 operating system and any applications are installed on the hard disk of the M7 300 M7 400 via the MPI connection To download your application to the M7 programmable control system open the Programs tab and follow the procedure described under Downloading M7 Programs via MPI RFS on page 19 25 Start the M7 programmable control system again using the mode selector and adjust the BIOS Setup if required Result The M7 system boots with the new operating system from the hard disk Your application is started if it exists Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 11 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 5 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on Hard Disk Starting Point When shipped there is no executable operating system installed on the M7 programmable control system and no MPI connections are possible Requirement To install M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on the hard disk of the M7
80. relevant variable table Select the menu command PLC gt Connect To to establish a connection to the required CPU so you can modify the I O outputs of the active variable table Open the Operating Mode dialog box with the menu command PLC gt Operating Mode and switch the CPU to STOP mode Switch the Enable Peripheral Outputs mode on with the menu command Variable gt Enable Peripheral Output Enter the appropriate values for the peripheral outputs you want to modify in the Modify Value column Use the menu command Variable gt Activate Modify Values to modify the peripheral outputs You can enter more peripheral outputs and change the modify values Then start again with step 6 Select the menu command Variable gt Enable Peripheral Output to switch off this mode again Aborting with ESC If you press ESC while the Enable Peripheral Output function is active the function is terminated without a prompt Note The menu command Variable gt Enable Peripheral Output is only relevant in STOP mode The Enable Peripheral Outputs mode remains active until there is a mode transition Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 13 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware Overview This chapter describes the following topics e Displaying online information from a module and evaluating the causes
81. require one language type for programming an S7 300 S7 400 but you can mix the languages within a project if required If you are using a language for the first time it is recommended that you use the manual to learn about the methodology of creating a program in the chosen language first While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the respective editors compilers GRAPH HiGraph CFC Manuals The languages GRAPH HiGraph and CFC Continuous Function Chart offer additional methods of programming blocks in the form of sequential controls state graphs or charts The manuals contain both the user s guide and the reference description of the programming language If you are using a language for the first time it is recommended that you use the manual to learn about the methodology of creating a program in the chosen language first While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the respective editors compilers with the exception of HiGraph 1 Optional package for system software for S7 300 S7 400 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Where Does this There is a wide range of user documentation available to support you in Manual Fit in with configuring and programming an M7 programmable control system which is
82. select the menu command Options gt Customize A dialog box is displayed 2 In the Archive tabbed page select your preferred archive program The default is the archive program arj The standard configuration of STEP 7 assumes that the archive programs are installed in the DOS search path If the archive programs are installed elsewhere follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command Options gt Customize A dialog box is displayed 2 Using the Configure button in the Archive tabbed page open the Archive Configuration dialog box 3 Enter the path name for the archive program in the Program Path box or select it using the Browse button 4 Close the dialog boxes with OR You can also set target directories for archiving and for retrieving This saves you entering the directories during the archive or retrieve process To set target directories follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command Options gt Customize 2 In the dialog box select the Archive tab 3 Activate the option Use under Target Directory for Archiving and or Target Directory for Retrieving 4 Enter the path in the relevant text box or select a directory via the Browse button For retrieving you can choose to have the target directory option checked in every case 5 Close the dialog box with OR
83. selected CPU or M7 function module Duration of the longest shortest and last scan cycle of the selected CPU or M7 function module The current time operating hours and information about synchronizing clocks synchronization intervals Memory configuration address areas and the available blocks for the selected module CPU FM Display of all block types available in the scope of supply of the selected module List of OBs SFBs and SFCs you can use for this module To evaluate the cause of a fault in a DP slave Before downloading new or extended blocks to a CPU To keep a check on the configured minimum cycle time and the maximum and current cycle times To display and set the time and date of a module and to check the time synchronization Before and during the creation of a user program and to check whether an existing user program is compatible with a specific module Communication Transmission rates and overview of the To determine how many and which CPU or communication connections M7 FM connections are possible and how communication load and maximum frame many are in use size Stacks Display of the contents of the B stack To determine the cause of a transition to 17 8 I stack L stack and nesting stack You can also switch to the block editor STOP and to correct a block Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware Additional
84. self explanatory If you have not yet had experience of working with a user interface of this type in this chapter you can read about the most important operating elements and become familiar with the terminology used As a user with knowledge of Windows 95 NT you can simply read Section 3 1 to learn about how to start STEP 7 and skip the remaining sections in this chapter Chapter Section Description Overview Starting the STEP 7 Software 3 2 User Interface Windows 3 3 User Interface Dialog Boxes Calling the Help Functions 3 5 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout 3 6 Using Teleservice Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 3 1 User Interface 3 1 Starting the STEP 7 Software Starting Up SIMATIC Manager How to Proceed from Here 3 2 When you start Windows 95 NT you will find an icon for the SIMATIC Manager the starting point for the STEP 7 software on the Windows interface The quickest method to start STEP 7 is to position the cursor on the icon and double click The window containing the SIMATIC Manager is then opened From here you can access all the functions you installed both in the standard software and in the optional packages Alternatively you can also start the SIMATIC Manager via the Start button in the taskbar in Windows 95 NT entry under SIMATIC STEP 7 Note You will find more information about standard Windows ope
85. start up an M7 RMOS32 operating system on a memory card the following steps are necessary 1 In your project select the M7 program which is linked to the M7 CPU FM 2 Start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3 Open the Install Operating System tab 4 Install an M7 RMOS32 operating system locally on the memory card by making the following selections Medium Memory Card Possible Configuration M7 RMOS32 5 Click the Install button The dialog box displays messages about the current processes Result The operating system and the complete M7 system software are transferred to the memory card 6 Transfer your application with all the relevant project data locally to the memory card Switch to the Programs tab to do this and proceed as described under Downloading M7 Programs via Data Medium on page 19 26 This step is optional 7 Insert the memory card in the M7 programmable control system and start it using the mode selector Adjust the BIOS Setup if required Result The M7 programmable control system boots with the new operating system Your application is started The installation of M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on memory card is described in 282 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 9 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 4 Installing M7 RMOS32 on Hard Disk Starting Point Require
86. table Symbols object is created automatically when you create an S7 or M7 program The structure can be seen in Figure 6 1 f Symbol Editor S7_Pro1 SIMATIC 300 Station CPU312 Symbols BE x Table Edit Insert View Options Window Help altel co SC offre Ascenaing yf we a L S7_Pro1 SIMATIC 300 Station CPU312 Symbols Sym Q12 0 Q 12 0 BOOL Com_Q12 0 Sym Q12 1 Q 12 1 BOOL Com_Q12 1 Figure 6 1 Structure of the Symbol Table Symbol The symbolic name must not be longer than 24 characters A symbol table can contain a maximum of 16 000 symbols Address An address is the abbreviation for a particular memory area and memory location Example I 12 1 The syntax of the address is checked as it is entered A check is also made to see whether the address may be assigned the specified data type Data Type You can choose between a number of data types available in STEP 7 The data type field already contains a default data type which you may change if necessary If the change you make is not suitable for the address and its syntax is incorrect an error message appears as you exit the field Comment You can assign comments to all symbols The combination of brief symbolic names and more detailed comments makes creating programs more effective and makes your program documentation more complete A comment can be up to 80 characters in length O M C Columns T
87. textual language similar to machine code whose instructions execute simple operations A number of instructions can be linked together to form networks see Section 11 3 The text editors for Statement List and SCL allow you to enter your program in a source file The source files are stored in the source files container of your S7 program as an STL source file or SCL source file A source file can contain the code for one or more blocks With this editor you can create code for OBs FBs FCs DBs and UDTs meaning for a whole user program Only when you compile the source file are the respective blocks created and stored in the user program If you do not want to use absolute addresses in your program you can use symbolic access to address signals or blocks using the symbols in the symbol table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs 11 5 Programming Blocks with S7 Graph What Is S7 Graph Based On Blocks Created Symbolic Access Source File The graphic programming language S7 Graph allows you to program sequential controls as a series of steps This includes creating a series of steps determining the contents of each step and determining the transitions You program the contents of the steps in a special programming language similar to Statement List and you enter the transitions in a Ladder Logic editor a streamlined version of the Ladder Logic instruct
88. the configuration table more rows with special numbers for example 2 1 appear below the relevant row These rows represent the interfaces or interface submodule slots Table 7 1 shows you some examples Table 7 1 Relationship between Interface Submodule and Configuration Table Configuration Example Transferring the Example to the Configuration Table CPU with 2 CPU 488 3 interface submodule 5 slots can take up to 2 interface submodules me UR 0 1 Mrs Interface Submodule 2 E cpu 21 W A 22 W l s M7 400 CPU or FM with CPU EXM CPU EXM expansion module sfs can take up to 3 interface gt submodules E UR 0 1 Eps b 2 cpu M7 300 3 M Exm 31 W F 3 2 fi M7 400 Interface Submodules Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 5 Example 3 Structure of C7 Control Systems Overview In a C7 control system C7 620 the following components are integrated in one casing e SIMATIC 300 CPU e Inputs and outputs digital and analog e Interface module IM 360 for connecting further SIMATIC 300 modules e Line oriented operator panel with a printer port Simplified The C7 control system is not mounted on a rail this means you do not have Procedure to arrange a rack Requirement The station window and Hardware Catalog window must be visible Configuring C7 To configure a C7 con
89. the contents of an object of this type there is also a command for downloading this object Section Description Displaying and Changing the Operating Mode 15 2 Memory and Load Concept Downloading User Programs from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller 15 5 Downloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller 15 6 Deleting Blocks on the CPU in a Programmable Controller 15 9 15 7 Reloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller 15 8 Editing Blocks from the CPU in the Programming Device 15 9 Compressing the User Memory RAM 15 12 15 10 Saving the RAM Contents of the CPU to the Integrated EPROM Saving Blocks and User Programs on a Memory Card Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 1 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 1 Displaying and Changing the Operating Mode Overview Operating Mode Transitions RUN STOP STOP RUN Complete Restart STOP RUN Restart 15 2 Operating modes describe the behavior of the CPU at a particular point in time The most important operating modes are RUN STARTUP complete restart or restart HOLD and STOP An exact description of the operating modes and transitions can be found in the Programming Manual for S7 300 and S7 400 234 Operating mode transitions are caused by events in the program s
90. the firmware is updated automatically The update is completed when the following LEDs are lit continuously The USR LED on the M7 300 CPU FM The USRI LED on the M7 400 CPU FM 8 Remove the boot medium from the M7 programmable control system and boot it from the preset mass storage medium memory card hard disk etc Note If the firmware on the boot medium is incompatible with the module type or older than the existing firmware version the firmware is not updated and the error LED SF LED on the M7 300 and INTF LED on the M7 400 lights up In case of an error you should follow the steps outlined below 1 Remove the boot medium from the M7 programmable control system 2 Check whether the version of the BIOS of the M7 300 M7 400 module is higher than the version of the new firmware In this case an update is not necessary and also not possible Check that the station for the current project matches the module type of the M7 programmable control system If this is not the case adapt your project and run the firmware update again Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 10 Downloading and Deleting Programs on the M7 Programmable Control System Uses Requirement Procedure Selecting Programs STEP 7 enables you to use the M7 management functions to do the following Download M7 applications with all the re
91. the programmable control system via the MPI at a later time a software component may not be displayed in the PLC System selection list and cannot therefore be deleted Deleting M7 To delete M7 programs online from the M7 programmable control system Programs follow the steps outlined below 1 Execute steps 1 through 4 as for downloading applications via MPI RFS 2 Select the software components you want to delete in the PLC System list box 3 Click the Delete button Result The selected software components are deleted from the programmable control system drive Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 27 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Starting M7 Programs 19 28 The following methods are possible for starting applications on the M7 programmable control system 1 Via the local console or via the Remote Terminal Interface RTI while the system is running Operating the RTI is described in the M7 SYS User Manual Via an entry in the ETC INITTAB file when the system starts up This file is read immediately after the operating system is booted It contains the calls for all the programs which must be executed automatically on system startup When you install the applications together with the operating system or via MPI RFS they are entered in the ETC INITTAB file automatically When programs are downloaded without the operating s
92. the same basis or to change parameter settings Requirement A connection must exist between the programmable controller and the programming device 1 Select the menu command PLC gt Upload The dialog box for opening the configuration appears 2 Select the project in which the configuration is to be stored later and confirm with OK 3 In the dialog box which then appears set the node address rack number and slot in the module from which the configuration should be read generally CPU Confirm your settings with OR You can assign a station name to this configuration using the menu command Station gt Properties and then save it in the default project menu command Station gt Save Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Specifying When uploading a configuration to the programming device without the Modules offline configuration existing on the programming device STEP 7 cannot determine exactly the order numbers of all the components You can specify the incomplete order numbers as follows 1 Select the component you want to specify 2 Select the menu command Options gt Specify Module 3 In the dialog box which then appears select the order number that corresponds exactly to the inserted component Note By uploading the station configuration and then specifying the modules you can also assign parameters t
93. transferred to the output modules at the end of the user program by the operating system Collective term for S7 and M7 programs A programmable logic controller is the controller or any of its components on which the user program is run Programmable logic controllers are for example SIMATIC S7 M7 and C7 Programmable logic control is the automation technique using electronic controllers whose function is stored in the control device as a program The structure and the wiring of the device are not therefore dependent on the function of the controller A programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer it consists of a CPU with memory I O modules and internal bus system The I O and the programming language are set up according to the requirements of control engineering Programmable modules are CPUs function modules FMs and communications processors CPs CPUs FMs and CPs can process user programs they communicate with each other via the communication bus C bus The device used to create user programs for the programmable controller For example this device may be a Siemens programming device PG with Windows and the STEP 7 software or a PC Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 9 Glossary Programming Device PG Programming Language Project RAM Reference Data Restart Retentive RUN Glossary 10 A personal computer with
94. with a table editor you are familiar with such as Microsoft Excel and then import the file into the symbol table see Section 6 6 There are a number of ways of opening a symbol table e Double click the symbol table in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager e Select the symbol table in the project window and select the menu command Edit gt Open Object The symbol table for the active program is displayed in its own window where you can now create or change symbols When you open a symbol table for the first time after it was created it is empty To enter new symbols in the symbol table position the cursor in the first empty row of the table and fill out the cells You can insert new empty rows before the current row in the symbol table using the menu command Insert gt Symbol You can copy and modify existing entries using the commands in the Edit menu Save and then close the symbol table You can also save symbols which have not been completely defined see Section 6 3 The data records in the symbol table can be sorted alphabetically according to symbol address data type or comment You can change the way the table is sorted by selecting different sort criteria in the view bar of the symbol table or by using the menu command View gt Sort to open a dialog box and define the sorted view You can use a filter to select a subset of the records in a symbol table In the view bar of the symbol table you can set the dis
95. you can put together the whole configuration in STEP 7 using drag amp drop The following sections show examples of different hardware components to illustrate what you must look out for Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 5 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 3 Example 1 Central Structure Configuring a For a central structure you arrange the modules beside the CPU in a rack and Central Structure continue into additional expansion racks The number of racks which can be configured depends on the CPU you used Procedure Just as you do in a real plant you arrange your modules in racks with STEP 7 The difference is that in STEP 7 racks are represented by configuration tables that have as many rows as the rack has slots for modules Transferring the Figure 7 3 shows an example of how a real structure is converted into a Structure toa configuration table Configuration Table Configuration table upper part of the station window _ Rack 0 l x om 5 a oO
96. 0 cece eee eee eee eee eee nee 16 1 Overview 1 nen e nent eee 16 2 16 2 Creating a Variable Table 2 cece naea 16 4 16 3 Editing a Variable Table 0 0 cece cece eee eee 16 5 16 4 Establishing Connections to CPUS 0 00 cece cent eees 16 7 16 5 Setting Triggers 2 ciiir ewoi niaii demni manii eani e i 16 8 16 6 Monitoring and Modifying Values nassaan ananena 16 9 16 7 Information on Forcing Variables 2 0 cece eee ees 16 10 16 8 Creating and Deleting Force Jobs 0 0c cece eee eee eee 16 12 16 9 Enabling Peripheral Outputs PQ 0 00 cece eee eee eee 16 13 Diagnosing Hardware 0 cece eect eee eee eee eens 17 1 17 1 Displaying Module Information from the SIMATIC Manager 17 2 17 2 Displaying Module Information from Configuration Tables 17 3 17 3 Diagnostics Symbols 00 ccc eee eee eee ees 17 4 17 4 TrOUDIGSHOOUNG ereer ianei eine deeped E PEA sep eds beadsaged ees 17 6 17 5 Module Type Dependent Information 0 cece eee eee 17 7 17 6 Tabs in the Module Information Dialog Box 2 00eeeeee 17 8 17 7 Displaying General Module Data 000 cece eee eee eee 17 10 17 8 Displaying the Content of the Diagnostic Buffer 17 11 17 9 Displaying Diagnostic Interrupts 0 eee eee 17 14 17 10 Displaying DP Slave Diagnostics 0006 cece eee eee 17
97. 0 G7076 C552 01 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems Which Software The specific tools required to create M7 applications are partly integrated in Offers Which Type STEP 7 and partly in the M7 software options Table 18 3 shows you which of Support software package supports which tasks Table 18 3 Software Involved in Creating M7 Programs Software STEP 7 M7 SYS M7 ProC C Borland C CFC Support Offered Installing the M7 operating system Managing the M7 programmable control system Downloading starting and deleting the M7 programs Displaying status and diagnostic data Resetting the CPU The M7 operating system and M7 system software utilities help with the following Controlling program processing Managing memory and resources Access to computer hardware and SIMATIC hardware Handling interrupts Diagnostics Status monitoring Communication By integrated code creation integrating the Borland development environment into STEP 7 By linking project symbols into the source code By integrated debugging functions Creating C and C programs Creating testing and debugging CFC programs Starting and running CFC programs 18 4 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems 18 2 M7 300 M7 400 Operating Systems Overview Standard Operating Systems Real Time Operating System Operating System
98. 00 G7076 C552 01 16 7 Debugging User Programs 16 5 Setting Triggers Overview Setting Trigger Points and Trigger Frequency Trigger Immediately 16 8 By selecting a trigger point you determine the point in time at which the modify values are assigned to the variables and at which the monitor values of variables are displayed Using the menu command Variable gt Trigger you can do the following e Select one of the following trigger points Start of Cycle End of Cycle or Transition to STOP see Figure 16 3 e Select Once or Every Cycle as the trigger frequency Process image input table Trigger point Start of Cycle e OB1 T Trigger point Transition to STOP Trigger point End of Cycle Process image output table Figure 16 3 Trigger Points The following applies to trigger points when modifying variables e If you set Once as the trigger frequency a message appears if the selected variables cannot be modified e With the trigger frequency Every Cycle no message appears If you set the same trigger point when monitoring and modifying the monitor value is displayed before modifying because the Monitor function is executed before the Modify function To display the modified value you should set the trigger point for monitoring to Start of Cycle and the trigger point
99. 00 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 3 Assigning and Editing Symbol Related Messages Overview With a symbol related message you can scan a signal in a predefined time frame to determine whether a signal change has taken place in order to send a message Symbol related messages SCAN are assigned directly to a signal in the symbol table Permitted signals are all Boolean addresses inputs I outputs Q and bit memory M You can assign these signals different attributes messages texts and up to 10 accompanying values with the message configuration function You can make it easier to select signals in the symbol table by setting filters Requirements Before you can create a symbol related message you must have done the following e Created a project and an S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager e Entered the signal to which you want to assign the message SCAN in the symbol table in the S7 program e Selected the row in the symbol table in which the respective signal I Q M is located You will find the exact procedure for creating projects and related objects in Chapter 5 Basic Procedure To configure symbol related messages follow the steps outlined below Select the row containing the required signal in the symbol table gt Steps 1 and 2 Open the message configuration eS Step 3 application Fill out the tabs displayed D Steps
100. 000 G7076 C552 01 8 1 Configuring Networks Network and A plant network consists of one or more subnets with different network types Subnets PROFIBUS Industrial Ethernet MPI point to point connection The individual stations are connected to these subnets Example of a Plant Figure 8 1 shows an example of a plant network The network comprises two Network MPI subnets and one PROFIBUS subnet Project Programmable Coniroller CPU FM CP CPU mA Ji 2 2 2 Oo a o MPI MPI address address PROFIBUS address First MPI subnet PROFIBUS subnet amp MPI address CPU CPU CPU CP l 2 al Second MPI subnet Figure 8 1 Example of a Plant Configuration Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 8 2 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks Network Configurations Other Stations A network configuration can contain One or more subnets in a project SIMATIC 300 and SIMATIC 400 stations in subnets PGs PCs SIMATIC S5 stations and other stations also in subnets One or more subnets in a number of projects Other stations in the current project are one of the following Devices from other manufacturers or SIMATIC
101. 000 G7076 C552 01 7 25 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Downloading the Once you have saved and compiled an error free and consistent Configuration to configuration downloadable system data blocks SDBs are created Memory Card automatically To download the system data blocks to a memory card follow the steps outlined below 1 Insert the memory card in the slot on your programming device or PC 2 Open the S7 Memory Card window in the SIMATIC Manager menu command File gt S7 Memory Card gt Open 3 Open the relevant user program in the SIMATIC Manager in which the SDBs are stored Blocks container 4 Drag the symbol for system data blocks to the S7 Memory Card window Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 7 26 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 13 Editing a Station Configuration Overview Exchanging Modules Selecting a Number of Rows Moving Modules Handling Complex Stations This section contains tips on making it easier to work with the hardware configuration application If you already created a configuration and you want to replace a module with parameters assigned for example CPU or analog module by another module without losing the parameters or connections you configured follow the steps outlined below 1 Drag the module to the slot containing the CPU you want to replace 2 Confirm you want to replac
102. 11 5 Function blocks for communication connections 10 5 for FMS connections 10 7 Functional unit S7 HiGraph 11 9 Functions for communication connections 10 5 for FDL connections 10 7 for ISO Transport connections 10 7 for ISO on TCP connections 10 7 G GD 9 2 GD circle 9 2 GD communication 9 2 See also Global data communication GD packet GD status 9 10 GD_RCV 9 9 GD_SND 9 9 GDS See GD status GET 10 6 Global data 9 2 Global data communication configuration example Graph group 11 9 Group status global data 9 10 GST See Group status H Help online calling 3 5 contents 3 5 HiGraph 11 9 HiGraph source file 11 10 l I stack 17 23 Icons STEP 7 objects B 1 Index 3 Index Importing external source file 5 8 symbol table 6 8 Industrial Ethernet Input output address 7 21 assigning 7 22 Inserting block station Installation requirements 2 2 Installing STEP 7 2 7 Instance data block 11 8 Intelligent DP slave Interface module Interrupt assignment checking Interrupt stack 17 23 ISO Transport connection 10 14 ISO on TCP connection 10 14 L L stack 17 23 LAD See Ladder Logic Ladder Logic 11 5 Language editor starting 11 4 Language editors 11 2 Library 5 7 archiving 20 4 retrieving 20 5 List box List entries sorting 14 5 Load memory 15 4 Local data requirement maximum 14 9 Local
103. 15 17 11 Displaying the User Memory Utilization 0 cece eee 17 16 17 12 Displaying Scan Cycle Times 0 06 cece e cece 17 18 17 13 Setting Time Information 0 c cee eee 17 19 17 14 Displaying Performance Data 0 cece cece 17 20 17 15 Displaying Available Blocks 0 cece neces 17 21 17 16 Displaying Communication Connections 000 eee eee 17 22 17 17 Displaying the Contents of Stacks S7 CPUs Only Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems 0 000eeeeeee 18 1 M7 Optional Software 0 000 c eee ee eee 18 2 18 2 M7 300 M7 400 Operating Systems 0 0 cece eee eee 18 5 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 002200eeeee eee 19 1 Preparing for Installation 00 00 c cece eects 19 2 19 2 Data Backup in Case of Power Failure 22 00 ceeeeeeeee 19 8 19 3 Installing M7 RMOS32 on a Memory Card 2 0000 cee eee 19 9 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Contents 19 4 Installing M7 RMOS32 on Hard Disk 00000 e eee eee 19 10 19 5 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on Hard Disk 19 12 19 6 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows on Hard Disk 19 14 19 7 Reinstalling the M7 Operating System 0 0060 e eee eee eee 19 16 19 8 Updating the Operating System for Exchanging Modules in the Field 1
104. 2 GD Defining Global Data Global Data for Subnet MPI Subnet 1 GD Table Edit Insert PLC View Window Help sals e seese ml x7 GD Identifier GD GD GD GD GD Editing Offline Z Figure 9 2 View of a New Global Data Table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 3 Configuring Global Data Communication Global Data Tables Using the menu command GD Table gt Open gt Global Data for Subnet you for Subnets can open more global data tables from selectable subnets Global Data Tables Using the menu command GD Table gt Open gt Global Data for CPU you for CPUs can display global data tables from the system data for existing CPUs online and offline for service purposes or troubleshooting for example Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 9 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 3 Filling Out a Global Data Table Entries in the Global Data Table Filling Out the Global Data Table Example In the global data table you enter which CPUs are to exchange data and the address areas for the data to be exchanged As an option you can also specify e A scan rate which determines after how many CPU scan cycles the data are to be sent or received e An address area double word for status information Creating connections as
105. 4 to 10 Save your configuration data by generating a system data block o gt Steps 11 and 12 Download the generated SDB to your programmable controller o gt PIEP 1S Transfer the data you configured to the WinCC database gt Section 12 6 Figure 12 5 Procedure for Configuring Symbol Related Messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 11 Creating and Displaying Messages Procedure 12 12 To create symbol related messages follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the required symbol table in the corresponding project and S7 program and open the symbol table 2 Choose the signal to which you want to assign a symbol related message and select the whole row Permitted signals are inputs I outputs Q and bit memory M of the data type BOOL 3 Open the message configuration application with the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Message Result The message configuration application and the Attributes tab are opened 4 Fill out the Attributes and Text tabbed pages In the SCAN Attributes tab the signal selected in the symbol table via which you gained entry to the message configuration application is displayed as an absolute address and as a symbolic address as shown in Figure 12 6 Message Configuration Contents Of C Siemens step7 s7proj S7prog v Message T
106. 5 14 Memory cards are portable data media They contain electrically erasable flash EPROMs as memory chips The data stored on them are retained following power down and when the CPU is reset Memory cards are written in the slot on the programming device and then inserted in a CPU If you click the S7 Memory Card button in the toolbar in the SIMATIC Manager the object structure on the memory card is displayed in a window The memory card must be in the slot on the programming device PG or the external prommer for PCs to do this To save blocks or user programs to a memory card follow the steps outlined below 1 Check that the memory card is inserted in the programming device slot and click the S7 Memory Card button in the toolbar in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select individual blocks or the Blocks container that you want to save in the project window or the online project window 3 Drag the selected objects using the mouse to the window displaying the content of the memory card or copy the objects using the menu commands Edit gt Copy and Edit gt Paste 4 Ifa block already exists on the memory card an error message is displayed In this case delete the content of the memory card and repeat steps 2 and 3 Result The executable blocks are saved on the memory card You can only erase the whole content of a memory card in S7 You cannot delete individual blocks For M7 however individual objects can be del
107. 7 PG PC us us with WinCC PTP Connection Point to Point S7 S7 S7 S5 S7 SFBs BSEND computer protocol non Siemens device BRCYV GET RK512 3964 R S7 partner in another PUT STATUS project S7 PRINT non Siemens device FMS Connection PROFIBUS S7 S7 S7 S5 S7 FBs READ FMS protocol PG PC WRITE S7 non Siemens IDENTIFY device S7 broadcast ACCESS to all nodes OSTATUS S7 partner in another REPORT project S7 S5 PG PC non Siemens device FDL Connection PROFIBUS S7 S7 S7 S5 S7 FCs AG SEND FDL protocol PG PC AG RECEIVE S7 non Siemens device S7 partner in another project S7 S5 PG PC non Siemens device 10 5 Establishing Communication Connections Blocks for S7 Connections Blocks for PTP Connections 10 6 Table 10 1 Connection Type ISO Transport Connection Selecting the Connection Type continued Subnet Type Industrial Ethernet ISO Transport protocol Connection between SIMATIC S7 S7 S7 S5 S7 PG PC S7 non Siemens device Communication Blocks FCs AG SEND AG RECEIVE S7 unspecified S7 partner in another project S7 S5 PG PC non Siemens device unspecified S7 S7 S7 S5 S7 FCs AG SEND PG PC S7 AG RECEIVE non Siemens device S7 unspecified Industrial Ethernet TCP IP protocol ISO on TCP Connection S7 partner in another project S7
108. 7 400 System and Standard Functions Manual Function Block Diagram FBD for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming Manual CFC Continuous Function Charts Volume 2 ST M7 Manual Structured Control Language SCL for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming Manual GRAPH for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming Sequential Control Systems Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 C 1 Literature List 252 253 254 262 270 1271 280 281 282 290 291 500 501 800 801 802 803 C 2 Manual HiGraph for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming State Graphs Manual C Programming for S7 300 and S7 400 Writing C Programs Manual CFC Continuous Function Charts Volumel Getting Started Process Control System PCS 7 Manual 7 PDIAG for S7 300 and S7 400 Configuring Process Diagnostics for LAD STL and FBD Manual NETPRO Configuring Networks Programming Manual System Software for M7 300 and M7 400 Program Design Reference Manual System Software for M7 300 and M7 400 System and Standard Functions User Manual System Software for M7 300 and M7 400 Installation and Operation User Manual ProC C for M7 300 and M7 400 Writing C Programs User Manual ProC C for M7 300 and M7 400 Debugging C Programs Manual SIMATIC NET NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet Manual SIMATIC NET NCM S7 for PROFIBUS DOCPRO Creating Documentatio
109. 7 Programmable Control Systems Installing MS DOS and MS Windows Partitioning the Hard Disk Formatting the Destination Medium Before you install one of the operating system configurations with MS DOS or MS Windows you must install these operating systems from floppy disk directly onto the M7 programmable control system in the following order see also 282 1 Install MS DOS V6 22 if you want to install RMOS with MS DOS or MS Windows 2 Install MS Windows V3 1X if you want to install RMOS with MS Windows You can then install M7 RMOS32 as described in the following sections If you install the operating system on your hard disk we recommend you create two partitions to ensure that data are not lost following a power failure see Section 19 2 You can partition the hard disk with the following commands e hdpart under M7 RMOS32 see Chapter 5 in 282 e fdisk under MS DOS In general the destination medium is formatted before the operating system is installed for the first time With the M7 operating system configurations you must format the destination medium in the following cases Operating System Destination Medium is Formatted M7 RMOS32 Before each new installation or reinstallation because M7 RMOS32 when it runs without MS DOS must always be written at the start of the memory M7 RMOS32 with Before MS DOS is installed for the first time MS DOS Windows During the installation of M7 RMOS32 without
110. 7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 7 Creating and Editing Projects Creating Source If you want to create a source file in a particular programming language or a Files and CFC CFC chart select the existing Source Files or Charts object in the S7 Charts program and then select the menu command Insert gt S7 Software In the submenu you can select the source file which matches your programming language You can now open the empty source file and start entering your program Creating Programs If you want to create programs for the RMOS operating system for a for M7 programmable module in the M7 range select the M7 program and then click the menu command Insert gt M7 Software In the submenu you can select the object which matches your programming language or operating system You can now open the object you created to access the relevant programming environment You will find a list of the optional software available for SIMATIC M7 300 M7 400 in Chapter 1 Creating a Symbol An empty symbol table Symbols object is created automatically when Table the S7 M7 program is created When you open the symbol table the Symbol Editor window opens displaying a symbol table where you can define symbols see Chapter 6 for more details Inserting External You can create and edit source files with any ASCII editor You can then Source Files import these files into your project and compile the
111. 9 18 19 9 Updating the Firmware 000 0 cece eee 19 10 Downloading and Deleting Programs on the M7 Programmable Control SVS aE EA eens ceive aS ues E E one E E E nat 19 23 19 11 M7 300 M7 400 Monitoring and Modifying Functions 19 29 20 AVCHIVING esns er ae a S a ated 20 1 Archive Programs 0 0 e eee ete 20 2 20 2 Archiving Projects and Libraries 0 c cece eee 20 3 20 3 Retrieving Projects and Libraries 0 0 cee eee ees 20 5 24 Printing eseis ie cance adadd a a cae a E 21 1 A Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions 000 cece eects A 1 Opening Version 1 Projects asua 0c cece eee eee A 2 A 2 Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions Other Than Version Dae ou ae E ae ates ae nana E E E Coe toe a ae A 3 B Objects and Object Hierarchy 000cce eee e eee eens Cc Literature List so sis cio tect especie REER ewe sees eee ee C 1 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual XVI C79000 G7076 C552 01 Part 1 Preparing fora Programming Session Product Overview Installing and Uninstalling User Interface STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation Creating and Editing Projects Assigning Symbols O a A W N Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Product Overview What is STEP 7 Standard Software STEP 7 is the software used for configuring and progra
112. 9000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs Overview Chapter Overview To create an S7 program you will need to choose a suitable STEP 7 programming language You have the choice of a number of different languages and editors Creating a program in some programming languages Ladder Logic Statement List Function Block Diagram S7 SCL allows you to create all the types of block required for a user program With others S7 Graph S7 HiGraph you can create only certain types of block But with all the editors the aim is the same to create a functioning user program consisting of blocks This chapter provides you with an overview of the main possibilities available for creating programs The operation of the various editors the debugging functions specific to the languages and the syntax and instruction range for each language are described in the manuals for the various languages Creating M7 programs is described in Chapter 18 Section Description Page Programming S7 CPUs 11 2 Selecting the Programming Language and the Editor Programming Blocks with Ladder Logic Statement List and Function Block Diagram Programming Source Files with Statement List and S7 SCL 11 5 Programming Blocks with S7 Graph 11 6 Programming Source Files with S7 HiGraph Programming in the CFC Programming Language Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating Us
113. Assignments 00 0 e eect teens 14 10 14 8 Displaying Unused Symbols 0000 ccc eee eee eee ees 14 12 14 9 Displaying Addresses without Symbols 2202 0 eee eeee eee 14 13 15 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 00ee ee eee eres 15 1 15 1 Displaying and Changing the Operating Mode 00 15 2 15 2 Memory and Load Concept cece eee ete eee e eens 15 4 15 3 Resetting the CPU in a Programmable Controller 15 6 15 4 Downloading User Programs from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller nauan eee cece eee eens 15 7 15 5 Downloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller aifuai iiiu ii Glad Ghani a lowed bd ei ir a Anno 15 8 15 6 Deleting Blocks on the CPU in a Programmable Controller 15 9 15 7 Reloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable CONMONSE sv pcre te eu ghaeed er eu de nee ere eed ba Ena E E eee tnadd 15 10 15 8 Editing Blocks from the CPU in the Programming Device 15 11 15 9 Compressing the User Memory RAM 0000eeeee eee eee 15 12 15 10 Saving the RAM Contents of the CPU to the Integrated EPROM 15 13 15 11 Saving Blocks and User Programs on a Memory Card 15 14 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual XIV C79000 G7076 C552 01 Contents 16 17 18 19 Debugging User Programs
114. B10 dbten 66 SFBO CTU DB100 66 SFC52 WR_USMSG 66 _ SFBO CTU DB100 42 SFC52 WR_USMSG 42 Si ie Peau A Figure 14 2 Example of a Program Structure Displayed as a Tree Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data Maximal Local Data Requirement Parent Child Structure Jumping from the Program Structure to a Place in the Program To give you a quick overview of the local data requirement of the organization blocks in the user program displayed the following can be displayed in the tree structure e The maximum local data requirement per OB and e The local data requirement per path You can activate and deactivate this display in the Program Structure tab To display the local data requirement of a selected block click the right mouse button and select the Block Information menu item in the context sensitive menu If you selected the parent child structure the called block and the block to be called are displayed Depending on the settings in the Program Structure tab more information can be displayed To jump from the program structure to the relevant part of the program follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a block 2 Click the right mouse button A context sensitive menu app
115. Click the check box in front of the list entries and specify which messages should be received for the module A activates ALARM_S messages event and alarm messages W activates user and system diagnostics messages You will find more information on the settings in the CPU Messages online help Set the mode in which you want the incoming messages to be displayed Top The window containing the CPU messages appears in the foreground The window is topped every time a new message is received Background The CPU messages are received in the background The window remains in the background when new messages are received and can be brought to the foreground if required Ignore The CPU messages are not displayed and in contrast to the other two modes not archived Set the size of the archive You can set between 40 and 2000 messages Close the dialog box when you have completed your settings As soon as the above messages occur they are written in the archive and displayed in the form you selected Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Overview Chapter Overview STEP 7 provides a user friendly operator control and monitoring interface for variables in your process or programmable controller using WinCC The advantage of this method over previous methods is that you no longer need to configure data separately for each operato
116. Communication Bus C Bus 187500 bps 187500 bps M Connection Overview Max Number of Communication Connections 4 Reserved Used Connections to PG 1 1 Connections to Ol 1 0 Configured Connections 0 0 m Communication Load Frame Configured Maximum Load 20 Max PDU Size 240 Bytes Update Print Help Figure 17 11 Communication Tab This function enables you to check the communication connections and obtain information on possible connections or connections currently in use between the selected CPU FM and the connected devices In addition to the maximum number of communication connections for the module the reserved connections and connections in use between the CPU FM 356 FM 456 and programming devices or operator interface systems are displayed Under Configured Connections the connections for the CPU FM 356 FM 456 that can be configured via communication function blocks are displayed The maximum configured CPU load from communication functions can lie between 5 and 50 This setting is made with the CPU parameters The value set here specifies the maximum value for the percentage of the CPU s functions which can be taken up by communication tasks The maximum size of the layer 7 protocol data unit PDU is displayed here Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 17 Displaying the Contents of Stacks S7 CPUs Only Stacks
117. Configuration for M7 The standardized AT computer architecture of the M7 300 M7 400 automation computers means they form a freely programmable expansion to the SIMATIC automation system You can create SIMATIC M7 applications in a high level language such as C or graphically with CFC The utilities offered by the operating system are of prime importance for applications created using the high level languages C and C The operating system takes on the following tasks for the application e Accessing the hardware e Managing resources e System integration Communication with other components in the system For AT compatible computers MS DOS and MS Windows have established themselves as the standard operating systems These standard operating systems are however not particularly suited to solving automation tasks Using MS DOS and Windows alone it is not possible to solve real time automation tasks use the hardware specific to SIMATIC S7 and M7 or access system data For this reason the real time operating system RMOS Realtime Multitasking Operating System is used with the SIMATIC M7 automation computer RMOS has been extended to include a call interface the M7 API Application Programming Interface to integrate it into the SIMATIC system The real time operating system M7 RMOS372 is used for 32 bit applications in time critical real time and multitasking solutions It is available in the following configurations for M7 modu
118. Cs in the user program A communication connection is a logical connection and identifies e The nodes involved in communication e The type of connection for example S7 point to point FDL or ISO transport link e Special properties such as whether a connection remains permanently configured or whether it is set up broken dynamically in the user program Why Are The connection defines the communication properties between two nodes Connections STEP 7 saves all the properties for a connection and assigns a unique name in Specified each connection for every communication partner the so called connection ID You only need to use this connection ID when you assign parameters to communication blocks thereby making programming much simpler Procedure To create a communication connection follow the procedure shown in the figure below Create a project in the SIMATIC Manager Y Assign parameters to a subnet i Specify which nodes are to exchange data t Configure and connect at least 2 programmable modules CPU FM t Enter the connections in the connection table t Set the object properties for the connections t Download the configuration data to the programmable modules involved in communication Figure 10 1 Procedure for Configuring a Communication Connection Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 10 2 C79000
119. E contains the information you nodes have displayed or are editing Status bar Press F1 for help E ai Figure 3 1 Components of a Window Title Bar and Menu The title bar and menu bar are always found at the top of a window The title Bar Toolbar Status Bar bar contains the title of the window and icons for controlling the window The menu bar contains all menus available in the window The toolbar contains icons or tool buttons which provide shortcuts to frequently used and currently available menu bar commands via a single mouse click A brief description of the function of the respective button is displayed together with an additional explanation in the status bar when you position the cursor briefly on the button Using the Accessible Nodes and S7 Memory Card buttons it is possible to open a window in which either all accessible communication partners or the contents of a memory card are displayed The memory card must be inserted in the slot on your programming device before its contents can be displayed If neither of these access types are available in your current configuration the buttons are inactive and displayed in gray The status bar displays context dependent information Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 3 3 User Interface 3 3 User Interface Dialog Boxes Making Entrie
120. EE754 FloatToFloat Binary_variable Binary_variable Figure 13 2 Operator Control and Monitoring Dialog Box WinCC Attributes Tab 7 Inthe table shown enter the required attribute values for all function block parameters to be used in operator control and monitoring Refer to the online help for the meanings of the WinCC attributes 8 Close the dialog box by clicking the OK button 9 Repeat steps 2 to 8 for each data block Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 13 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 13 3 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes via the Symbol Table Overview Requirement Procedure Independent of the programming language used you can configure the following variables using the procedure described below e Bit memory e T O signals Before you start the following requirements must be fulfilled e You have created a project in the SIMATIC Manager e An S7 program with a symbol table must exist in this project e The symbol table must be open To configure operator control and monitoring attributes via the symbol table follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the row in the symbol table containing the symbol 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Operator Control and Monitoring 3 In the Operator Control and Monitoring
121. Enabling Peripheral Outputs PQ Note This chapter describes testing a program with regard to the variables in the program To test the program sequence step by step you can use the program status You will find the commands for this function in the window of the respective editor under the Debug menu The exact procedure is described in the Reference Manuals for the programming languages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 1 Debugging User Programs 16 1 Overview Application Uses 16 2 In order to debug user programs the following methods are available for intervening in the program process 1 At trigger points you can display monitor the values of variables or assign values to modify variables The variables you can monitor and modify are inputs outputs bit memory timers counters peripheral outputs and elements of data blocks 2 Apart from timers and counters and for elements of individual data blocks you can assign fixed values that the user program cannot change forcing The requirement for this is that the CPU supports this function for example the S7 400 If the user program was already compiled and downloaded to a CPU you can scan elements of individual data blocks and variables to for example Commission a plant or part of a plant e Test whether the plant runs together with other parts of plants or user progr
122. Functions for Subnets Stations and Modules in the Network View Starting Global Data Configuration Starting Connection Configuration Highlighting the Communication Partners of a Module Displaying Changing the Properties of a Station Displaying Changing the Properties of a Module You can change to the global data configuration application from NETPRO by following the steps outlined below 1 Select an MPI subnet in the network view for which you want to configure global data communication 2 Select the menu command Options gt Define Global Data Result The GD table for the MPI subnet is opened refer also to Chapter 9 for information on global data communication You can change to the connection configuration application from NETPRO by following the steps outlined below 1 In the network view select a station or a programmable module CPU FM for which you want to configure communication connections 2 Select the menu command Options gt Configure Connections Result The connection table for the module is opened refer also to Chapter 10 for information on configuring connections You can highlight the communication partners for which you have created connections in the connection table The communication partners are then displayed in color 1 Select a programmable module CPU FM in the network view 2 Select the menu command View gt Highlight gt Connections Note The communication
123. In page 3 5 click the Connection button to specify which network connection is to be used for communication between the operator station and the programmable controller In the Select Network Connection dialog box which appears all configured network connections are listed Select the required connection and exit the dialog box with OK Click the Continue button and open page 4 5 Select the required transfer options here These are described in more detail at the start of this section and in the online help for the Mapper 10 Click the Continue button and open page 5 5 The transfer options you selected are displayed here again 11 Check the settings displayed and correct them if necessary by going back and selecting the option again When you are sure that your settings are correct click the Transfer button to start the transfer 12 Click the OK button and confirm with Yes the prompt that any data in the programmable controller should be overwritten The data transfer is started and the Transfer dialog box shows the currently active operation and the progress of the transfer You can stop the transfer at any time by clicking the Cancel button If you selected the Transfer Log option on page 4 5 a report is created which provides information about the following existing PLC OS connections errors which occurred during transfer variable names etc To display t
124. Initiate and M7KAbort in the user program The M7 functions are described in the manual 281 If the check box is not selected the connection is automatically set up during startup and remains connected until you switch off the node Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 9 Establishing Communication Connections Active Connection Setup Send Operating Mode Messages Local ID Default Network Connections 10 10 Activate this check box if you want the local node to set up the connection The connection setup leads to the scan cycle time being slightly lengthened If you do not activate the check box the partner remote node sets up the connection Activate this check box if you want the local node to send its operating status messages for example STOP RUN DEFECTIVE to the partner The status messages can be received in the partner via the SFB23 USTATUS The local ID of the node from which the connection is viewed local partner is displayed You can change the local ID This will be necessary if you already programmed communication blocks and you want to use the local ID specified there for the connection You can use the Default button to reset the changed local ID back to the ID that was previously valid This part of the dialog box shows the route which the connection from the local partner to the connection partner takes You can select the route
125. K button the data you configured are stored in the memory of the application that called the function but they are not saved permanently These data must then be saved again within the calling application Note If you exit the calling application without saving the data there the data may be lost Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 3 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 2 Assigning and Editing Block Related Messages Overview With this function you can assign one or more messages to blocks You can create block related messages easily and quickly by using system function blocks SFBs and system functions SFCs as message blocks Which Message You have the choice of the following message blocks each of which contains Blocks Exist a programmed message function e SFB33 ALARM e SFB34 ALARM_8 e SFB35 ALARM_8P e SFB36 NOTIFY e SFC18 ALARM_S and SFC17 ALARM_SQ e SFB37 AR _SEND to send archives You will find detailed information on the above blocks in the Reference Manual 235 When to Use The table below helps you to decide which message block you should select Which Message for your task Selecting a message block depends on the following 9 Block e The number of channels available in the block e The option of acknowledging messages e The option of specifying accompanying values The last column in the tabl
126. More Information a programming session and give a reference to the relevant chapter in this manual Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 1 3 Product Overview Where to Find More Information for S7 the relevant chapter Table 1 1 Activity Creating and editing projects using projects created with STEP 7 version 1 or 2 Assigning symbols Configuring the hardware structure and assigning parameters to modules General Procedure and Reference Sources No specific sequence has to be observed when programming However there are some basic tasks which are performed in most projects Table 1 1 lists these general tasks for creating S7 and M7 programs and gives a reference to Chapter 5 Appendix A Chapter 6 Chapter 7 oO Configuring communication Configuring messages Entering a program Chapters 8 9 10 Chapter 12 Chapter 11 Manuals on the programming languages Creating and evaluating reference data Downloading programs to the programmable controller Debugging the program Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Language specific tests are described in the manuals on the programming languages Monitoring operation diagnosing hardware Documenting the plant Options When Creating S7 Programs Chapter 17 Optional package manual The various options you can select when creating your S7 program are described in Table 1 2 For some o
127. Network Downloading the Configuration to Other Programmable Controllers 8 16 Only when all the modules in a network have different node addresses and your actual structure matches the configuration in the software can you download the configuration via the network PROFIBUS or MPI to the programmable controller A configuration can only be downloaded to the programmable controller if it is consistent and free of errors We therefore recommend you use STEP 7 to check the consistency of the network configuration before you download Any errors and their cause are displayed by STEP 7 Use the menu command Network gt Consistency Check in NETPRO to run the check To download the configuration to a programmable controller via a network follow the steps outlined below 1 Change to the configuration table view 2 Connect your programming device to the PROFIBUS or MPI subnet 3 Switch the CPU to which you want to download the configuration to STOP mode 4 Select the menu command PLC gt Download To Module in the configuration table view STEP 7 then guides you through the process using dialog boxes Result STEP 7 always downloads the whole configuration hardware configuration and network configuration to the programmable controller If you want to connect nodes to networks which are not components of SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 systems such as SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers for example then you must store the network configur
128. Nw 5 Ln Q101 5 FB1 R STL Nw 6 Ln imal Q102 6 FB1 R oT AL oy Eo Q104 0 FB1 R Q105 1 FB1 R Search For Q182 6 FC1 2 Address O Symbol Q183 7 FC1 2 3 Q184 0 FC1 2 i Q185 1 FC1 2 Name Q186 2 FC1 2 MB135 Q187 3 FC1 2 zs Q188 4 FC1 2 Whole Word Only Q189 5 FC1 2 Q190 6 FCA 2 Menges Q191 7 FC1 2 h Q268 4 OB1 2 pete Q269 5 OB1 2 From Cursor Down Q270 6 OB1 2 O From Cursor Up Q271 7 OB1 2 E Q272 0 OB1 2 O Whole Document Q273 1 OB1 2 Q274 2 OB1 2 Q275 3 OB1 2 Search Cancel Help Q276 4 OB1 2 Figure 14 1 Example of Cross References with Statement List Language Details Each line displayed in the window corresponds to a cross reference list entry The entry contains the columns Address Symbol Block and Type As an option you can also display the column Language Details The information in this column depends on the programming language the block was created in The meaning of each of the column entries is explained in Table 14 2 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data Sorting Filter Settings Jumping from the Cross Reference List to a Place in the Program Displaying the Locations from LAD STL FBD Table 14 2 Columns in the Cross Reference List Column Content Meaning Address Absolute address or block name Symbol Symbolic address name Block Block in which the address is used Whether read R or wr
129. OP The memory reset function can also be executed via the mode selector on the CPU MRES position To reset a CPU using STEP 7 follow the steps outlined below 1 In the online project window select the S7 M7 program or In the Accessible Nodes window select the object MPI 2 Call the memory reset function with the menu command PLC gt Clear Reset and confirm the action Result of the A memory reset involves the following process on the CPU Memory Reset y e The CPU is reset and the whole user program in the work memory and the RAM load memory is deleted e The system parameters and the CPU and module parameters are reset to default values e The CPU deletes all existing connections e Ifdata are present on an EPROM memory card or integrated EPROM the CPU copies the EPROM contents back to the RAM area of the memory following the memory reset The diagnostic buffer and the time and date are not reset When you download the user program all the required information is transferred to the programmable controller Parameters of the If a memory card is inserted during a memory reset the MPI parameters on Multipoint the memory card become valid Interface If no memory card is inserted the MPI parameters on the module are retained and remain valid retaining the module s communication capability Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 15 6 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Upl
130. Operating Mode If a number of operating mode transitions are requested simultaneously the operating mode with the highest priority is selected The order of priority from highest to lowest is STOP HOLD STARTUP RUN The HOLD state has a special function and is entered only for test purposes in STARTUP or RUN mode If for example the mode selector on the CPU is set to RUN and you attempt to switch the CPU to STOP from the programming device the CPU goes into STOP because this operating mode has the highest priority If the mode selector on the CPU is switched to STOP you cannot execute a change to any other operating mode from the programming device To display and change the operating mode from the programming device follow the steps outlined below 1 Establish an online connection to the programmable controller using one of the following methods Switching the view in the project window to online and select the module or S7 or M7 program or Select the object MPI in the Accessible Nodes window 2 Open the corresponding dialog box with the menu command PLC gt Operating Mode The current operating mode is displayed Operating Mode Path Accessible Nodes MPIl 2 Current Operating Mode RUN Complete Restart Restart Stop Current Keyswitch Position RUN Last Operating Mode STARTUP Cancel Help Figure 15 1 Operating Mode Dialog Box 3 Click the appropriate
131. Options Using Authorization Assigning Parameters to Memory Cards 2 8 If the installation program finds another version of STEP 7 on the programming device it reports this and prompts you to decide how to proceed e Abort the installation so that you can uninstall the old STEP 7 version under Windows 95 NT and then start the installation again or e Continue the installation and overwrite the old version with the new version Your software is better organized if you uninstall any older versions before installing the new version Overwriting an old version with a new version has the disadvantage that if you then uninstall any remaining components of the old version are not removed You have three options open to you to select the scope of the installation e Standard configuration all languages for the user interface all applications and all examples Refer to the current Product Information for the memory capacity required for this configuration e Minimum configuration only one language no examples Refer to the current Product Information for the memory capacity required for this configuration e User defined configuration you can determine the scope of the installation selecting which programs databases examples and communication functions you want to install During installation the program checks to see whether an authorization is installed on the hard disk If no authorization is found a message appears
132. S ia ee cee ecamanaac te amnesia eileen gence 6 2 Symbol Table sses e sees bee eae ee ee wee hb eee ee eae Oe 6 3 Incomplete and Non Unique Symbols 06000 cece eee 6 4 Working with the Symbol Table 2 20000 cece eee eee eee 6 5 Defining Single Symbols in a Dialog Box aunan cece eee ee 6 6 Exporting and Importing Symbol Tables 0 0 cee eeeeeee Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 1 Creating the Configuration An Overview 0 000ee eee ee eee 7 2 Basic Operation co fecsesieee i enni deve pada eE hi nE a Wa anaes 7 3 Example 1 Central Structure 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 7 4 Example 2 Structure with Interface Submodules 7 5 Example 3 Structure of C7 Control Systems 00000ee 7 6 Example 4 Expanding the Structure with Smart Connect 7 7 Example 5 Structure with a Distributed I O PROFIBUS DP 7 8 Example 6 Distributed I O with Intelligent DP Slaves 7 9 Example 7 Configuring Multicomputing Operation 7 10 Assigning Module Parameters 0 0c cece eect eee 7 11 Assigning Addresses 0 c cece eects 7 12 Saving Downloading Reading Modifying and Copying a Configuration 7 13 Editing a Station Configuration 0 c cee eee ee Configuring Networks 00 c cece eee eens 8 1 Creating Network Config
133. S5 PG PC non Siemens device unspecified 1 PG PC with SAPI S7 programming interface C programming interface for access to SIMATIC S7 components 2 WinCC software which turns a programming device PC into an operator station OS Table 10 2 shows an overview of the communication blocks of the type SFB system function block which can be used for the connection type S7 Table 10 2 System Function Blocks for S7 Connections Brief Description SFB9 URCV SFB13 BRCV SFB and a receive SFB SFB 14 T Reading data from a remote device SFB 15 i Writing data to a remote device SFB20 STOP Changing a remote device to the STOP mode SFB21 Activating a restart on a remote device For the point to point connection type you can use the SFBs BSEND BRCYV GET PUT and STATUS see Table 10 2 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Further Information on SFBs Blocks for FMS Connections Further Information on FBs Blocks for FDL ISO Transport ISO on TCP Connections Further Information on FCs You can also use the SFB PRINT for point to point connections Table 10 3 SFB PRINT for Point to Point Connections SFB16 PRINT Sending data to a printer You will find more information on system function blocks in 235 Table 10 4 shows an overview of the communication blocks of the type FB function block whic
134. SFC52 in your user program and allocate it the message number In contrast to block related and symbol related messages user defined diagnostic messages can only be displayed on a programming device You cannot therefore assign display device to these messages in the message configuration application Before you can create a user defined diagnostic message you must have done the following e Created a project in the SIMATIC Manager e Created the S7 program in the project and created the CPU to which you want to assign the message You will find the exact procedure for creating projects and related objects in Chapter 5 To configure user defined diagnostic messages follow the steps outlined below In the SIMATIC Manager select the required S7 program and start the i gt Step 1 message configuration application Create a new message E gt Step 2 Fill out the displayed tabbed pages gt Steps 3 and 4 Edit or copy existing diagnostic messages gt Steps 5 and 6 Figure 12 8 Procedure for Configuring User Defined Diagnostic Messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 15 Creating and Displaying Messages Procedure To create a user defined diagnostic message follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the required S7 program and start the message configuration appl
135. SIEMENS SIMATIC Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual This manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6ES7810 4CA03 8BA0 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Contents Part 1 Preparing fora Programming Session Part 2 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to the Hardware Part 3 Working with S7 Programmable Controllers Part 4 Working with M7 Programmable Control Systems Part 5 Final Tasks Appendix Glossary Index Safety Guidelines ZN ZN JAN Qualified Personnel This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger Danger indicates thatdeath severe personal injury orsubstantial property damage will resultif proper precautions are not taken Warning indicates thatdeath severe personal injury or substantial property damage canresultif properprecautions are not taken Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Note draws your attention to particularly importantinformation on the product handling the product orto a particular part of the documentation The device system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this ma
136. Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Archiving 20 3 Retrieving Projects and Libraries Overview Editing Archived Projects Libraries Opening Retrieved Projects or Libraries Projects in archives cannot be edited directly To edit archived projects or libraries you must retrieve the data from the archive To edit archived projects libraries follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command File gt Retrieve 2 In the dialog box select the archive file which contains the compressed project library Whether the following dialog boxes are displayed depends on your settings in the Archive tab that you call with the menu command Options gt Customize 3 In the next dialog box select the target directory to which you want to retrieve the project library data Note The directory names in the path may not be longer than eight characters 4 You can set other options for retrieving data in another dialog box When the dialog box is closed a DOS window is opened in which the retrieve process is run During retrieval the project or library is created and its contents are entered from the archive You can now open the project library and edit it or copy parts of it to other projects Retrieved projects libraries are not displayed for selection in the dialog box when you first attempt to open them To display them follow the steps outlined bel
137. U are the maximum number of global data circles to which a CPU can belong Refer to the technical specifications for your CPU or the online help for the global data communication application to find out its communications resources Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 2 Opening a Global Data Table Overview For global data communication you create a global data table in STEP 7 which configures the data to be used in the data exchange Requirements Before you fill out the global data table the following requirements should be fulfilled e A STEP 7 project must have been created in the SIMATIC Manager e An MPI network must be configured in the project e Atleast two modules capable of exchanging global data must be configured and networked in the project The modules must be connected for global data exchange via MPI networks When you create a new STEP 7 project an MPI network is created in it automatically If you are exchanging global data via the communication bus only the modules do not need to be connected in a network Opening the To open a global data table follow the steps outlined below Global Data Table 1 Open your project and select the MPI subnet 2 Select the menu command Options gt Define Global Data Result A new global data table is created or an existing table opened which is displayed on the screen see Figure 9
138. User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Overview When you configure with STEP 7 you determine which modules you want to use in your plant independent of whether your plant already exists or not The procedure for configuring the central and distributed I O is the same You can copy your configuration as often as you like to other STEP 7 projects modify it as necessary and download it to one or more existing plants When the programmable controller starts up the CPU compares the setpoint configuration created in STEP 7 with the actual configuration of the plant Any errors are therefore recognized immediately and reported When you assign parameters you set the characteristics of the modules You do not need to set switches on the module for this you simply enter the parameters in the STEP 7 software The parameters are downloaded to the CPU and transferred by the CPU to the respective modules Modules can easily be replaced because the parameters set with STEP 7 are automatically downloaded to the new module during startup When you address a module you can change the addresses set by STEP 7 This means you can determine which address the user program uses to access the modules Chapter Section Description Overview 7 1 Creating the Configuration An Overview 7 2 Basic Operation Example 1 Central Structure 7 4 Example 2 Structure with Interface Submodules 7 5 Example 3 Stru
139. Windows on Hard Disk 19 7 Reinstalling the M7 Operating System 19 8 Updating the Operating System for Exchanging Modules in the Field Updating the Firmware 19 10 Downloading and Deleting Programs on the M7 Programmable Control System M7 300 M7 400 Monitoring and Modifying Functions Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 1 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 1 Preparing for Installation Purpose of the Installation Installation Methods Basic Procedure 19 2 The purpose of the installation is to transfer a complete operating system configuration including the M7 system software to the destination medium the mass storage of an M7 system This section provides an overview of the installation methods and the basic procedure involved You will find step by step installation procedures in each of the following sections and in the online help for managing M7 systems Depending on the mass storage for the M7 programmable control system there are two alternative installation methods 1 Installation on hard disk For the first type of installation no executable operating system is installed on the M7 programmable control system no MPI connection is possible 2 Installation on memory card There is space on a memory card for a complete M7 RMOS32 operating system with applications see Table 18 4 To install an operat
140. a special compact design suitable for industrial conditions A SIEMENS programming device is completely equipped for programming the SIMATIC programmable logic controllers A programming language is used to create user programs and provides a specific vocabulary for this purpose in the form of text instructions or graphic elements These instructions are entered by the user using an editor and compiled into an executable user program A project is a container for all objects in an automation task independent of the number of stations modules and how they are connected in a network The Random Access Memory or RAM is a read write memory in which each memory location can be addressed individually and have its contents changed RAM is used as a memory for data and programs Reference data are used to check your S7 program and include the cross reference list the assignment lists the program structure the list of unused addresses and the list of addresses without symbols When a CPU starts up for example when the mode selector is moved from STOP to RUN or when the power is turned on before cyclic program processing starts OB1 either the organization block OB100 complete restart or the organization block OB101 restart only in the S7 400 is processed first In a restart the process image input table is read in and the STEP 7 user program processing is restarted at the point where it was interrupted by the last stop STOP pow
141. a text or graphic editor Charts are special graphic source files created with the programming language CFC Source files and charts serve only as a basis for creating blocks in S7 programming because only blocks can be downloaded to an S7 CPU Whether you create a source file a block or a chart depends on the programming language you choose and the language editor you use Figure 11 1 shows which language editors you use to create which objects in a program You can download only the user program with its blocks to the CPU Depending on the requirements the blocks may include organization blocks OBs function blocks FBs functions FCs and data blocks DBs The user defined data types UDTs you create yourself simplify the programming process but they are not downloaded to the CPU The System Data object may also appear in the Blocks container of a user program This contains system data blocks SDBs with system information Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs Project1 e SIMATIC 300 Station1 Module S7 CPU Connections S7 Program Symbols Object Possible Languages Blocks sin oon P Source Files 1 Created by compiling the corresponding source 3 Created according to the FB created with file
142. able table 2 Edit or check the contents of the variable table 3 Establish an online connection between the active variable table and the required CPU using the menu command PLC gt Connect To gt 4 Using the menu command Variable gt Trigger select a suitable trigger point and set the trigger frequency 5 The menu commands Variable gt Monitor and Variable gt Modify toggle the Monitor and Modify functions on and off 6 Save the completed variable table using the menu command Table gt Save or Table gt Save As so you can open it again when required If you press ESC while the Monitor or Modify function is active the function is terminated without a prompt Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 3 Debugging User Programs 16 2 Creating a Variable Table What Is the Variable Table For Uses Procedure 16 4 You require variable tables to monitor and modify variables Enter the variables you want to monitor or modify in the variable table You can save the variable table print it out and use it for future purposes You can define the following e The format binary decimal hexadecimal in which the value of the variables is displayed e The values with which the selected variables are to be modified To create a variable table you can choose from one of the following methods e In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks container and create a var
143. able to evaluate errors in global data communication using the Status user program message bits are set in a status word For each global data GD packet you can specify a status double word for each participating CPU Status double words have the ID GDS in the table Evaluating the If you assign the status double word GDS to a CPU address of the same Status format for example MD120 you can evaluate the status in the user program or in the status row The status row can be toggled on and off with the menu command View gt GD Status Structure of the The global data status is stored as the 32 bits of the double word The Status Double significance of a set bit is shown in Figure 9 6 A bit remains set until it is Word reset by the user program or via a programming device operation Any bits not listed are reserved and have no significance at present The global data status occupies a double word to make it clearer MD120 has been used in Figure 9 6 MD120 MB120 MB121 MB122 MB123 7l 6l5l4 5 4l3l2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o Area length error in sender DB not present in sender GD packet lost Syntax error in GD packet GD object missing in GD packet GD object lengths in the sender and the receiver are different Area length error in receiver DB not present in receiver
144. acket is reported in the GD status row if you configured it see Section 9 6 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication Exchanging Global Data Using System Functions Structure of the GD Identifier In S7 400 CPUs you can use the system functions SFC60 GD_SND and SFC61 GD_RCV to send or receive global data packets at any point in the user program either in addition to or instead of cyclic data transmission The requirement for this is that you have configured the data exchange meaning you must have created a global data table As the parameters for the SFCs you enter the number of the global data circle and the global data packet which are created when you configure the global data table If you enter 0 as the scan rate in the global data table the global data are only transferred when the relevant SFC is called During compilation of the global data table you created all global data are assigned a unique identifier GD identifier This GD identifier is structured as follows GD 1 1 1 k Identifier for the data contained in the packet GD packet number GD circle number Figure 9 5 Structure of the GD Identifier Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 9 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 6 Displaying and Editing the Global Data Status Displaying the In order to be
145. al information on displaying reference data The sections which follow then illustrate the various methods of displaying reference data and explain the information shown in each window Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data 14 4 Notes on Displaying Reference Data Status Bar Searching for Entries Sorting Entries in a List Changing the Representation Filter Saving the Settings In the status bar of the working window is a short description of the current menu command or messages about actions being executed Using the menu command Edit gt Search you can search for specific text strings in the active window The search string can be searched from the cursor position up or down or in the whole document see Figure 14 1 Note that this is purely a text search function where you must enter the search string exactly to the character You can sort the list entries by clicking on the column title columns containing letters such as symbols are sorted into alphabetical order columns containing numbers are sorted into ascending order The representation of the reference data can be changed specifically for each open window using the menu command View gt Filter meaning you can adapt the contents of the lists to match the current information requirements The filter settings you make apply to all windows containing reference data on the current program
146. ample for logic math control and data processing functions Integrated Test The integrated test functions in CFC allow variable values to be recorded Function exactly to the cycle for example and values to be displayed in charts Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 11 11 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages Overview This chapter contains descriptions of the following e How you create block related messages symbol related messages SCAN and user defined diagnostic messages with their texts and attributes e How you can edit these messages in different languages e How you transfer the data generated when you configure the messages with the help of the transfer program S7 WinCC Mapper part of the software package Process Control System PCS7 to the database of a programmable logic controller e How you display CPU messages system diagnostics messages Both the messages you configure and the CPU messages provide you with support for system and plant diagnostics without you having to invest much effort in programming These messages allow you to detect errors quickly locate them exactly and remedy them This significantly shortens the down times in a plant Chapter Section Description Overview Configuring Messages An Overview 12 2 Assigning and Editing Block Related Messages 12 3 Assigning and
147. ams If you set a meaningful trigger point and trigger frequency you can get a good overview of the status of the variables in your system If no user program was downloaded to the CPU you can check that the hardware was installed correctly for example whether or not the I O is available Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs Basic Procedure Aborting with ESC Caution Make sure that no dangerous situations can occur before you execute the Modify or Force functions Modifying is only possible if the mode selector on the CPU is set to RUN P or STOP Before you start the Force function you should check that nobody is executing this function on the same CPU at the same time A force job can only be deleted or terminated with the menu command Variable gt Stop Forcing Closing the force values window or exiting the Monitoring and Modifying Variables application does not delete the force job Forcing cannot be undone meaning the menu command Edit gt Undo is not possible You will find a summary of the differences between forcing and modifying variables in Section 16 7 If a CPU does not support the Force function all the menu commands relating to forcing in the Variable menu are deactivated To use the Monitor and Modify functions follow the steps outlined below 1 Create a new variable table or open an existing vari
148. annot install any more authorizations using this disk Caution Note the information in the README TXT file on the authorization disk and the guidelines in Section 2 3 If you do not adhere to these guidelines the authorization may be irretrievably lost An authorization may be lost for example if a hard disk defect occurs and you did not have a chance to remove the authorization from the defective hard disk If you lose your authorization you can use the emergency license also included on the authorization disk The emergency license allows you to continue running the software for a limited period In this case the time remaining before the validity period runs out is displayed on the screen as you start Within this period you should make sure that you obtain a replacement for your lost authorization from your local SIEMENS representative When installing your software for the first time a message prompts you to install the authorization Follow the steps outlined below 1 When prompted insert the authorization disk in a drive 2 Acknowledge the prompt The authorization is transferred to a physical drive and your computer registers the fact that the authorization has been installed Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 2 3 Installing and Uninstalling Adding an If you attempt to start the STEP 7 software and there is no authorization Authorization at a available for
149. anual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Creating a Connection to an Unspecified Partner FMS FDL ISO Transport and ISO on TCP connections are described in 500 und 501 You create an S7 or point to point connection to an unspecified connection partner by following the steps outlined below 1 Create an S7 or point to point connection to an unspecified partner see Section 10 2 for procedure 2 For point to point connections in the object properties dialog box for the PTP connection change the name of the partner from unspecified to a suitable name the name is also entered in the connection table The following steps are only necessary for an S7 connection 3 Open the object properties dialog box for the S7 connection 4 Click the Addresses button in the object properties dialog box Depending on the connection partner different settings are necessary in the Address Details dialog box You will find more information on filling out the dialog box in the online help 10 6 Communication Connections to Other Stations PGs PCs or SIMATIC S5 Stations Overview Other Stations Possible Connection Types Data exchange via communication blocks is possible both within a STEP 7 project and beyond project boundaries between the following e SIMATIC S7 stations and other stations e SIMATIC S7 stations and programming devices PCs e SIMATIC S7
150. ard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs 11 3 Programming Blocks with Ladder Logic Statement List and Function Block Diagram What Is Ladder Logic Based On What Is Function Block Diagram Based On The graphic programming language Ladder Logic LAD is based on the representation of circuit diagrams The elements of a circuit diagram such as normally closed contacts and normally open contacts are linked together to form networks One or more networks form the code section of a logic block Network 1 Enable conditions Start Stop Coil f Vk Coil Network 2 Motor control Coil Reset Vt Error s Current_Time_bin Reset_Time Coil Reset_Time_BCD Network 3 Start lamp Reset Start_lamp Vl Error Network 4 Stop lamp Reset Stop_lamp Figure 11 2 Example of Networks in Ladder Logic The programming language Function Block Diagram FBD uses the graphic logic symbols familiar from Boolean algebra to represent logic Network 1 Green phase for pedestrians 10 0 amp 10 1 gt 1 amp T6 MO 0 MOD gt TS Figure 11 3 Example of a Network in Function Block Diagram Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creat
151. ardware Project SIMATIC 400 station configuration with one or more prog modules CPUxxx Represents a programmable module CPU Station p CPxxx communications processor or function module FMyyy Note The system data of modules that have no retentive memory e g CP 441 are downloaded via the CPU for the station These modules do not therefore have a System Data object assigned to them and they are not displayed in the project hierarchy S7 program Container for software for S7 CPUs Programmable module 7 or project M7 program Container for software for M7 CPUs Programmable module M7 or project Program Container for software for non CPU modules for Programmable module sw example programmable CP or FM modules or project Blocks Container for blocks S7 program in offline view see under blocks for a list Blocks in online view Contains the executable files which are downloaded to the programmable controller S7 M7 program online m Source files Charts Container for source files programs in text form such as STL source files Container for graphic CFC source files charts S7 M7 program The container Charts and the object Chart are required for the optional software package CFC S7 program Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Objects and Object Hierarchy Objects as Carriers When you open an o
152. ardware configuration you created before starting NETPRO will already be arranged in the network view as will modules which have an interface for the connection to a subnet You can show DP slaves using a special menu command in the network view NETPRO Configuring Networks Network to Project Model a Network Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help al xj ema elajas gt SIMATIC 300 Station 1 SIMATIC 400 Station 1 SIMATIC 300 Station 2 CPU Hi co CPU 314 414 314 m L C 1 SIMATIC 300 Station 3 SIMATIC 400 Station 2 CPU E c 314 413 a a Ready NUMI h Figure 8 3 Example of the Network Configuration View Creating the graphic network view in NETPRO could hardly be easier You select the symbols for stations DP slaves and subnets from a catalog and use drag amp drop to place them on the screen You configure the stations with the required modules You then connect the stations to the relevant subnet Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 7 Configuring Networks Entering Network By double clicking on a station DP slave subnet or connecting line you Parameters open the view dialog box where you enter the hardware configuration of a station the parameters for a subnet or the parameters for a network connec
153. are stored in the system memory In M7 the system memory is not a separate area but is integrated in the user memory Timers are an area in the system memory of the CPU The contents of these timers is updated by the operating system asynchronously to the user program You can use STEP 7 instructions to define the exact function of the timer for example on delay timer and start processing it Start Uploading is the transfer of load objects such as logic blocks from the load memory of a connected programmable module to the programming device The user program contains all the statements and declarations and the data required for signal processing to control a plant or a process The program is linked to a programmable module for example CPU FM and can be structured in the form of smaller units blocks in S7 and tasks in M7 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 13 Glossary V Variable Variable Table VAT Virtual Field Device VFD W Watchdog Time Work Memory Glossary 14 A variable defines an item of data with variable content which can be used in the STEP 7 user program A variable consists of an address for example M 3 1 and a data type for example BOOL and can be identified by means of a symbolic name for example BELT_ON The variable table is used to collect together the variables that you want to monitor and modify and set their relevan
154. ation blocks and loadable standard functions available in S7 and in the form of reference information detailed interface descriptions for their use in your user program STEP 7 User Manual The STEP 7 User Manual explains the main usage and the functions of the STEP 7 automation software As a first time user of STEP 7 and as an experienced user of STEP 5 this manual will provide you with an overview of the procedures used to configure program and start up an S7 300 S7 400 While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the software Converter Manual From S5 to S7 You will need the From S5 to S7 Converter Manual if you want to convert existing S5 programs to run them on S7 CPUs The manual provides an overview of the procedures and usage of the Converter you can find a detailed description of the converter functions in the online help You will also find the interface descriptions for the converted S7 functions available in the online help Practical information is also provided on SIMATIC S7 hardware and software Statement List Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram SCL Manuals The manuals for the programming language packages Statement List Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram and SCL Sequential Control Language contain both the user s guide and the reference description of the programming language or representation type You only
155. ation in these nodes also Refer to the documentation for the particular device you intend to use as a node Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication Overview SIMATIC CPUs provide their own type of internal communication This chapter explains how by defining global data the barriers between physically separate programmable controllers can disappear without anything being added to the user program Global data communication is not programmed but configured Configuring the exchange of global data is very simple you just fill out a table The data are then transferred by the system Global data communication can function with up to 15 MPI nodes It is intended for use with small amounts of data which are generally transferred cyclically With some CPUs in the SIMATIC S7 400 range event driven transfer is also possible with the use of system functions SFCs This chapter describes how you configure global data communication Chapter Overview 9 1 Global Data 9 3 Filling Out a Global Data Table Setting Scan Rates Displaying and Editing the Global Data Status Configuration Examples Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 1 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 1 Global Data What Are Global Data GD Packet GD Circle Global Data GD Communication CPU Communicat
156. ature Function Force Modify Peripheral inputs PIB PIW PID Yes No Timers and counters T C No Yes Data blocks DB No Yes Defining triggers always Yes trigger immediately Function only affects variable in visible area of active window affects all force Yes values User program cannot overwrite the modify force values No Yes Replacing the force value effective without interruption Yes No The variables retain their values when the application is exited Yes No The variables retain their values after the connection to the CPU is Yes No broken Addressing errors permitted No Yes e g IW1 modify force value 1 the last becomes IW1 modify force value 0 effective Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 11 Debugging User Programs 16 8 Creating and Deleting Force Jobs Displaying the Force Window Creating a Force Job ZN Deleting a Force Job 16 12 To prepare to start a force job follow the steps outlined below 1 Create a new variable table or open an existing variable table 2 Use the menu command PLC gt Connect To to establish a connection to the required CPU 3 Use the menu command Variable gt Display Force Values to open the Force Values window in which the current status of the selected CPU is displayed If no force job is currently active the window is empty If a force job is active already the variables together with the corresponding
157. ave appears here in this case CPU 315 2 DP and select the Connection tab In this tab you determine which station should represent the intelligent DP slave here 5 Select the intelligent DP slave and click the Connect button 6 Select the Slave Configuration tab and assign master and slave addresses to each other Important Input areas of the DP master are output areas of the DP slave and vice versa 7 Confirm your entries with OK Note More details on the CPU 315 2 DP address areas diagnostics etc can be found in 70 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 7 16 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Configuring the CP 342 5 asa DP Slave To configure a station with the CP 342 5 DP as an intelligent DP slave and insert it in a DP master system follow the steps outlined below 1 Configure a station with the CP 342 5 DP as a DP slave Select the option DP Slave in the Operating Mode tab of the communications processor Configure a DP master CPU with integrated PROFIBUS DP interface or communications processor with PROFIBUS DP interface in another station Drag the CP 342 5 DP from the Hardware Catalog window container for already configured stations and drop it on the symbol for the DP master system A dialog box appears in which you can select configured intelligent DP slaves Co
158. ave the choice of a number of different transfer options You can for example select an address and text comparison to ensure that the current data are transferred Before you start the transfer the following requirements must be fulfilled e You have installed the setup program PLC OS connection configuration e You have generated the configuration data for creating messages as described in Section 12 2 For each operator control and monitoring system on which messages are to be displayed you must create an OS object in the SIMATIC Manager by following the steps outlined below 1 Open your STEP 7 project 2 Select the menu command Insert gt WinCC Object gt Operator Station Note Note that the number of operator stations for which the data are to be transferred influences the duration of the transfer The following options are available to you when transferring the configuration data to the selected programmable controller as shown in Figure 12 10 e Transfer data Variables and messages This option is already activated when you open the dialog box for the first time If you deactivate the option no transfer is executed This is useful if you want to run the address and text update or name update without a transfer to test whether your settings are correct for creating messages SFC visualization You use this option to transfer SFC data to WinCC e Size of transfer You can transfer all configuration
159. bject a window is displayed in which you can edit the of Functions object An object is either a container or a carrier of functions An exception to this is stations they are both containers for programmable modules and carriers of functions used to configure the hardware e If you double click a station the objects contained in it are displayed the programmable modules and the station configuration station as a container e Ifyou open a station with the menu command Edit gt Open Object you can configure this station and assign parameters to it station as the carrier of a function The menu command has the same effect as a double click on the Hardware object Table B 2 Objects as Carriers of Functions and Properties Icon Object Description Content Found in Object Used to start the utility for configuring a Project network and for setting network properties Used to start the utility for hardware Station configuration Programmable module This object represents the parameter assignment Station data of a programmable module Connections Used to define connections in a network Module Symbols Used to assign symbols to addresses and other S7 M7 program variables Block offline There are Blocks e Logic blocks OB FB FC SFB SFC Data blocks DB User defined data types UDT Variable tables VAT Block online Blocks Source file Source file program in text form Source file
160. bjects not included in the list Entry Point View x Standard Hierarchy gt O Online Offline Name Project Storage Path m gt example x C SIEMENS STEP7 E Y Browse 5j amp example T_T MPI Networki HW SIMATIC 300 Station1 TT Ethernet Subnet1 S7 S7 Program The hierarchical tree E PROFIBUS Subnet1 structure of the objects which can contain a abies i The content of the object displayed here selected in the left half of the window is displayed here Object Name Object Type All Editable A Cancel Help Name The recognized objects Object Type You can enter a filter _ of the type specified under Entry criterion here to filter the list restricting Point are displayed here in a list the number of objects displayed to give box You can select a name you a clearer overview from the list or enter a name using the keyboard Object Name If you select an object the object name is entered here You can also enter the required name directly Figure 4 5 Browser for Selecting Objects Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 4 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects Overview This chapter describes how to create projects and create a project hierarchy step by step You also learn how you can access projects offline on the programming device and online on the programmable controller Chapter
161. ble These components are The symbol table with the symbolic names of the addresses and the comments Network comments of a Ladder Logic or Function Block Diagram program Line comments of a Statement List program User defined data types To edit blocks from the CPU open the project window and switch to the online view If you now select a Blocks container in the online project window the list of downloaded blocks is displayed You can now select open and edit blocks Using the menu command File gt Save As you can save the changes offline on the programming device with PLC gt Download you can download the modified blocks to the programmable controller To edit blocks from the CPU follow these steps click the Accessible Nodes button in the SIMATIC Manager Select the node MPI object from the list displayed and open the Blocks container to display the blocks You can now open blocks and edit monitor or copy them as required Then select the menu command File gt Save As and enter the path for the programming device where you want to store the blocks in the dialog box With PLC gt Download you can download the modified blocks to the programmable controller Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 11 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 9 Compressing the User Memory RAM Uses Ways of Compressing the Memory Sel
162. block gt and save the block k Open the message configuration gt application In the function block create the message template cS with texts attributes and display devices Associate instance DBs with the FB and gt change these according to your requirements i Transfer the data you configured to the ey WinCC database previous page Step 1 Steps 5 and 6 Step 7 Steps 8 and 9 Steps 10 to 13 Section 12 6 Figure 12 1 Procedure for Configuring Block Related Messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 5 Creating and Displaying Messages Procedure 12 6 To create block related messages follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager select the function block FB for which you want to create a block related message and open the block by double clicking Result The selected block is opened and displayed in the LAD STL FBD window Fill out the variable declaration table For every message block that is called in the function block you must declare variables in the calling function block To do this enter the following variables in the Declaration column of the variable declaration table see Figure 12 2 66s 99 Under the declaration type in enter a symbolic name for the messa
163. block parameter you do not need to activate these options e Create logs Cross reference lists This option is not relevant for message configuration Transfer log If you select this option a report is created for the transfer of the configuration data e Exit WinCC after transfer Activate this option if you do not want to continue working with WinCC after transferring the configuration data Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 9 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Starting the Transfer Program Transferring the Data 13 10 To start the transfer program you have two possibilities e Select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Transfer in the SIMATIC Manager or e Open the S7 WinCC Mapper via Start gt Simatic gt STEP 7 gt PLC OS Engineering from the Windows start menu To transfer the configuration data to the programmable controller follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the STEP 7 project for which you want to transfer the data 2 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Transfer Result The dialog box Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station is opened on page 1 5 Below is an introduction 3 Click the Continue button and open page 2 5 Select the programmable controller here on the left and the operator stations to which you want to transfe
164. bs 3 4 Display module status See System diagnostics Display options CPU messages user defined diagnostic messages 12 23 Displaying available blocks 17 21 connected programmable controllers CPU properties 17 10 CPU time system 17 2 module information stack contents 17 23 Displaying module information M7 300 M7 400 19 29 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Index Distributed I O 7 12 Download medium 19 24 Downloading blocks 158 configuration ma 15 intelligent selecting 7 13 DP slaves arranging 8 11 displaying 8 11 E Editing archived project library 20 5 Editor free edit 11 4 incremental input 11 4 Emergency license Enable peripheral outputs Erasing memory card Errors installation 2 9 Establishing connection to CPU 16 7 Expansion module EXM Exporting symbol table 6 8 F Faulty modules See System diagnostics FB See Function block FBD See Function Block Diagram FC See Function 10 14 FDL connection Flash file system 10 14 FMS connection Force 16 12 Force job creating deleting Force values window 16 10 displaying 16 12 Forcing and modifying differences 16 11 Forcing variables Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Formatting M7 destination medium 19 7 Function block 11 8 Function Block Diagram
165. bugging User Programs Syntax Check Comment Lines Modify Value Valid Invalid Selecting Columns Column Size Setting the Column Width Maximum Size 16 6 When you enter variables in the variable table a syntax check is run before you exit the row If you made a syntax error when you entered the variables it is shown in red and an error message in the status bar informs you of the error Comment lines are introduced by the comment marker Using the menu command Edit gt Comment Line or the corresponding button in the toolbar you can display a table row temporarily as a comment line If you place a comment marker in the column Modify Value before the value of the variable you want to modify you make this value invalid deactivate it When the comment marker is deleted the value becomes valid again and can be modified You can display and hide individual columns in the table using the commands in the menu View depending on which columns you require Only those columns marked with a check mark in the View menu are displayed You can change the width of a column with the mouse 1 Position the cursor on a vertical line dividing the columns in the header row 2 Press the left mouse button 3 Drag the line horizontally to the left or right 4 Release the mouse button again With the menu command View gt Optimize Column Widths you can set the optimum column width for the whole variable table
166. button to switch the operating mode A button is deactivated shown in paler color if a change to that operating mode is not permitted in the current situation Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 3 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 2 Memory and Load Concept Memory The memory of an S7 CPU can be divided into three areas as follows Configuration e The load memory is used to store the user program without the symbol table and the comments these remain in the memory of the programming device The load memory can either be RAM ROM or EPROM memory depending on the programmable controller Blocks that are not marked as required for startup will be stored only in the load memory e The work memory integrated RAM is used to store the parts of the user program required for program processing All program execution involves interaction with the work memory and the system memory e The system memory contains the additional memory elements which every CPU provides for the user program such as the process image input table and output table bit memory counters and timers The system memory also contains the block stack interrupt stack and local data stack Features of S7 300 The load memory can also have an integrated EEPROM part as well as an integrated RAM part for example the CPU 312 IFM and CPU 314 IFM Features of S7 400 The use of a memory card RAM or EEPROM is
167. calculated depending on the length of the table entries A variable table can have a maximum of 255 characters per row A carriage return into the next row is not possible The table size is limited to a maximum of 1024 rows Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs 16 4 Establishing Connections to CPUs Overview Establishing an Online Connection to a CPU Breaking an Online Connection to a CPU To be able to monitor modify or force variables an online connection to a CPU is required If you have several different variable tables open an online connection to a CPU must be established for each table Each variable table can be connected to any CPU If an online connection exists the word Online appears in the status bar for the window If there is no online connection you define one to the required CPU using the menu command PLC gt Connect To gt in order to monitor or modify the variables Alternatively you can also click the corresponding buttons in the toolbar Figure 16 2 Connection to the configured CPU TE Connection to a directly connected CPU e g MPI 2 Direct Figure 16 2 Toolbar Buttons for Establishing Connections Using the menu command PLC gt Disconnect you interrupt the connection between the variable table and the CPU Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C790
168. ce e SIMATIC S5 e Other stations meaning non SIMATIC S7 M7 and SIMATIC S5 Click on the sign in front of the project icon in the project window if the station is not displayed To configure the station follow the steps outlined below 1 Click on the new station It contains the Hardware object 2 Open the Hardware object The Hardware Configuration window is displayed 3 In the Hardware Configuration window plan the structure of the station A module catalog is available to help you You open the catalog using the menu command View gt Catalog 4 First insert a rack from the module catalog in the empty window Then select the modules and place them in the rack slots At least one CPU must be configured per station You will find more information on configuring the hardware in Part 2 of this manual Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects Results of the Configuration Creating a Connection Table Next Steps For each programmable module you create in your configuration an S7 or M7 program and a connection table Connections object are created automatically once you have saved and exited the hardware configuration If these objects are not yet visible in the project window click the in front of the station icon in the project window to display the module and click the box in front of the module to di
169. command File gt New Project Wizard to open the wizard In the dialog boxes displayed you can set the structure of your project and then have the wizard create the project for you If you do not wish to use the wizard you can create projects and libraries using the menu command File gt New These objects form the starting point of an object hierarchy You can create all other objects in the hierarchy using the commands in the Insert menu provided they are not created automatically The exception to this are the modules in a SIMATIC station which are created when you configure the hardware or by using the New Project wizard The are a number of ways to open an object which has already been created Double click on the object icon e Select the object and then the menu command Edit gt Open Object Once you have opened an object you can create or change its contents Here you must distinguish between e Containers or objects which can contain other objects such as the Directory object in the Windows Explorer which can contain subdirectories and files and e Objects which do not contain other objects such as the File object in the Windows Explorer When you open an object of the second type its contents are represented by a suitable software component in a new window for editing purposes You cannot change objects whose contents are already being used elsewhere Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP
170. ct Oriented Operating Philosophy Creating and Managing Objects Selecting Objects in a Browser Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 4 1 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 1 Opening a Project Opening a Project Displaying its Content Components Object Hierarchy Project 4 2 To open an existing project enter the menu command File gt Open Then select a project in the dialog boxes that follow The project window is then opened The project window is split into two halves The left half shows the hierarchy of the objects contained in the project The right half shows the objects which are contained in the object open in the left half see Figure 4 1 Click in the left half of the window on the box containing a plus sign to display the full structure of the project You will then see something similar to the structure shown in Figure 4 1 SIMATIC Manager Example BE File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help sam see a AA 5 Po a Example lt Offline gt Project H Example Source Files SIMATIC 300 Station 1 S Symbols E CPU314 1 Blocks S7 Program 1 e He Source Files Blocks Press F1 for help num 4 Figure 4 1 Project Window Example Objects in the real world are related to each other The
171. cture of C7 Control Systems Example 4 Expanding the Structure with Smart Connect 7 7 Example 5 Structure with a Distributed I O PROFIBUS DP 7 8 Example 6 Distributed I O with Intelligent DP Slaves 7 10 Assigning Module Parameters Saving Downloading Reading Modifying and Copying a Configuration TS Editing a Station Configuration Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 1 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 1 Creating the Configuration An Overview Introduction Configuring When Should You Configure Your Hardware Assigning Parameters First Time Users of PROFIBUS DP 7 2 This section contains an overview of how to configure the structure you have planned and how to assign parameters to the modules in this structure You can configure and set parameters with STEP 7 for modules in a central structure and for DP distributed I O modules The procedure is the same for both The term configuring refers to the arranging of racks modules and interface submodules in a station window Racks are represented by a configuration table that permits a specific number of modules to be inserted just like a real rack In the configuration table STEP 7 automatically assigns an address to each module You can change the addresses of the modules in a station if the CPU in the station can be addressed freely meaning an address can be assi
172. d File gt Save As The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Select the option with or without consistency check and close the dialog box with OK The Save Project As dialog box is displayed 4 Under Save In select the directory in which the project should be stored 5 In the File Name dialog box enter a file name instead of the asterisk Do not change the file extension 6 Close the dialog box with OR Note Make sure that enough free memory is available on the selected drive For example it is not advisable to select a disk drive to back up a project because a project is generally too large to fit on a diskette You need to archive projects in order to store them on diskette Archives can be split up over a number of diskettes You can store individual projects or libraries in compressed form in an archive file This compressed storage is possible on hard disk or transportable data media diskettes To access components of an archived project or library the project must first be extracted from the archive The subject of archiving is described in detail in Chapter 20 You can set whether you want to create a backup archive copy when you open a project by following the steps outlined below 1 Select the menu command Options gt Customize in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select the option Archive Project or Library Automatically on Opening in the SIMATIC Manager tab
173. data stack Local ID 10 4 10 8 Local node 10 3 Local symbols 6 2 Logic block 11 6 M7 modules 18 6 M7 application deleting 19 27 downloading to PLC system 19 23 downloading via data medium 19 26 downloading via MPI 19 25 starting 19 28 Index 4 M7 operating system installing 19 2 installing on hard disk installing on memory card 19 9 reinstalling selecting M7 program assigning programmable module 5 9 storing in project 5 10 without configured hardware 5 9 M7 programmable control system boot medium 19 6 destination medium 19 2 19 5 M7 300 M7 400 operating systems 18 5 Mass memory 18 7 Master system highlighting 8 12 in NETPRO 8 12 selecting Memory and load concept 15 4 Memory areas 15 4 Memory card 15 5 15 14 assigning parameters downloading configuration 7 26 erasing Memory reset CPU 15 6 Memory structure CPU 15 4 Memory utilization Message blocks overview 12 4 Message configuration assigning display de vice 12 8 Message number 12 2 Message template 12 2 Massages 122 Modifying variables 16 9 Module arranging 7 7 assigning parameters 7 20 selecting specifying 7 25 Module catalog Module information displaying 17 2 Monitoring variables lico Monitoring modifying variables M7 300 M7 400 19 29 MPI 2 2 MPI address communications processors 8 14 function modu
174. de and Unspecified as the connection partner for the PC with WinCC Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 11 Establishing Communication Connections 10 4 Properties of Point to Point Connections Overview Opening the Dialog Box Object Properties 10 12 You can use the connection type PTP mainly to connect two point to point CPs or to connect one point to point CP to a printer In addition to the entry in the connection table you must set special properties for each point to point connection you configure To open the dialog box for the special connection properties follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the required point to point connection in the connection table 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The Object Properties dialog box appears Object Properties Connection SIMATIC 400 Statont1 CP UAGA Other Station CP441 2 R 0 S 11 iF RKs ooo 2 E Figure 10 5 Object Properties for a Point to Point Connection In addition to the check boxes for Connection the Local ID input box and the Default button described in Section 10 3 you can specify other connection properties here Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Communication Direction Network Connections Connection Selected Using RK512
175. dialog box activate the Operator Control and Monitoring check box 4 Select the General tab The name of the symbol is displayed here as it appears in WinCC S7 program name_symbol If necessary enter additional information on the symbol in the Comment box 5 Now select the WinCC Attributes tab to edit the WinCC attributes of the selected symbol Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 5 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Operator Control and Monitoring v as Data Adapt Format _ zengtH Figure 13 3 Operator Control and Monitoring Dialog Box WinCC Attributes Tab 6 In the table shown enter the required attribute values Refer to the online help for the meanings of the WinCC attributes 7 Close the dialog box by clicking the OK button Result In the O column in the symbol table an X appears for the edited symbol to show that this symbol has operator control and monitoring capability 8 Save the symbol table Note Note that the data entered for control and monitoring are only stored when you save the symbol table If you exit the symbol editor without saving the symbol table your entries for the WinCC attributes are abandoned Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 13 6 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 13 4 Changin
176. e 9 3 Example of Global Data Communication Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 5 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 4 Overview Phase 1 Phase 2 Compiling and Downloading a Global Data Table The data entered in the global data table must be compiled into a language that the CPUs understand Compiling the global data GD table is split into two phases Each phase is displayed in the status bar at the bottom edge of the user interface During the first compilation of a global data table STEP 7 checks the following The validity of the CPUs entered in the header of the CPU columns e The syntax of the addresses you entered in the table cells e The size of the data areas for sender and receiver the data area for the sender and receiver must be the same size That the global data in a row are exchanged either via the communication bus only or via the MPI cable Mixed operation is not possible The individual global data are collected together into packets Once the first compilation has been completed successfully the GD table is in phase The active phase is displayed in the status bar of the window In phase 1 you can edit the following in the global data table e Status rows and e Scan rates The configuration data created in phase are sufficient for global data communication to function The data can be downloaded to the CPUs from the programm
177. e CPU is displayed here Addresses You can use this button to open a dialog box in which you can enter address information depending on the connection partner you are using Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Partner PG PC with SAPI S7 Interface Partner PG PC with WinCC S7 Connection within a C7 630 Station You can create S7 connections to PGs PCs with an SAPI S7 interface within a project When you create the S7 connection you must select the PG PC you already created in the SIMATIC Manager as the connection partner refer to Section 10 6 for the procedure You enter special address information for the PG PC in the Address Details dialog box You can create S7 connections to PGs PCs with WinCC within a project or beyond project boundaries When you create the S7 connection you must select Unspecified as the connection You enter special address information for WinCC in the Address Details dialog box A C7 630 station comprises a PC with an S7 400 CPU with an MPI and a PROFIBUS interface and an Ethernet CP A C7 630 station contains Windows NT STEP 7 and WinCC For C7 630 stations you can create connections just as you can for other S7 400 stations with an S7 400 CPU You can also create an S7 connection whose communication partner is located within the C7 630 station This means you configure the 7 400 CPU as the local no
178. e Force functions are deactivated By assigning fixed values to variables you can set specific situations for your user program and use this to test the programmed functions You should note the following important information before you execute the Force function Warning Beware of injury to personnel and damage to property Make sure that no dangerous situations can occur before you execute the Force function Before you start the Force function you should check that nobody is executing this function on the same CPU at the same time Caution Forcing cannot be undone meaning the menu command Edit gt Undo is not possible You must open only one single Force Values window for a CPU The variables together with their respective force values for the active force job are displayed in this window If no force job is active the window is empty The name of the active online connection to a CPU is displayed in the title bar of the Force Values window Force Values MPI 4 Direct _ Om x Address Format Force Value MW 100 HEX W 16 0001 Q 20 1 BIN 2 0 Figure 16 4 Force Window Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs Differences The following table summarizes the differences between forcing and between Forcing modifying and Modifying Table 16 1 Comparison of the Differences between Forcing and Modifying Fe
179. e and date on the module and check it regularly see Section 17 13 e Short description of the diagnostic event In the lower text box all the additional information is displayed for the event selected in the list in the upper window This information includes e Event number e Description of the event e Mode transition caused by the diagnostic event e Reference to the location of the error in a block block type block number relative address which caused the entry in the buffer e Event state being entered or left e Additional information specific to the event Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware Saving Contents in a Text File Correcting Errors Special Cases Using the Save As button you can save the content of the diagnostic buffer as an ASCII text file With the Help on Event button you can display additional information on the event selected in the upper list box With diagnostic buffer entries which reference an error location block type block number relative address you can open the block which caused the event in order to correct the cause of the error Select the diagnostic event in the upper list box and click the Open Block button The block is opened in the appropriate editor for example Statement List with the cursor pointing to the point in the program which caused the error The diagnostic buffer stores all diagnos
180. e as shown in the example in Figure 12 11 Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station Which programs do you want to assign to which operator stations 3 5 S7 M7 Programs Operator Stations S7 M7 Program Subnet Type Connections OS 3 S7 STANTYPE DRIVE 7 STANDARD 7 MLC PROFIBUS 5 S7 INST PROFIBUS 15 S7 FURN PROFIBUS 23 s7 PROFIBUS 80 ee lt gt Connection lt Back Continue gt Complete Cancel Help Figure 12 11 Assigning Programs to the Operator Stations Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 21 Creating and Displaying Messages Displaying the Transfer Log 12 22 To assign a program to an operator station select the required program and drag it while holding the left mouse button pressed to the operator station which you want to display the messages for this program You can also use the buttons between the two list boxes to add and remove programs Repeat this procedure until you have assigned all programs whose messages you want to be displayed to the appropriate operator station You can assign a number of programs to one operator station or a number of operator stations to one program If no data are to be transferred for an operator station click on the check box in front of the respective operator station to deactivate it
181. e clicks When you open an object the relevant software application is started automatically to display or edit the content of the object Read On The next few pages describe some of the basic actions used to edit objects Take the time now to read up on these basic handling steps as they will not be described in detail further on in the manual Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 4 6 C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 5 Creating and Managing Objects Overview Setting the Path to Create New Projects Libraries Creating Objects Opening Objects Some basic processing steps are the same for all objects and do not depend on the object type These standard handling sequences are summarized here This knowledge of standard procedures is required to move on to other sections in the manual The usual sequence of steps when handling objects is e Create an object e Select an object e Perform actions with the object for example copy delete Before you create new projects or libraries for the first time you should set the path where you want these objects to be created by selecting the menu command Options gt Customize In the SIMATIC Manager tab of the dialog box displayed you can specify a path name under which you want to store new projects or libraries The STEP 7 wizard New Project offers support with creating a new project and inserting objects Use the menu
182. e configured by dragging them from the Hardware Catalog window to the detailed view of the DP slave ET 200L table in the lower part of the station window Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 11 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 7 Example 5 Structure with a Distributed I O PROFIBUS DP Distributed I O Information on DP Slaves and DP Master DP Master Selecting and Arranging a DP Master Selecting and Arranging DP Slaves 7 12 The distributed I O refers to master systems comprising DP distributed I O master and DP slaves which are connected via a bus cable and communicate with each other via the PROFIBUS DP protocol As DP masters and DP slaves can be different devices this section only explains the basic procedure involved in configuring You will find details on functionality access procedures etc in the manuals for the specific devices and in the online help for the special FCs for example DP SEND and DP RECEIVE for CP 342 5 refer to 501 You can use the following as DP masters e A CPU with an integrated or pluggable DP master interface for example CPU 315 2 DP integrated e An interface submodule which is assigned to a CPU FM for example IF 964 DP in the CPU 488 4 e A communications processor CP in conjunction with a CPU such as CP 342 5 CP 443 5 To create a DP master system follow the steps outlined below
183. e for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Overview Communication connections are always required when you want to exchange data using special communication blocks SFBs FBs or FCs in the user program A communication connection defines the communications relationship for any two nodes Defining a connection makes programming the communication for data exchange much easier The setting is then valid for all called communication blocks and need not be redefined every time This chapter describes how you define the required connections with STEP 7 which particular features you should note and which communication blocks you can use in the user program Chapter Section Description Page Overview Communication Connections An Overview Creating a Connection Properties of S7 Connections 10 4 Properties of Point to Point Connections 10 5 Communication Connections to Partners in Other Projects 10 6 Communication Connections to Other Stations PGs PCs or SIMATIC S5 Stations 10 7 Downloading the Connection Table to the Programmable Controller Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 1 Establishing Communication Connections 10 1 Communication Connections An Overview Overview Setting the required communication connections is a requirement for data exchange using special communication blocks SFBs FBs or F
184. e on the hard disk ready for installation Before you can start installing the software Windows 95 NT must be started e You do not require an external data medium if the STEP 7 software was shipped on the hard disk of your programming device e To install from floppy disk insert disk 1 in the disk drive of your programming device or PC usually drive A or drive B e To install from CD ROM insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive of your PC To start the installation program proceed as follows 1 Start the dialog box for installing software under Windows 95 NT by double clicking on the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel 2 Click on Install 3 Insert the disk disk 1 or the CD ROM and click on Continue Windows 95 NT searches automatically for the installation program SETUP EXE 4 Follow the instructions displayed by the installation program step by step The program guides you step by step through the installation process You can switch to the next step or the previous step from any position During installation queries are shown in dialog boxes for you to answer and options are displayed for you to select Read the following notes so you can reply to the queries faster and easier Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 2 7 Installing and Uninstalling If a Version of STEP 7 Is Already Installed Selecting the Installation
185. e required button under Node for example MPI 4 Assign a node address to the module the MPI address for an MPI subnet You can also create a new subnet for example MPI subnet using this dialog box assign the module to a different subnet or change the properties of a subnet You will find information on subnets in the Chapter Configuring Networks STEP 7 assigns input and output addresses when modules are placed in the configuration table This means every module has a start address address of the first channel the addresses for the remaining channels are based on this start address In order to be able to assign or change input and output addresses the following requirements must be fulfilled e The module is inserted in a central rack or expansion rack and the CPU must permit free address assignment e The module is inserted in a DP slave or the module is a DP slave compact DP slave Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 21 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Assigning Input Output Addresses Displaying the Address Overview 7 22 To assign an input or output address to a module follow the steps outlined below 1 Double click on the row in the rack containing the module whose start address you want to set or select the module and select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties 2 Select the Addresses tab 3 Change t
186. e shows you the system attribute for the message block Message Block Channel Acknowl Accompanying Corres Symbol and No of the edgement Values ponding Block System Attribute NOTIFY SFB36 1 channel No Up to 10 notify accomp values ALARM SFB33 1 channel Possible Up to 10 alarm accomp values o ALARM_SQ SFC17 1 channel Possible ALARM_8 SFB34 8 Possible No alarm_8 channels ALARM_8P SFB35 8 Possible Up to 10 alarm_8p channels accomp values AR_SEND SFB37 1 channel Used to send an archive ar_send Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages Requirements Before you can create a block related message you must have done the following e Created a project and an S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager e Created the function block FB in your S7 program to which you want to assign the message You will find the exact procedure for creating projects and related objects in Chapter 5 Basic Procedure To configure block related messages follow the steps outlined below Select a suitable message block for your gt See table on task Select the function block FB to which you gt want to assign the message and open it i Fill out the variable declaration table for the function block and assign system attributes to E gt Steps 2 to 4 the variables Fill out the code section of the function
187. e source file container of your S7 program You then compile this graph group into blocks HiGraph creates a function FC and a shared data block DB for each graph group which are stored in the user program The requirement for this is that you must have entered a symbol for the function and the data block for each graph group in the symbol table The symbolic name for the function must match the name of the graph group the symbolic name for the data block is derived from this The syntax and the formal parameters are checked when the last entry has been made in a graph when the active window is closed The addresses and symbols are not checked until the graph is compiled The function created in this way with its data block cannot execute alone so you must call it from another logic block in your user program which you create in another programming language such as Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram or Statement List Symbolic Access You can use the entries in the symbol table for the S7 program for symbolic addressing Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 11 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs 11 7 Programming in the CFC Programming Language Overview The optional software package CFC Continuous Function Chart is a programming language for linking complex functions graphically To use CFC you do not require any detailed programming knowledge or specific knowledge of programmable control and y
188. e the module in the dialog box which appears If the message The slot is already occupied appears you must activate the function first using the menu command Options gt Customize and selecting the option Enable Module Exchange If you want to select a number of rows in the configuration table for example to delete a number of modules or insert a number of modules of the same type follow the steps outlined below e To select all rows Select the menu command Edit gt Select All e To select a group of consecutive rows Click on the first row of the group you want to select Keep the SHIFT key pressed and click on the last row of the group you want to select e To select a number of rows Press CTRL keep it pressed and click on each row you want to select You can move modules or other components to other suitable slots within the station simply by dragging and dropping If you have a complex station structure for example with a number of DP slaves you can minimize the display of the configuration tables 1 Select the configuration table 2 Press the right mouse button and select the menu command Minimize in the pop up menu You can also set this overview using the menu command Options gt Customize Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 27 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks
189. eaning SF LED on the M7 300 Internal fault INTF LED on the M7 400 light up SF LED on the M7 300 Incorrect floppy INTF LED on the M7 400 disk flash Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 What You Should Do Create the data medium for the update again and repeat the update Insert the correct floppy disk or create the data medium for the update again if necessary 19 19 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 9 Updating the Firmware Overview Requirement AX 19 20 On the M7 300 M7 400 CPUs and application modules there is firmware specific to the module such as the BIOS You can update the firmware via the programmable control system management The firmware can either be updated independently of or in conjunction with the system software for M7 300 M7 400 In the Update Firmware tab the version of the firmware in the programmable control system and in the programming device are displayed This makes it easier to check whether an update of the firmware is necessary an update is only necessary if the firmware version in the programmable control system is older than the firmware version in the programming device If you install the operating system via MPI RFS the firmware version is checked automatically If the firmware version on the M7 programmable control system does not match the operating system installed a message is displayed to infor
190. ears 3 Select the menu item Go To Block to open the block itself or Select the menu item Go To Location to open the calling block and position the cursor on the call for the selected block The menu item Go To Location can only be selected if there is a calling block higher in the nesting level for the selected block The commands in the context sensitive menu are also available in the menu bar Edit gt Go To gt Block and Edit gt Go To gt Location Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 9 Displaying Reference Data 14 7 Displaying Assignments Displaying To activate one of the assignment lists select one of the menu commands Assignment Li i ssignment tists View gt Assignment gt Inputs Outputs and Bit Memory View gt Assignment gt Timers and Counters or click the corresponding button in the toolbar Uses You are shown an overview of which bits of the addresses in the memory areas I Q and M or which timers T and counters C within the user program are already assigned This list forms an important basis for troubleshooting or making corrections in a user program Structure of the There are two assignment lists one list displays only the memory areas input Assignment Lists 1 output Q and bit memory M and the other list displays the timers T and counters C Each row contains one byte of the memory area in which the eig
191. eate them again if necessary using the menu command Insert gt Subnet The icon for a station represents a hardware configuration If you select a station in the left half of the project window you will see the following objects in the right half of the window e The Hardware object with which you can start the hardware configuration application This procedure is described in detail in Part 2 of this manual e One or more Programmable Module objects they are only displayed in stations that have already been configured For example the configured SIMATIC 300 station in Figure 4 1 represents a hardware structure rack with slots that contains a programmable module CPU 314 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 4 3 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 3 Components for Creating Software S7 M7 Programs Content of an S7 Program Blocks Source Files Symbols Charts 4 4 S7 and M7 programs are containers for the software and serve as a starting point for creating software The S7 program contains all the software for a programmable module from the S7 range It contains symbol information and containers for the blocks and source files in the program s7 S7 Program Blocks S7 blocks e g FB1 OB1 rs Source Files Source files STL SCL GRAPH HiGraph Symbols source files
192. ecting STOP Mode Compressing to Prevent Errors 15 12 After deleting and reloading blocks gaps can occur in the user memory load and work memory and reduce the usable memory area With the compress function the existing blocks are rearranged in the user memory without gaps and a continuous free memory is created Figure 15 3 shows a diagram of how occupied blocks of memory are shifted together by the compress function Memory occupied before compressing Memory occupied after compressing Occupied memory Free memory Figure 15 3 Shifting Occupied Blocks of Memory Using Compress Memory There are two methods of compressing the user memory as follows e If there is insufficient memory available when you are downloading to the programmable controller a dialog box appears informing you of the error You can compress the memory by clicking the corresponding button in the dialog box e As a preventative measure you can display the memory utilization and compress the memory if gaps are present in the occupied memory You can only close all the gaps in memory when you compress in the STOP mode In the RUN P mode mode selector setting the blocks currently being processed cannot be shifted since they are open The compress function does not work in the RUN mode mode selector setting write protection In t
193. editor compiler symbol import editor Debugging C Programs Manual This manual describes the handling and usage of the debugging tool Organon XDB386 for Borland C C programs CFC Manual The language CFC Continuous Function Chart offers an additional method of programming by connecting blocks in the form of charts The manual contains both the user s guide and the reference description of the programming language If you are using a language for the first time it is recommended that you use the manual to learn about the methodology of creating a program in the chosen language first While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the respective editor compiler Optional package for system software for M7 300 M7 400 Structure of the Manual This manual is split up into the following parts according to topic Part 1 contains general information on terminology basic handling of the standard S7 and M7 software and on preparing for a programming session You should read the first three chapters before you start working with the software In Part 2 there is a description of how to configure and assign parameters to your hardware Parts 3 and 4 show you how to program S7 and M7 programmable logic controllers Part 5 deals with supplementary tasks such as archiving user programs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Ma
194. edure in steps 6 to 8 and exit the message configuration with Save Result In the symbol table displayed all addresses which have a message allocated to them have a cross in the M column 10 If you want to create more SCAN messages repeat steps to 9 11 When you have finished configuring all your messages click on the Generate SDB button to save the configured data in one or more system data blocks SDBs Result All the data saved in the message configuration database are written in one or more SDBs 12 Exit the message configuration application with Save 13 In the SIMATIC Manager select the System Data container in the corresponding S7 program under Blocks which contains the generated SDBs and download the container to the required CPU using the menu command PLC gt Download 14 Transfer the data you configured as described in Section 12 6 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 14 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 4 Creating and Editing User Defined Diagnostic Messages Overview Requirements Basic Procedure Using this function you can write a user entry in the diagnostic buffer and send a corresponding message which you create in the message configuration application User defined diagnostic messages are created by means of the system function SFC52 WR_USMSG which is used as a message block You must insert the call for the
195. efore require e Either a PC MPI cable which is connected to the communications port of your device or e An MPI module which is installed in your device Certain programming devices have the multipoint interface already built in An external prommer is only required if you want to program EPROMs with a PC Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling 2 2 Authorization and Rights of Usage Overview Authorization Disk ZN What To Do If You Lose the Authorization Installing the Authorization during Your First Installation The STEP 7 programming software requires a product specific authorization or license for use The software is therefore copy protected and can be used only if the relevant authorization for the program or software package has been found on the hard disk of the respective programming device or PC Different authorizations are required for example for STEP 7 STEP 7 Mini and for the optional software packages A read only authorization disk is included with the scope of supply of the software It contains the authorization and the program required to display install and remove the authorization called AUTHORS The number of authorizations possible is determined by an authorization counter on the authorization disk Every time you install an authorization the counter is decremented by 1 When the counter value reaches zero you c
196. elevant for message configuration Transfer log If you select this option a report is created for the transfer of the configuration data e Exit WinCC after transfer Activate this option if you do not want to continue working with WinCC after transferring the configuration data Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 20 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages Starting the To start the transfer program you have two possibilities Transfer Program e Select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Transfer in the SIMATIC Manager or e Open the S7 WinCC Mapper via Start gt Simatic gt STEP 7 gt PLC OS Engineering from the Windows start menu Transferring the To transfer the configuration data to the programmable controller follow the Data steps outlined below 1 Open the STEP 7 project for which you want to transfer the data 2 In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Transfer Result The dialog box Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station is opened on page 1 5 Below is an introduction 3 Click the Continue button and open page 2 5 Select the programmable controller here on the left and the operator stations to which you want to transfer data on the right by clicking them 4 Click the Continue button and open page 3 5 Select the assignment of the programs to the operator stations her
197. equence or by the user intervening Set the operating mode from RUN to STOP before you do the following Download user programs to the CPU Sections 15 4 15 5 e Execute a memory reset on the CPU Section 15 3 e Compress the user memory Section 15 9 If you execute a complete restart in the STOP mode the program is restarted and first processes the startup program in the block OB100 in STARTUP mode If the startup is successful the CPU changes to RUN mode A complete restart is required after the following e Memory reset e Downloading the user program in the STOP mode e Istack or B stack overflow e Troubleshooting after the CPU has gone into STOP as the result of a programming error in the user program Complete restart being interrupted by power down or switching the mode selector on the CPU e Exceeding the interrupt time limit for a restart If you execute a restart in the STOP mode the program is restarted at the point of interruption If the restart is successful the CPU changes into RUN mode A restart is only possible for S7 400 CPUs and only permitted here if the program was not edited in the STOP mode Note In the object properties for a CPU you can set whether a restart or complete restart is executed after power on Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs Operating Mode Priority Displaying and Changing the
198. er Programs 11 1 Programming S7 CPUs Requirements Blocks Source Files and Charts User Program for an S7 CPU In order to be able to create a new S7 program create a project in the SIMATIC Manager There are two different methods of setting up an S7 program which contains among other things the user program e You create the program independent of the hardware In this case you insert the object for your S7 program directly beneath the project You can then link a program created in this way to a programmable module in a station at a later stage e You edit the S7 program linked to a module see Figure 11 1 In this case you must have at least one SIMATIC 300 or 400 station available in the project which should be configured so that it contains at least one programmable module S7 CPU The S7 program is then inserted in the project automatically when you insert the CPU If you want to work with shared symbols edit the symbol table containing the assignment of absolute addresses and symbolic names for your S7 program first The symbols for blocks can also be assigned in this table So that the program will be able to run on the CPU you must also have configured and assigned all the necessary parameters to your hardware This can be done either before or after you create the program You can store the S7 program in the form of blocks in the Blocks container source files or charts Source files are created with
199. er off A restart is not possible in M7 Data are called retentive if they have the same value after a power supply failure as before the power supply failed The data are backed up in two ways e Voltage backup e Backup memory see also Backup In the RUN mode the user program is processed and the process image is updated cyclically In addition all digital outputs are enabled Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary S S7 Program SAPI S7 Interface Scan Cycle Time SCL Shared Data SIMATIC Manager Source File STARTUP Statement Statement List STL An S7 program is a container for blocks source files and charts for S7 programmable modules which also contains the symbol table This interface is a C programming interface of a programming device or PC for access to SIMATIC S7 components The scan cycle time is the time the CPU takes to run the user program once through SCL Structured Control Language is a high level programming language similar to Pascal and in accordance with the International Electrotechnical Commission s IEC 1131 3 standard used to program complex tasks in programmable logic control such as algorithms data processing tasks Shared data are data which can be accessed from any logic block function FC function block FB organization block OB These are bit memory M inputs I outputs Q timers T counters C a
200. es container for programs in the form of source files The following objects already exist in a newly created M7 program e Symbol table Symbols object e A Blocks container If you want to create Statement List Function Block Diagram or Ladder Logic programs select the existing Blocks object and then click the menu command Insert gt S7 Software gt Block In the submenu you can select the type of block you want to create such as a data block user defined data type UDT function function block organization block or variable table VAT You can now open the empty block and start entering the Statement List Ladder Logic or Function Block Diagram program You will find more information in the Statement List 232 Ladder Logic 233 and Function Block Diagram 236 Programming Manuals Note The object System Data SDB which may exist in a user program was created by the system You can open it but you cannot make changes to it for reasons of consistency It is used to make changes to the configuration once you have loaded a program and to download the changes to the programmable controller You can also use blocks from the standard libraries supplied with the software to create user programs You access the libraries using the menu command File gt Open You will find more information on using standard libraries and creating your own libraries in the online help Standard Software for S
201. es print out a part of a project follow the steps outlined below Open the appropriate object to display the information you want to print on the screen Open the Print dialog box using the menu command File gt Print in the application window Depending on which application you are in the first entry in the menu bar may not be File but the object processed by the application such as Symbol Table If necessary change the print options printer print range number of copies etc in the dialog box and close it You will find more information on print settings in the online help Blocks do not need to be opened You can print them directly in the SIMATIC Manager using the menu command File gt Print Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Printing Printer Setup Setting the Page Format Setting Headers and Footers Print Preview DOCPRO Optional Package 21 2 To set up a printer and set the paper format landscape or portrait select the menu command File gt Print Setup To set the page format for the printout for example A4 A5 Letter select the menu command File gt Page Setup Adjust the form you use to print out your data to the required paper format If the form is too wide the right edge will be printed on a new page You can set the headers and footers for your documents in the SIMATIC Manager using the menu command File g
202. ess to address the following e Signals or blocks using the symbols in the symbol table e Local variables and parameters which you define for logic blocks in the variable declaration table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs 11 4 Programming Source Files with Statement List and S7 SCL What Is SCL Based On What Is Statement List Based On Source Files and Blocks Created Symbolic Access The programming language SCL Structured Control Language is a high level textual language whose language definition conforms generally to the International Electrotechnical Commission s IEC 1131 3 standard The PASCAL type language simplifies for example the programming of loops and conditional branches in contrast to Statement List by its high level language commands SCL is therefore suitable for example for calculations involving formulae complex optimization algorithms or the management of large quantities of data FUNCTION_BLOCK FB20 VAR_INPUT ENDVALUE INT END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT IQ1 REAL END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT CONTROL Bool END_VAR VAR INDEX INT END_VAR BEGIN CONTROL FALSE FOR INDEX 1 TO ENDVALUE DO IQ1 IQ1 2 IF IQ1 gt 10000 THEN CONTROL TRUE END_IF END FOR END_FUNCTION_BLOCK Figure 11 5 Source File in SCL Function Block with Loop and Condition The programming language representation Statement List STL is a
203. essage Configuration Contents Of M_attribute S7 Program 1 V Message Text Language English Naams A General __ _ProTool Message WinCC Mess Loor Sub_No _1 EI alarm 8 New Message ey Ere i ae Sub_No _3 Sub No 2 j New Device r Sub_No _4 Sub_No 3 1 Vt Sub_No _5 m Sub_No _4 1 a Delete Poa anaes Sub_No _5 1 ot ub Nort Sub_No 6 1 Rs 44 Sub No 8 J i NO i x Generate SDB Text Attributes For Standard Message within a Group Disable Display Class 0 a X r Type of Acknowledgement Alarm Message Event Message OK Cancel Help Figure 12 3 Message Configuration Dialog Box with Multi Channel Message Block Double click on the message type displayed and enter the required message attributes and message text in the Attributes and Text tabs If you selected a multi channel message block for example ALARM_8 you can assign a different message text to each sub number The attributes apply to all sub numbers Assign the required display devices to the message template by clicking the New Device button and selecting the required display devices in the Add Display Device dialog box that opens In the following tabbed pages enter the required texts and attributes for the display devices Exit the dialog box with OK and close the LAD STL FBD window Note When editing the display device s
204. eted from memory cards using the flash file system To erase a memory card follow the steps outlined below 1 Check that the memory card is inserted in the programming device slot and click the S7 Memory Card button in the toolbar in the SIMATIC Manager In the left half of the window that appears the container is visible which represents the content of the memory card In the right half of the window the objects in the memory card container are displayed 2 In S7 delete the container in the left half of the window in M7 delete the container or individual objects from the container Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs Overview This chapter explains the following topics e How to display the current values of variables in your user program or the CPU monitor e How to assign fixed values to variables in a user program or a CPU modify e How to create a variable table for the variables you want to display or modify This application offers valuable support when commissioning a plant and gives you an overview of the status of the variables in your system Chapter Section Description Page ae 16 2 Creating a Variable Table 16 3 Editing a Variable Table 16 4 Establishing Connections to CPUs 16 5 Setting Triggers 16 6 Monitoring and Modifying Variables Information on Forcing Variables 16 8 Creating and Deleting Force Jobs 16 9
205. ew For modules with diagnostic capability information on any module faults that may have occurred is displayed in this tabbed property sheet Standard Module In the Standard Module Diagnostics window internal and external module Diagnostics faults and the corresponding diagnostic information are displayed Examples of possible displays are e Module failed Channel error e Missing external auxiliary voltage e Module without parameters Channel Specific In this window diagnostic data on channel faults that occurred are displayed Diagnostics Specific diagnostic information is displayed for each channel with a fault Examples of possible displays are e Digital input configuration parameter assignment error e Digital input wirebreak e Analog input reference channel error Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 14 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 10 Displaying DP Slave Diagnostics Overview Standard Slave Diagnostics Channel Specific Diagnostics Hexadecimal Format The DP Slave Diagnostics tabbed page provides information diagnostic data on slaves structured according to EN 50170 part 3 PROFIBUS General and device specific diagnostic information on the slave is displayed e General diagnostic information on the slave This information relates to the slave starting up correctly or failing In particular errors such as Slave cannot be accessed configuration err
206. ext Language English Symbols Symbolic Address Display Dev New Message lt A Vave Voltage General Data New Device Delete Generate SDB Attributes Text SCAN Attributes SCAN Accom Values Filter For a Standard SCAN Message Absolute Address i 1 1 Symbolic Address Valve voltage SCAN Increment 100 ms OK Cancel Help Figure 12 6 SCAN Attributes in Message Configuration Note Ensure that the check mark is set in the Message check box otherwise the message you are currently editing will be deleted when you exit the message configuration dialog box If you want to delete a message delete the check mark in the Message check box by clicking it 5 Enter the required watchdog time in the SCAN Increment box Take the performance of your CPU into account here because the watchdog time entered here may affect the scan cycle time Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 6 The Filter tab offers you support in selecting address types and data types from the symbol table which you want to insert as accompanying values Set the required filters here 7 Now select the box for accompanying value 1 in the SCAN Accompanying Values tab and click on the Add button Result The symbol table is opened and dis
207. f it is consistent and free of errors Only then can system data blocks SDBs be created which can in turn be downloaded to the CPU You can check whether system data blocks can be created from the current station configuration by using the menu command Station gt Consistency Check If no SDBs can be created STEP 7 displays the causes of the error Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 23 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Downloading the Configuration to the Programmable Controller Uploading a Configuration 7 24 To download the configuration to the programmable controller follow the steps outlined below 1 Switch the CPU to the STOP mode 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Download STEP 7 then guides you through the process using dialog boxes Result The configuration for the whole programmable controller is downloaded to the CPU CPU parameters become effective immediately the parameters for the other modules are transferred to the modules in STARTUP mode Note Partial configurations for example the configurations for individual racks cannot be downloaded to the programmable controller For reasons of consistency STEP 7 always downloads the whole configuration to the programmable controller You can upload an existing configuration from the programmable controller to the programming device for example to create a similar configuration on
208. fF SIMATIC 300 Station 7 S7 Program not linked to hardware Figure 5 3 Structure Displayed in an Offline Project Window Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 5 12 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects The Online View of the Project Window Project windows which display the online view show lt Online gt in the title bar In the online view of the project window in the S7 Program and M7 Program objects you can view the software which was downloaded to the CPU of a connected programmable controller STEP 7 determines the content of the objects S7 Program or M7 Program according to the software downloaded on the programmable controller The programmable modules are displayed in the form of diagnostic symbols The meaning of these symbols is explained in the online help for the SIMATIC Manager menu command Help gt Contents under Handling You can recognize the operating state of a CPU for example from its diagnostic symbol The containers for source files and charts the symbol table and the connection table are not displayed in the online view because they are not in the programmable controller i Project H SIMATIC 300 Station Programmable module i Program Blocks J Programmable module i SIMATIC 300 Station _ 7 S7 Program for PLC access without hardware config Figure 5 4 Structure
209. fferent times Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 9 Diagnosing Hardware 17 7 Displaying General Module Data General Tab The General tabbed property sheet displays the identification data and information about the current status of the selected module see Figure 17 2 Module Information Module General Diagnostic Butter Memory Scan Cycle Time Tme System Pert Data Communiaton stacks E i identification data Noted aot never recono Figure 17 2 General Tab Uses You can use this function in the following situations e When you need to know the type release and order number of a module e When you want to check the slot and address information e When you want to check whether the configured module setpoint type matches the type of the module inserted in the rack actual type e When you require information about the status of the module to get information about any faults Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 8 Displaying the Content of the Diagnostic Buffer Diagnostic Buffer Diagnostic Events Uses Organizing the Diagnostic Buffer Every CPU and every module with system diagnostics capability such as the FM 354 has a diagnostic buffer in which exact information on all diagnostic events is entered in the order in which they occur The content
210. for modifying to End of Cycle You can also display the values of selected variables once with the menu command Variable gt Update Monitor Values or modify selected variables once with the menu command Variable gt Activate Modify Values This command is taken to mean trigger immediately and is executed as quickly as possible without reference to any point in the user program These functions are mainly used for monitoring and modifying in STOP mode Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs 16 6 Monitoring and Modifying Values Overview ZN Monitoring Variables Modifying Variables Using the Monitor function you can monitor selected variables at predefined trigger points Using the Modify function you can assign a value to selected variables at predefined trigger points to modify the variable Caution Make sure that no dangerous situations can occur before you execute the Modify function Modifying is only possible if the mode selector on the CPU is set to RUN P or STOP The following methods are available to you for monitoring variables e Activate the Monitor function with the menu command Variable gt Monitor The values of the selected variables are displayed in the variable table in accordance with the trigger point and trigger frequency set If you set the trigger frequency Every Cycle you can toggle the Monitor
211. form We would be grateful if you could also take the time to answer the questions giving your personal opinion of the manual Siemens also offers a number of training courses to introduce you to the SIMATIC S7 automation system Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in Nuremberg Germany for details D 90327 Nuremberg Tel 49 911 895 3154 You can find up to date information about SIMATIC products On the Internet under http www aut siemens de e Using fax polling no 49 8765 93 00 50 00 The SIMATIC Customer Support team provides you with current information and downloads which may be useful for users of SIMATIC products e On the Internet under http www aut siemens de support html_00 index shtml e Via the SIMATIC Customer Support Mailbox under the number 49 911 895 7100 To dial in use a modem with V 34 28 8 kbps capability whose parameters you should set as follows 8 N 1 ANSI or dial in using ISDN 75 64 kbit Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Notes on Using the Manual You can reach SIMATIC Customer Support by phone using the number 49 911 895 7000 and by fax using 49 911 895 7002 You can also send inquiries by e mail in the Internet or by mail to the above mailbox The user s guide sections in this manual do not contain exact procedures in individual steps but are intended to explain ba
212. formation on the structure of the operating system and of a user program of an M7 CPU FM The first time user of an M7 300 M7 400 should use this manual to acquire an overview of the programming methodology and to use it to base their user program design on M7 300 and M7 400 This manual provides you with an overview of the system functions and standard User Manual System and Standard functions available in M7 which you can use when programming Functions Reference Manual STEP 7 The STEP 7 User Manual explains the main usage and the functions of the STEP 7 automation software As a first time user of STEP 7 and as an experienced user of STEP 5 this manual will provide you with an overview of the procedures used to configure program and start up an M7 300 M7 400 While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the software System Software for M7 300 M7 400 User Manual This User Manual explains the installation of the system software for M7 300 M7 400 and the starting up and handling of the M7 programmable control systems ProC C for M7 300 and M7 400 Manual This manual contains the user s guide You will find the description of the language in the online documentation for Borland C While you are working with the software you can access a range of online help topics which offer detailed support on using the respective utilities
213. fter the interrupt Click the Open Block button The block is opened in the program editor with the cursor pointing to the place in the program which caused the error and you can edit the block as required to correct it For every block listed in the B stack you can display the corresponding local data by selecting the block and clicking the L Stack button The L stack or local data stack contains the local data values of the blocks the user program was working with at the time of the interrupt Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 23 Diagnosing Hardware In depth knowledge of the system is required to interpret and evaluate the local data displayed The first part of the data displayed correspond to the temporary variables for the block Nesting Stack When you click the Nesting Stack button the content of the nesting stack at the interrupt point is displayed The nesting stack is a memory area which the logic operations A AN O ON X and XN use The button is only active if open bracket expressions existed at the time of the interruption Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 24 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Introduction to M7 18 Programmable Control Systems Part 4 Working with Managing M7 Programmable M7 Programmable Control Control Systems 19 Systems Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01
214. full agreement However the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions Suggestions for improvement are welcomed Technical data subject to change Siemens AG 1997 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft C79000 G7076 C552 Preface Purpose of the Manual Audience Where is this Manual Valid Which Standards Does the Software Comply With This manual has the following aims e To explain the basic concepts of the standard software e To introduce its most important functions The software used to configure and program the SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 programmable logic controllers has been developed in accordance with the latest state of the art ergonomic designs Handling the software is therefore easy to learn and to a large extent self explanatory When procedures are explained you will find the relevant menu commands are also described However instructions on how to fill out dialog boxes are not included you will find explanations for this in the online help This manual is intended for installation personnel programmers and service personnel who have little or no experience of working with the software package STEP 7 This manual is valid for release 4 of the STEP 7 programming software It is valid for the STEP 7 Standard software package and as the basis for the optional software packages which complement the standard package The STEP 7 software fulfils the Internati
215. function off again with the menu command Variable gt Monitor e You can update the values of the selected variables once and immediately using the menu command Variable gt Update Monitor Values The current values of the selected variables are displayed in the variable table The following methods are available to you for modifying variables e Activate the Modify function with the menu command Variable gt Modify The user program applies the modify values for the selected variables from the variable table in accordance with the trigger point and trigger frequency set If you set the trigger frequency Every Cycle you can toggle the Modify function off again with the menu command Variable gt Modify e You can update the values of the selected variables once and immediately using the menu command Variable gt Activate Modify Values The functions Force and Enable Peripheral Output PQ provide other possibilities Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 16 9 Debugging User Programs 16 7 Information on Forcing Variables Overview Uses General Notes ZN ZN Force Window 16 10 You can assign fixed values to individual variables of a user program so that they cannot be changed or overwritten even by the user program executing in the CPU The requirement for this is that the CPU supports this function for example the S7 400 Otherwise the menu commands for th
216. g Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with CFC Overview With CFC you create your user program by selecting blocks that already have operator control and monitoring capabilities from a library and placing and linking them in a chart In the CFC manual 254 you will find detailed information on how to assign operator control and monitoring attributes to blocks Requirement You have inserted an S7 program in a STEP 7 project created a CFC chart and placed blocks in it Procedure To change the preset WinCC attributes of CFC block parameters follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the block 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties to edit the properties of the CFC block Object Properties Block CFC 1 Figure 13 4 Object Properties Dialog Box 3 Click the Operator Control and Monitoring button 4 If necessary change the attribute values already entered in the table displayed in the Operator Control and Monitoring dialog box Refer to the online help for the meanings of the WinCC attributes 5 Close the dialog box by clicking the OK button Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 7 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 13 5 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable Controller Overview Requirement Inserting Operator Station Objects Selecting the Transfer Options 13 8 Using the transfer program
217. g the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties are not exported To export the displayed symbol table to a file with one of the file formats SDE ASC DIF or SEQ assignment list follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the symbol table 2 Use filters to select the symbols you want to export 3 Select the menu command Table gt Export 4 Enter the required file format in the Export dialog box and enter the name of the file to which you want to export the symbol table 5 Confirm your entries with Save Handling When you export only those symbols you selected using a filter are exported Non Unique for example all symbols or only the unique symbols or the non unique Symbols when symbols Exporting Importing To import a symbol table which exists as one of the file formats SDF ASC DIF or SEQ follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the symbol table into which you want to import the data 2 Select the menu command Table gt Import 3 Enter the file format in the Import dialog box and enter the name of the file you want to import 4 Confirm your entries with Open The properties of symbols that you can set using the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties are not taken into consideration when importing Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 6 8 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Assigning Symbols Example Importing an Excel File Notes
218. ge block input for example Mess01 for message input 01 and the type must be DWORD Under declaration type stat enter a symbolic name for the message block to be called for example alarm and the corresponding type here SFB33 Select the name of the variables that you want to assign system attributes to for example Mess01 and open the dialog box for entering system attributes using the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Enter the following system attributes in the table displayed Attribute S7_server and value alarm_archiv Attribute S7_a_type and value lt message block type gt for example alarm if you want to call SFB33 as a message block Note When you enter the system attributes a syntax check is run and the incorrect entries are marked in red Result If the Name column is not selected a flag appears as a symbol indicating that you have assigned system attributes to the variables with this name The selected block is then set as a message type block Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 4 Exit the dialog box with OK If you want to assign more system attributes repeat steps 3 and 4 You will find detailed information on the variable declaration table and on assigning system attributes for blocks and parameters in the manual
219. ging 15 2 Operating status messages sending 10 10 Operator control and monitoring attributes 13 1 configuring attributes 13 5 variables 13 1 Operator control and monitoring attributes changing with CFC 13 7 Optional packages Optional software 18 2 OS object inserting Other station definition Other stations P Parameters assigning to modules 7 20 Partner ID 10 4 10 8 Peripheral output enabling 16 13 PG PC interface 2 10 adapting Index 5 Index Point to point connection 10 14 network connection 10 13 unspecified partner 10 14 configuration table 21 1 diagnostic buffer content 21 1 global data table 21 1 module information project documentation reference data 21 1 symbol table variable table Procedure creating network confi gurations 8 10 transferring data 12 21 13 10 PROFIBUS 5 17 10 5 PROFIBUS address 7 13 Program structure parent child tree Programmable controller Programming device Programming device PC interface 2 10 Programming language S7 HiGraph SCL setting 11 4 Programming languages 11 4 Programming S7 CPU 11 2 Programming steps Index 6 R Rack 7 6 arranging segmented 7 8 selecting Rack detailed view 7 5 RAM saving Reference data displaying generating representation Reference data display saving settings 14 5 Reloading b
220. gned freely to every channel of the module independent of its slot Configuration is necessary in the following cases e If you want to change the default parameters of a module e For stations with a distributed I O PROFIBUS DP e For S7 400 stations with a number of CPUs or expansion racks The term assigning parameters refers to the following e Setting parameters for programmable modules in a central structure and in a network For example a CPU is a module to which you can assign parameters and its watchdog time is a parameter you can set e Setting bus parameters DP master and DP slave parameters for a master system PROFIBUS DP If you want to configure a DP network and have no experience of structuring a distributed I O it is recommended that you read the Technical Overview 21 S7 M7 Programmable Controllers Distributed I O with PROFIBUS DP and AS i to give you an introduction to this topic Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Procedure Requirements for a New Configuration Opening the Application To configure and assign parameters to a structure follow the procedure shown in the figure below Arrange the racks Y Place the modules and interface submodules in the racks y Assign parameters to the modules y Save the configuration y Download the configuration to the progra
221. gram to which you want to assign a symbol 3 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties 4 Fill out the dialog box and close it confirming your entries with OK and making sure you enter a symbol Result The defined symbol is entered in the symbol table Any entries that would lead to non unique symbols are rejected You can also edit individual symbols without first selecting an address cf step 2 To do this select the menu command Insert gt Symbols By clicking the Symbol Table button in the above dialog box you can open the symbol table to edit it This is useful if you realize that you have to edit or enter more than one symbol Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 6 7 Assigning Symbols 6 6 Exporting and Importing Symbol Tables Application You can export the current symbol table to a text file in order to be able to edit it with any text editor You can also import tables created using another application into your symbol table and continue to edit them there The import function can be used for example to include in the symbol table assignment lists created with STEP 5 ST following conversion The file formats SDF ASC DIF and SEQ are available to choose from Exporting You can export the whole symbol table a filtered subset of the symbol table or rows Selected in the table view The properties of symbols that you can set usin
222. h as the S7 400 can contain more than one CPU For this reason you must specify a CPU number via which the partner can access the connection If you selected Partner gt Local or Local lt gt Partner as the communication direction and want to receive message frames via an SFB enter the number of the CPU 1 to 4 here via which the partner can access the connection Specify a CPU number to which the connection is to run If you selected Local gt Partner or Local lt gt Partner as the communication direction and want to receive message frames via an SFB enter the number of the CPU 1 to 4 here to which the connection runs If you want to send and receive message frames via system function blocks you must fill out both the Connection Selected Using and RK512 CPU No boxes Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 13 Establishing Communication Connections 10 5 Communication Connections to Partners in Other Projects Two Possibilities Possible Connection Types Special Cases for PTP Connections 10 14 There are two methods of setting up connections to connection partners which were configured in other STEP 7 projects e Set up aconnection to an other station see Section 10 6 e Set up a connection to an unspecified connection partner You must configure an other station a PG PC and a SIMATIC S5 station as subne
223. h can be used for the connection type FMS connection Table 10 4 Function Blocks for FMS Connections FB Brief Description READ Reading variables from a remote device WRITE Writing variables to a remote device IDENTIFY Identifying the remote device for the user ACCESS Allows write and read accesses to be coordinated disable enable consistent transfer OSTATUS Provides the status of a remote device on request from the user REPORT Reporting a variable to the remote device You will find more information on function blocks in the online help for the FBs and in SO1 Table 10 5 shows an overview of the communication blocks of the type FC function which can be used for the connection types ISO Transport FDL and ISO on TCP connection Table 10 5 Functions for FDL ISO on TCP and ISO Transport Connections FC AG SEND Sends data via a configured connection to the communication partner Brief Description AG RECV Receives data via a configured connection from the communication partner You will find more information on the functions in the online help for the FCs and in 500 and 501 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 7 Establishing Communication Connections Number of Connections Local and Partner IDs Should You Create a Connection for both the Local and Connection Partners 10 8 The maximum number of connections that can be co
224. h you want to create a connection Select unspecified as the connection partner in the Station list box if e You only want to reserve the connection and not enter the partner yet e The connection partner is a programming device or PC with WinCC or e The connection partner is in another STEP 7 project You will find more information in Section 10 5 In the Type list box select the connection type you want to use Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Selecting the Connection Type The connection type is dependent on the subnet and the transfer protocol via which the connection is established and on the automation family to which the connection partners belong Which communication blocks SFBs FBs or FCs you can use depends on the connection type The following table should make it easier for you to select the connection type for the connection you want to establish Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Table 10 1 Selecting the Connection Type Connection Subnet Type Connection between Communication Type SIMATIC Blocks S7 MPI S7 S7 S7 PG PC SFBs USEND Connection PROFIBUS S7 PG PC with URCV BSEND Industrial Ethernet wace BRCVGEI with MPI also PUT START M7 M7 M7 57 STOP M7 PG PC RESUME S7 partner in another STATUS N TAT project S
225. he Memory tab in the dialog box you open with the menu command PLC gt Module Information you can display the memory utilization and decide whether you want to compress the memory see Section 17 11 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 10 Saving the RAM Contents of the CPU to the Integrated EPROM Uses Procedure For CPUs which have an integrated EPROM you can copy the content of the RAM to this EPROM so the data are not lost following power down or a memory reset To copy the content of the RAM to the integrated EPROM follow the steps outlined below 1 Using the menu command View gt Online open a window containing the online view of an open project or Display the Accessible Nodes window by clicking the Accessible Nodes button in the toolbar or selecting the menu command PLC gt Display Accessible Nodes 2 Select the S7 or M7 program in the online view of the project window or the node in the Accessible Nodes window 3 Select the menu command PLC gt Save RAM to ROM The content of the RAM memory is copied to the integrated EPROM Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 13 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 11 Saving Blocks and User Programs on a Memory Card Uses Memory Card Contents Saving to Memory Card Erasing a Memory Card 1
226. he columns O M C shows whether a symbol was assigned special object properties e O means that the symbol can be operated and monitored with WinCC e M means that a symbol related message SCAN was assigned to the symbol e C means that communication capabilities have been assigned to the symbol Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 6 3 Assigning Symbols Validity The symbol table is only valid for the module to which you link the program If you want to use the same symbols in a number of different CPUs you yourself must ensure that the entries in the various symbol tables all match up for example by copying the table Converting to You can select symbols in the symbol table for an M7 program and convert C Variables them to corresponding C variables in conjunction with the ProC C software option You will find more information on this in the relevant user manual 290 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 6 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Assigning Symbols 6 3 Incomplete and Non Unique Symbols Purpose How Non Unique Symbols Occur Marking Non Unique Symbols Making Symbols Unique Being able to store incomplete symbols means you can for example enter only the symbol name first and then enter the corresponding address at a later date When you come to use the symbol for creating software without an error Message appearing you must have entered the symb
227. he default start address Note For modules within a local bus segment formed by a function module S7 300 or for special function modules S7 400 you have to assign a further start address In addition to the start address for the CPU the module then has a start address for the FM In the overall view of the configuration table the start address from the point of view of the FM is always displayed in this case You can display the input and output addresses 1 Open the station whose addresses you want to display 2 Select the menu command View gt Address Overview 3 In the Address Overview dialog box select the module whose assigned inputs and outputs you want to display for example CPU 4 If required you can filter the display by address type for example input addresses only The address areas Inputs and Outputs are displayed with locations for the modules DP master system PROFIBUS address rack slot interface submodule slot Input addresses with the length 0 for example addresses of interface modules are marked with an asterisk Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 12 Saving Downloading Reading Modifying and Copying a Configuration Overview Saving the Configuration Requirements for Downloading A configuration refers here to the central structure all relevant master sys
228. he instructions is similar to a relay ladder logic diagram Ladder allows you to track the power flow between power rails as it passes through various contacts complex elements and output coils Statement List or STL is a textual representation of the STEP 7 programming language similar to machine code If a program is written in Statement List the individual instructions correspond to the steps with which the CPU executes the program To make programming easier Statement List has been extended to include some high level language constructions such as structured data access and block parameters Function Block Diagram FBD is a graphic representation of the STEP 7 programming language and uses the logic boxes familiar from Boolean algebra to represent the logic Complex functions for example math functions can be represented directly in conjunction with the logic boxes Other programming languages are available as optional packages The following languages are available as optional packages for use in programming the SIMATIC S7 300 S7 400 programmable logic controllers S7 SCL is a high level textual language which conforms to the IEC 1131 3 standard It contains language constructions similar to those found in the programming languages Pascal and C S7 SCL is therefore particularly suitable for users who are used to working with high level programming languages S7 SCL can be used for example to program complex or frequently re
229. he transfer log follow the step outlined below Select the menu command Options gt PLC OS Connection Data gt Display Log in the SIMATIC Manager Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 7 Displaying CPU Messages and User Defined Diagnostic Messages Overview Display Options With the CPU Messages function you can display asynchronous messages on system error events and messages defined by the user Refer also to the description of the system functions SFC17 SFC18 and SFCS2 in the Reference Manual 235 You can also start the message configuration application from the CPU Messages application using the menu command Options gt Configure Messages and create user defined diagnostic messages see Section 12 4 The requirement for this is that you started the CPU Messages application via an online project With the CPU Messages function you can decide whether and how online messages for selected CPUs are displayed You can set the display of the CPU messages to do either of the following e The messages are collected in the background in an archive e The window displaying the messages automatically comes to the foreground when a new message arrives In the CPU Messages window you can browse through the messages in the archive Some examples are shown in Figure 12 12 CPU Messages o8 xl File Edit PLC View Options Help
230. his type of configuration Table 9 1 One CPU Sends Data to a Number of Other CPUs GD Identifier Station1 CPU1 Station2 CPU1 Station3 CPU1 Station4 CPU1 GD 1 1 1 MB50 22 MBS50 22 MB110 22 MB110 22 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 11 Configuring Global Data Communication Example 2 Two CPUs Exchange Data Note 9 12 In this configuration example the CPU with the name Station1 CPU1 is configured to send an array of 10 bytes starting at MB80 to the CPU with the name Station2 CPU1 which stores the received data at MB20 through MB29 CPU1 of Station2 is also configured as a sender and returns 20 bytes of data from DB10 starting at address 0 to CPU1 of Station which stored the data at the same address see Figure 9 8 Station1 CPU1 Station2 CPU1 A A Figure 9 8 Communication via Global Data Table 9 2 shows the global data table for this configuration The table represents one global data circle A CPU 314 for example can handle four circles of this type of configuration Table 9 2 Two CPUs Exchange Data GD Identifier Station1 CPU1 Station2 CPU1 GD 1 1 1 MB80 10 MB20 10 GD 1 2 1 DB10 DBB0 20 23D 590m D 535100 You will find more examples in the online help under Examples for Global Data Communication Standard Softwar
231. ht bits are coded according to their access You can also set whether the access is byte word or double word access The meaning of the access codes is explained in Table 14 3 Table 14 3 Access Codes in the Assignment List for Inputs Outputs and Bit Memory Address is not accessed and therefore not assigned O Address is being used directly X Address is being used indirectly byte word or double word access In each row of the assignment list for timers and counters 10 timers or counters are displayed and coded as in Table 14 4 Table 14 4 Access Codes in the Assignment List for Timers and Counters Address is not accessed and therefore not assigned Address is being used Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 14 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data Sorting These lists are sorted alphabetically You can sort the entries by clicking the column title Filter Settings With the menu command View gt Filter open the Filter dialog box and select the Assignments tab Select the memory areas you want displayed in the assignment list For each memory area inputs outputs bit memory timers counters you can specify a range of addresses to which you want to restrict the display Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 11 Displaying Reference Data 14 8 Displaying Unused Symbols Displaying Unused Symbols Uses Structu
232. iable table object with the menu command Insert gt S7 Block gt Variable Table VAT In the dialog box you can give the table a name You can open the variable table by double clicking the object e In the online view select an S7 M7 program You create an unnamed variable table using the menu command PLC gt Monitor Modify Variables e In the list of Accessible Nodes select a connection You create an unnamed variable table using the menu command PLC gt Monitor Modify Variables e If you are already working in the Monitoring and Modifying Variables window you can create new tables which are not linked to an S7 M7 program using the menu command Table gt New You can open existing tables with Table gt Open e If you are already working in the Monitoring and Modifying Variables window you can also use the corresponding buttons in the toolbar to create or open variable tables Note The variable table name VATO is reserved for internal purposes and cannot be assigned to tables you created yourself Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Debugging User Programs 16 3 Editing a Variable Table Example of a Variable Table Monitoring and Modifying Variables Project SIMATIC 300 Station 1 CPU 314 A VAT1 iia Table Edit Project1 SIMATIC 300 Station 1 CPU 314 A VAT1 Address II l IB M MW I Insert Symbol
233. ication using the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Message 2 Select the displayed S7 program and click on the New Message button on the right Result A new user defined diagnostic message with the designation WR_USMSG lt No gt is inserted and the Identification tab is displayed as shown in Figure 12 9 Message Configuration Contents Of C siemens step7 S7proj S7prog v Message Text Language English F 0 S7_Program 1 Formal Paramet Message Block Message Num New Message AUMAR wR_usmsG A001 New Device Delete Generate SDB Text Identification For a User Defined Diagnostic Message Input In Error Class Message Number 1 b Hex Decimal A OB Message Name WR_USMSG 1 oes A Figure 12 9 Identification Tab in Message Configuration 3 Fill out the Identification and Text tabs for a new message Enter a message number if you do not want to use the number proposed by the system and enter a message name identification and the message text for the incoming and outgoing message You will find additional information in the online help for the message configuration application Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 16 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages Note Ensure that the message number you allocate matches the number y
234. information Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 definition installation 2 7 installation errors 2 9 programming languages 1 2 Standard software 1 1 starting the software user interface 3 3 STL See Statement List STOP 10 6 Structure central 7 6 Structured Control Language 11 7 Subnet 8 2 creating 8 5 setting properties 8 5 symbol 8 9 Symbol defining 6 7 for network connection 8 10 for node interface for station 8 9 for subnet 8 9 local shared Symbol table editing importing 6 8 importing exporting 6 8 Symbol related message assigning accompanying values assigning and editing 12 11 assignment to symbol table overview procedure requirements signals Symbols for diagnostics 17 4 for operating mode 17 5 operator control and monitoring 13 6 unused 14 12 System attributes assigning 12 6 13 3 in symbol table System data block Index 7 Index System diagnostics 7 25 17 1 System function blocks for communication connections 10 5 for PTP connections 10 7 for S7 connection System memory 15 T Tabs Text editor Time synchronization 17 19 Time system cis net Toolbar i cs 1220 13 Transferring a ESE Translating user texts 12 18 Trig ger 16 8 i68 Trigger points Troubleshooting 17 6 U Uninstalling STEP 7 2 9 Unspecified connection partner
235. ing User Programs What Is Statement List Based On Blocks Created Relationship to Other Editors Symbolic Access The programming language representation Statement List STL is a textual language similar to machine code whose instructions execute simple operations A number of instructions can be linked together to form networks Network 1 Control drain valve A Open Coi N Close Coi 1Pe oo Network 2 Display Valve open A Coi Disp_open Network 3 Display Valve closed AN Coi Disp_closed Figure 11 4 Example of Networks in Statement List With the incremental editors for Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram or Statement List you program blocks which are stored in the container for your user program You can create logic blocks OBs FBs FCs data blocks shared or instance DBs or user defined data types UDTs As data blocks and user defined data types have no code section the programming language is significant only for logic blocks If blocks contain no errors you can switch between representing your blocks in either Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram or Statement List Program parts that cannot be displayed in the language you switch to are shown in Statement List You can create blocks from source files in Statement List and also decompile them back into source files If you do not want to use absolute addresses in your program you can use symbolic acc
236. ing device database If you edit the status rows and or the scan rate rows in phase 1 you have to compile the GD table again so that the additional information is included in the configuration data Phase 2 is only necessary if you change the default values for the scan rates or want to make entries in the status rows GD Table new or modified 1st compilation Extend scan rates and status rows Extended GD Table GD Table Phase 2 GD Table Phase 1 e 2nd compilation gt Extended system data Phase 2 System data Phase 1 Figure 9 4 9 6 Compiling a Global Data Table Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Global Data Communication Compiling and Downloading a Global Data Table The configuration is compiled into downloadable system data blocks SDB that are stored in the System Data object in the user program of the respective CPU Follow the steps outlined below 1 Use the menu command GD Table gt Compile to compile the configuration data required for global data communication 2 Use the menu command PLC gt Download to download the configuration data to the CPUs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 9 7 Configuring Global Data Communication 9 5 Setting Scan Rates
237. ing system follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the object M7 Program in your project 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3 Open the Install Operating System tab 4 Select the following options see Figure 19 1 Operating system configuration Version of the operating system on the programming device only if you have a number of versions of M7 SYS installed on your programming device or PC Medium Local drive and partner drive if you use the MPI RFS medium 5 Click the Install button All other activities depend on the operating system configuration selected and on the destination medium Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Managing M7 PLC Systems Medium MPV RFS Local Drive F Install Op System Programs Update Firmware Operating System Version in Programming Device Operating System Version in PLC System Possible Configurations M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 amp MS DOS M7 RMOS32 amp MS Windows Close Partner Drive roa vo2 00 08 V01 02 00 Indirect Data Medium for Updating Create Direct Install Help Figure 19 1 Operating System Version On the programming device Install Operating System Tab Select the version of the operating system here that you want to ins
238. invaluable for extending the load memory The integrated load memory is a RAM memory and is mainly used to reload and correct blocks Note When you first load or format EPROMs an application code is entered in the code bit memory of the EPROM For example the code for S7 is MC5 _BST and M7 DOS for M7 EPROMs with the application code MC5 _BST can be used in the above mentioned context The application code is automatically written when you erase the memory card on the programming device so you can rewrite it EPROMs with the application code M7 DOS are intended for use in M7 systems and behave in the same way as a DOS drive The application code is automatically written when you format the memory card with the program ftlforms only possible on the PG 720 740 760 or M7 systems Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 15 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs Consequences of the Load Memory Structure Table 15 1 Memory Type RAM Method of Loading Downloading and deleting individual blocks Downloading and deleting a complete user program Reloading individual blocks Integrated S7 300 only or plug in EPROM Downloading complete user programs The division of the load memory of a CPU into RAM and EEPROM areas determines the methods available for downloading your user program or the blocks in your user program Table 15 1 illustrates the possibilities Load Mem
239. ion 1 accesses project C e The projects are distributed among the local drives and one or more project group servers Example Workstation 2 accesses projects A B and C To operate STEP 7 in a network you do not have to make any special preparations in STEP 7 You should however note the information below to achieve optimum performance STEP 7 Pe network STEP 7 workstation 1 workstation 2 e COCO CM Ss LJ e E g H Poka Of Windows NT group server Figure 2 1 Multi User Configuration Note on When you configure process variables and messages in order to transfer them Performance to an operator control and monitoring system such as WinCC or ProTool at a 2 12 later stage these data are stored in a database You can improve the speed when working with this database if you install a database server on the project or group server You will find a separate Setup program on the installation CD for this purpose In addition to installing the software on the server you must also perform a number of other actions depending on the server network type You will find instructions in the relevant Product Information Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 User Interface Overview The software for configuring and programming in SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 is designed according to the latest state of the art ergonomics and is mainly
240. ion set 4 VP Fee Rinse 11 1 M2 1 D Q1 1 TEA 74 TIME 0D_0H_ OM_20S_ OMS I 1 M2 1 eee sae m T5 S Prewash N Q 1 3 I1 3 N Q 1 0 eS Se ee NSE A fo N a5 Ga Return N Q 1 4 EA M2 2 Feet to tal a T7 Figure 11 6 Example of Sequential Control in S7 Graph With the S7 Graph editor you program the function block that contains the step sequencer A corresponding instance data block contains the data for the sequencer for example FB parameters step and transition conditions You can have this instance data block created automatically in the S7 Graph editor The function block created in this way with its instance data block cannot execute alone so you must call it from another logic block in your user program which you create in another programming language such as Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram or Statement List If you do not want to use absolute addresses in your program you can use the entries in the symbol table for the S7 program A textual source file Graph source file can be generated from a function block created in S7 Graph which can be interpreted by operator panels or operator interface text displays to display the sequencer Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating User Programs 11 6 Programming Source Files with S7 HiGraph What I
241. ions Resources 9 2 Global data GD are inputs outputs bit memory timers counters and data block areas meaning all data that can be addressed by logic blocks apart from the peripheral input and output areas and temporary local data A configurable part of the data can be exchanged between CPUs with the help of global data communication Global data that have the same sender receiver can be collected together in a GD packet The GD packet is sent in a frame A GD packet is identified by a GD packet number The CPUs that participate in exchanging GD packets form a GD circle A GD circle is identified by a GD circle number Global data are exchanged between S7 CPUs in an MPI network The global data can be transferred via the MPI cable or via the communication bus of an S7 400 station The send CPU sends the global data to all nodes in the GD circle The receive CPUs do not have to know the send CPU The receipt of the global data is not acknowledged Figure 9 1 shows an example of GD communication in an MPI network the S7 400 CPU sends global data and the S7 300 CPUs receive global data PG Figure 9 1 Global Data Communication in an MPI Network The communications resources of a CP
242. ite W access Language Details Language dependent block information in abbreviated form The abbreviations are explained in the online help The cross reference list default option is to sort by memory areas If you click a column header with the mouse you can sort the entries of this column by the default sort criteria With the menu command View gt Filter you open the Filter dialog box Select the Cross References tab and set the row and column properties according to your requirements You can set which columns you want to hide The default setting is for all columns to be displayed You can set the column width in the cross reference list shown on the screen as required using the mouse To jump from the cross reference list to the relevant part of the program Double click with the left mouse button on the address Alternative procedure 1 Select an address in the cross reference list 2 Click the right mouse button to open a context sensitive menu 3 Select the menu item Go To Location The command in the context sensitive menu is also available in the menu bar Edit gt Go To gt Location If you opened a block online or offline and selected an address you can display an overview of all the locations where the address is used by means of the menu command Edit gt Go To gt Location The requirement for this is that you have generated reference data for this program Standard Soft
243. ject System Data individually Blocks which are to be downloaded must have been compiled without errors If a block already exists in the RAM of the CPU confirm the prompt asking whether or not the block should be overwritten When configuring hardware and networks and when programming blocks you can download the object you were currently editing directly using the menu command in the main window of the application you are working with PLC gt Download For example in the Programming Blocks window you can download the currently open block to the programmable controller menu command PLC gt Download Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 6 Deleting Blocks on the CPU in a Programmable Controller Uses Blocks on the CPU Deleting Blocks in an EPROM Deleting Blocks in the RAM Procedure It may be necessary to delete blocks on the CPU during the test phase of the user program Blocks are stored in the user memory of the CPU either in the EPROM or RAM depending on the CPU and the load procedure The blocks stored in the EPROM can be removed by one of the following methods e Delete them by using the menu command PLC gt Download to EPROM Memory Card on CPU if these CPUs have a slot for memory cards and support this function for example CPU 416 This function is only allowed when the CPU is in STOP mode e The in
244. l disk transferring AUTHORS EXE 2 4 Available blocks displaying 17 21 B B stack 17 23 Block stack Block version Block related message assigning and editing 12 4 overview 12 5 procedure requirements Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Blocks creating with LAD STL creating with S7 Graph 11 8 creating with S7 HiGraph creating with SCL STL 11 7 deleting 15 9 downloading inserting reloading saving to memor card 15 14 uploading Boot medium 19 6 10 6 Buttons toolbar 3 3 C C7 control system configuring 7 10 structure CFC CFC program 18 1 Channel specific diagnostics 17 14 Chart 11 2 Combination box 3 4 Comment line 16 6 Comment marker 16 6 Communication blocks 10 6 for communication connections 10 5 Communication configuration examples 9 11 9 14 Communication connection creating 10 8 Index 1 Index Communication connections checking 17 22 communication blocks 10 5 creating displaying number overview procedure Communication load CPU Communications processor Communications resources Compiling global data table 9 6 Compressing in RUN mode in STOP mode 17 17 user memory 15 12 Configuration downloading expandin saving Configuration data 13 2 requirements for transfer 12 19 13 8 transferri
245. les e M7 RMOS32 e M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS e M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows and MS DOS The operating system configuration you choose for your M7 programmable control system depends on a number of factors for example e Which types of applications are to run on the M7 programmable control system e Which M7 modules you are using see Table 18 4 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 18 5 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems M7 Applications Which Operating System on Which M7 Module 18 6 Depending on the operating system configuration chosen the following types of applications can run on an M7 programmable control system e Pure M7 RMOS32 programs for time critical real time and multitasking solutions e MS DOS and or MS Windows programs This means that in addition to RMOS programs you can also run standard MS DOS and MS Windows applications and your own MS DOS and MS Windows applications on your programmable control system Table 18 4 Possible Operating System Configurations on M7 Modules M7 Module M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS with MS Windows M7 300 FM356 4 4 MB Limited FM356 4 8 MB M7 400 FM456 4 4 MB Limited FM456 4 8 MB FM456 4 16 MB CPU486 3 8 MB Limited CPU486 3 16 MB CPU486 3 32 MB CPU488 3 8 MB CPU488 3 16 MB CPU488 3 32 MB Yes Yes Yes Limited means that a war
246. les 8 14 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Index Multi user configuration Multicomputing 7 18 Multipoint interface N Naming conventions for configuration data Nesting stack 17 24 NETPRO context functions 8 13 displaying communication partners 8 13 displaying DP slaves network configuration screen view starting 8 7 starting connection configuration 8 13 starting global data configuration Network 8 2 Network configuration 8 1 8 3 downloading MPI subnet 8 14 possibilities procedure with NETPRO with STEP 7 8 5 Network connection creating 8 10 point to point connection 10 13 S7 connection 10 10 setting properties 8 6 symbol 8 10 Network parameters changing entering 8 8 Network properties 8 5 Network view creating Networks program examples 11 5 103 Node local Node address assigning changing Node interface symbol 8 9 Non unique symbols Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 O Object cutting copying pasting 4 8 functions B 3 opening properties renaming selecting Object hierarchy building 4 8 Object icons Offline view 5 12 Older projects A 3 Online connection to CPU 16 7 Online help calling contents 3 5 Online view non deletable objects 5 14 Operating mode diagnostics symbols 17 5 displaying chan
247. les to be assigned to CPU 1 follow the steps outlined below Arrange the modules at the intended position in the rack Double click on the module and select the Addresses tab Inthe CPU No box select the CPU 1 4 Repeat the actions listed under step 3 in the same manner for the modules which are to be assigned to the remaining CPUs The CPU assignment is displayed for modules which can trigger interrupts in the Inputs or Outputs tab as the Target CPU for Interrupt You can highlight the modules assigned to a specific CPU using the menu command View gt Filter gt CPU No x Modules x CPU number All modules not assigned to CPU x are grayed out in this view exception modules in the distributed I O Alternatively you can select the relevant CPU and select the pop up menu command Filter Assigned Modules Note The set filter does not have an effect on the Print function and the Address Overview dialog box You can change the CPU assignment for all modules in the Addresses tab The station configuration can only be downloaded to all CPUs as a complete configuration This avoids inconsistent configurations The station configuration is uploaded one by one from all programmable modules CPU by CPU You have the option of aborting the upload process even if not all the configuration data SDBs were uploaded In this case parameter assignment information will be l
248. levant module type Now you can analyze the information in the Module Information dialog box to decide what measures to take Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 5 Module Type Dependent Information Overview Information on Module Types Table 17 4 Tab General Using the Module Information dialog box you can display current module information The scope of this information depends on the type of module selected The dialog box displays only those tabs that are relevant to the module In addition to the information in the tabbed property sheets the operating mode is displayed for modules with an operating mode When you open the dialog box from the configuration tables online the status of the module from the viewpoint of the CPU is displayed for example OK fault module not available Table 17 4 shows which property tabs are present in the Module Information dialog box for each module type Module Information for Module Types Module with Module Module DP System with without Standard Diagnostics Diagnostics Diagnostics Slave Capability Capability Capability Diagnostic Buffer Diagnostic Interrupt Memory Scan Cycle Time Time System Performance Data Stacks Communication DP Slave Diagnostics Examples of Module Types Modules with system diagnostics capability are for example FM 351
249. levant project data either individually or together with the operating system to the M7 programmable control system e Delete any software components M7 programs from the M7 programmable control system You can also download and manage M7 programs on the M7 programmable control system with some of the development tools included with the M7 software options for example CFC or the Organon debugging tool refer to the documentation for the relevant software option The programs are not transferred permanently to the mass storage medium in this way they are simply downloaded temporarily to the main memory of the M7 programmable control system In order to download applications to the M7 programmable control system via MPI an operating system must already be available with which the M7 300 M7 400 can start up and establish an MPI connection to the PC programming device As an alternative you can also install your application together with the operating system To download an application to the M7 programmable control system follow the steps outlined below 1 Select an M7 program container linked to an M7 module CPU or FM 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3 Open the Programs tab 4 Make the following selections see Figure 19 3 Programs on the programming device Download and destination media Local drive and partner drive if you use the medium MPI RFS 5 Click the Install button
250. locks container in the online window and drop them there Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects 5 10 Adapting PG PC Interfaces on the Programming Device to Configured Network Settings Overview Advantage Requirement Assigning a Programming Device PC Undoing Assignments You can access programmable controllers for example 7 300 from your programming device PG PC via various different networks for example MPI PROFIBUS Industrial Ethernet For this purpose you will need to configure a PG PC and the relevant programmable controllers as nodes in one of these networks Then assign your software configuration of the programming device to a real programming device PC using the menu command described below This transfers the settings made during configuration to the modules installed in your programming device The PG PC interfaces on your programming device are adjusted to match the configured settings With these settings you specified in your project which network the PG PC interface should be operated on and specified the appropriate parameters for example address transmission rate This function makes it easy for you to fulfil the requirements for accessing programmable controllers Without the function you would need to call the program Setting the PG PC Interface Section 2 5 and compare the settings for the PG PC interface yourself
251. locks 15 10 Remote file system Windows 95 Windows NT 19 6 Retrieving RK512 10 13 Run time meter 17 19 S S7 connection 10 5 10 9 10 14 network connection S7 message configuration overview 12 2 S7 program 5 6 assigning programmable module 5 9 storing in project 5 10 without configured hardware 5 9 S7 WinCC Mapper starting transferring data Save concept in message configuration 12 3 Saving configuration 7 23 CPU RAM to integrated EPROM 15 13 to memory card Scan cycle times Scan rate SCL 11 7 SDB See System data block Sequential control 11 8 Setting the date Setting the time 17 19 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Index Setting the time system 17 19 Setting m lies SFB See System function block SFB12 BSEND SFB13 BRCV SFB 14 GET SFB15 PUT 10 6 SFB16 PRINT 10 7 SFB19 START SFB20 STOP 10 6 SFB21 RESUME SFB22 STATUS 10 6 SFB23 USTATUS 10 6 SFB8 USEND 10 6 SFB9 URCY 10 6 SFC60 GD_SND 9 9 SFC61 GD_RCV 9 9 Shared symbols Software creating 5 6 creating with SCL STL 11 7 5 8 Stack contents displaying Standard diagnostics Standard library Standard software 1 1 START Start address 7 21 State graph Statement List Station 5 4 configuring creating 5 4 other symbol 8 9 Station window 7 4 STATUS 10 6 Status bar example 3 3 Status
252. lows you to work with meaningful symbolic names instead of addresses You should distinguish between local and shared symbols A shared symbol is recognized throughout the whole user program meaning it can be used by all blocks in the program The symbolic name must be unique in the whole user program A block specific or local symbol is only known to the block in which it was defined You can use the same symbol in different blocks for different purposes You can define shared symbols for inputs outputs counters timers bit memory and blocks The following addresses are permitted e I O signals process image IQ e Peripheral inputs outputs PI PQ e Bit memory M e Timers counters T C e Logic blocks FB FC SFB SFC OB e Data blocks DB e User defined data types UDT e Variable tables VAT You can use local or block specific symbols for block parameters input output and in out parameters for static or temporary data of a block Shared symbols are defined in the symbol table Local symbols are defined in the variable declaration of a block when entering the program The emphasis in this chapter is on defining shared symbols Creating local or block specific symbols is described in the context of the programming language in the manuals for the various language packages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Assigning Symbols 6 2 Symbol Table Structure An empty symbol
253. ls which are used by all blocks in your program These symbols are assigned in the symbol table Symbols which are used only within a particular block block specific symbols These symbols are created in the variable declaration for the block in which they are used You will find more information on configuring the hardware and assigning parameters to modules in Chapter 7 For which parameters you can assign refer to the online help or the relevant manuals for the hardware Set the communication requirements for your project e No communication e Global data communication more than one CPU Communication via function blocks more than one CPU If your automation task only uses one CPU you do not need to consider the topic of communication If you want to exchange data between the CPUs in your project you must create a global data table In this table you assign addresses to the global data which are to be sent or received by the CPUs In order that the CPUs can exchange global data all programs must be located in one project In a network connections can easily be defined and assigned parameters and be used when programming with communication function blocks Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 1 5 Product Overview Where to Find More Information No specific sequence has to be observed when programming However there are some basic tasks which are pe
254. m restart in MS DOS Ctrl Alt Del is not possible Refer to the M7 SYS Product Information for the configurations that have been approved for use Hardware configurations with PROFIBUS DP are supported only with the following operating systems e M7 RMOS32 with at least 8 Mbytes main memory e M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS Windows and 16 Mbytes main memory Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems Additional M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows can only be used on M7 modules that are Hardware equipped with the following additional hardware e Hard disk via the expansion modules MSM378 or MSM478 e VGA monitor and keyboard via the interface submodule IF962 VGA M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS can only be used on M7 modules which are equipped with the following additional hardware e VGA monitor and keyboard via the interface submodule IF962 VGA Mass Memory M7 CPUs and M7 application modules have the following types of mass memory available see Table 18 5 e Memory cards e Hard disk and floppy disk All programmable M7 modules can be equipped with a hard disk and a 3 5 floppy disk drive as an option by means of the MSM expansion modules You can access the floppy disk drive and the memory card both on the PC programming device and on the M7 programmable control system e On board silicon disk OSD This type of mass memory behaves like a hard disk drive on which ap
255. m to create individual blocks 1 Select the Source Files container to which you want to import the source file 2 Select the menu command Insert gt External Source File 3 Enter the source file name in the dialog box that appears The blocks created when the imported source file is compiled are stored in the Blocks container Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 5 8 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects 5 5 Creating Software without Configured Hardware 7 M7 Program You can create containers for S7 M7 programs independent of a special without hardware configuration directly beneath the project and link them to a Configured specific hardware component later once you have completed your hardware Hardware configuration Inserting a To insert an S7 M7 program independent of the hardware configuration Program follow the steps outlined below independent or ine 1 Select the project icon in the project window Hardware 2 Select the menu command Insert gt Program gt S7 Program or Insert gt Program gt M7 Program The S7 or M7 program is created beneath a project Project fsz S7 Program not linked to hardware f smao 300 Station pj Programmable module n s7 S7 Program linked Figure 5 2 Linked and Unlinked S7 Programs in the Project Window Within this container you can now create the software as describe in Section 5 4 Linking a
256. m you of this Note Read the notes on compatibility in the M7 SYS Product Information To update the firmware of an M7 300 M7 400 CPU or function module you will require a boot medium floppy disk or memory card The update must be performed within the context of a project which contains the M7 stations CPUs or FMs with a selected M7 Program Caution Hardware damage Do not switch off the line power during the update otherwise the module may be damaged Data loss Following a firmware update you must call the BIOS Setup see Section 12 4 in the 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Reference Manual 101 and Chapter 10 in the M7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Manual If you want to work with the default values you should save them If you changed any settings in the BIOS Setup before the update these will have been lost and must be entered again Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Managing M7 PLC Systems Install Op System Update Firmware V02 00 08 Figure 19 2 Update Firmware Tab Versions Operating System Version in Programming Device list box Select the version of the operating system here that you want to install or already have installed on your M7 programmable control system This step is only necessary if you have a number of versions of the
257. mable module that can be a partner in a communication connection has its own connection table In the list boxes in the upper part of the connection table screen select the station and the module for which you want to create a connection table this module is then known also as the local node or local partner Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 3 Establishing Communication Connections 10 2 Creating a Connection Overview Creating New Connections Connection Partner Unspecified Connection Partner Connection Type 10 4 The connection table contains all the connections which originate from one module The table itself cannot be edited This section explains how you create a new connection Using the same method you can also modify an existing connection Requirement you must have opened the connection table To create a new connection follow the steps outlined below e Double click an empty row in the connection table or e Select the menu command Insert gt Connection Result The following dialog box appears on the screen New Connection m Connection Partner Station SIMATIC 400 Siation gt minal Module CPU414 2DP 2 m Connection Type S7 Connection Show Properties Dialog Box OK Add Figure 10 3 Cancel Help Dialog Box for Creating a Connection Select the station and the programmable module to whic
258. ment Procedure 19 10 When shipped there is no executable operating system installed on the M7 programmable control system and no MPI connections are possible To install M7 RMOS32 on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system you will require the following e A mass storage module MSM 378 478 in your M7 programmable control system e A boot medium 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or memory card gt 2 Mbytes To install M7 RMOS32 on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system follow the steps outlined below 1 In your project select the M7 program linked to the M7 CPU FM 2 Start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 3 Open the Install Operating System tab 4 Make the following selections Medium MPI RFS Possible Configuration M7 RMOS32 Local Drive only on programming devices PCs with Windows 95 the first free drive for example F Partner Drive C for hard disk 5 Click the Install button Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems The dialog boxes then display messages about the current processes and tell you how to proceed You must perform the following steps 6 Select a boot medium floppy disk or memory card Result A minimum M7 RMOS32 operating system is installed on the selected boot medium Insert the boot medium in the drive on the M7
259. mmable controller Figure 7 1 Procedure for Configuring and Assigning Parameters Before you enter a new configuration you must do the following e Create a project e Create the object you want to configure a station in the project e Select this station You can find more information on creating a project in Section 5 1 To open the application for configuring a station follow the steps outlined below 1 In the project window in the SIMATIC Manager select the Station object 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Open Object Alternatively Double click on the Hardware object The hardware configuration HWConfig application appears on the screen Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 3 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 2 Basic Operation Main Features of the User Interface Basic Operations Placing a Hardware Component ina Station Window Configuring a programmable controller involves the use of two windows e The station window in which you place the racks for the station structure e The Hardware Catalog window from which you select the required hardware components for example racks modules and interface submodules If the Hardware Catalog window is not displayed select the menu command View gt Catalog This command toggles the display of the Hardware Catalog on and off Independent of which st
260. mming SIMATIC S7 300 S7 400 and M7 300 M7 400 programmable logic controllers PLCs and SIMATIC C7 automation computers A C7 programmable controller behaves in the same way as a SIMATIC S7 300 as regards programming and configuring STEP 7 comprises the standard software and optional software packages which run under Windows 95 or Windows NT The STEP 7 standard software supports you in all phases of the creation process of an automation task such as Setting up and managing projects Configuring and assigning parameters to hardware and communications Managing symbols Creating programs for S7 programmable logic controllers An optional software package is available for creating programs for M7 programmable control systems Downloading programs to programmable logic controllers Testing the automation system Diagnosing plant failures The STEP 7 software user interface has been designed to meet the latest state of the art ergonomics and makes it easy for you to get started Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Product Overview Language Representations in the Standard Software Optional Languages for SIMATIC S7 The STEP 7 programming language representations Ladder Logic Statement List and Function Block Diagram for S7 300 S7 400 are an integral part of the standard software Ladder Logic or LAD is a graphic representation of the STEP 7 programming language Its syntax for t
261. module must have its own unique MPI address assigned Using multiple instances the instance data block can handle the data for a number of function blocks in a call hierarchy Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 7 Glossary Multipoint Interface MPI N Network Node Address O On Board Silicon Disk OSD Online Offline Operating Mode Operating State Operating System Glossary 8 The multipoint interface is the programming device interface in SIMATIC S7 M7 It allows a number of programming devices text display operator interfaces and operator panels to be accessed from one or more CPUs The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each other A network is a number of nodes linked together by connecting cables for the purpose of communication The node address is the postal address of a device for example programming device or a programmable module for example CPU when these devices communicate in a network such as MPI PROFIBUS An OSD On board Silicon Disk is a special retentive work memory which does not lose its contents even if the power supply fails The OSD is integrated directly in the M7 CPU When online a data link between the programming device and the programmable logic controller exists when offline no connection exists The operating mode for the CPU can be selected using the mode selector The following operating modes
262. n CD only TeleService for S7 C7 and M7 Remote Maintenance for Automation Systems CD only PLC Simulation for S7 300 and S7 400 CD only Reference Manual Standard Software for S7 300 and S7 400 STEP 7 Standard Functions Part 2 CD only Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary A Absolute Address An absolute address includes the address identifier and the physical memory location where the address is stored Examples Input I 12 1 Memory Word MW25 Data Block DB3 Absolute With absolute addressing the memory location of the address to be processed Addressing is given Example The address Q 4 0 describes bit 0 in byte 4 of the process image output area Address An address is part of a STEP 7 statement and specifies what the processor should execute the instruction on Addresses can be absolute or symbolic Assigning Assigning parameters means setting the behavior of a module Parameters B Backup In SIMATIC S7 information stored in the RAM areas in the work memory can be e Saved by means of a backup battery in this case the contents of the work memory and the read write memory area of the load memory are retained as are counters timers and the bit memory the area can have parameters assigned e Saved without a backup battery less maintenance in this case a maximum CPU specific number of data from the work memory the read write memory area of the load memo
263. n MPI interface The configuration table online in the Diagnosing Hardware window contains an overview of the structure of a station on the level of racks and DP distributed I O stations with their modules A graphic symbol beside each module provides information on its current status Starting from the online project view in the SIMATIC Manager follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the relevant station 2 Then open the Hardware object in the station with a double click or the menu command Edit gt Open Object Starting from the Accessible Nodes window follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a node 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Diagnose Hardware In both cases the window with the configuration table is displayed If a module has a fault a red mark is shown beside the module symbol This mark also appears in the online view of the SIMATIC Manager if a module displayed has a fault To update the display in the configuration table the corresponding window must be active Then press F5 or select the menu command View gt Update in the window If the configuration table is already open offline in the HWConfig window you can also get an online view of the configuration table using the menu command Station gt Open Online To display the Module Information dialog box follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a module in the configuration table 2 Select the menu command
264. n is established between the PC programming device and the M7 system Then M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows and any applications are installed on the hard disk of the M7 300 M7 400 via the MPI connection To download your application to the M7 programmable control system open the Programs tab and follow the procedure described under Downloading M7 Programs via MPI RFS on page 19 25 Start the M7 programmable control system again using the mode selector and adjust the BIOS Setup if required Result The M7 system boots with the new operating system from the hard disk Your application is started if it exists To start Windows automatically when the system boots from the hard disk edit the AUTOEXEC BAT file as follows 1 2 Change the entry remap bat to call remap bat Enter the call win in the last line Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 15 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 7 Reinstalling the M7 Operating System Starting Point Procedure for Reinstalling on Hard Disk 19 16 If an operating system already exists on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system you can run a reinstallation via MPI RFS which means changing expanding or upgrading the operating system on your M7 programmable control system Table 19 4 shows you what to do in each case when reinstalling on the hard disk The procedure is the same as the procedure
265. n the Programming Device list box select the version of the operating system that you want to update 5 Click the Data Medium for Updating Create button Follow the instructions for creating more data media Result A set of data media is created The process is completed with a corresponding message To update the operating system follow the steps outlined below 1 Insert the first data medium in the exchanged M7 module and boot it If you boot the M7 module from this data medium the operating system on the hard disk is updated automatically Follow the prompt via LED to insert the other data media The update is completed when the following LEDs are lit continuously The USR LED on the M7 300 CPU FM The USRI LED on the M7 400 CPU FM 2 Remove the data medium from the M7 programmable control system and boot it from the hard disk Note The data media created do not contain a complete operating system They cannot be used for normal operation of the SIMATIC M7 but only for updating the operating system on the hard disk Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Updating the Operating System on Memory Card In Case of Error When you exchange modules whose operating system was installed on memory card you must run a reinstallation see Section 19 7 In case of error the following LEDs indicate faults LED M
266. n the work and load memory are moved so that the gaps are closed up creating one large area of free memory space Compressing is only possible if it is supported by the respective type of module Only if you compress the memory in STOP mode are all the gaps closed up In RUN mode the blocks currently being processed are not moved so that some gaps may remain even after compressing Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 17 Diagnosing Hardware 17 12 Displaying Scan Cycle Times Scan Cycle Time Tab Uses Setting the Scan Cycle Time 17 18 In the Scan Cycle Time tabbed page the following information is displayed for the CPU or M7 FM 356 FM 456 Module Information x Path project station CPU CPU Operating Mode STOP Status Module Operating Mode General Diagnostic Buffer Memory Scan Cycle Time Time System Perf Data Communication Stacks 20 ms 100 ms Configured Minimum Scan Cycle Time Configured Maximum Scan Cycle Time Shortest Cycle Time 30 ms a Current Cycle Time 55ms Longest Cycle Time 71ms v Update Print Help Figure 17 6 Scan Cycle Time Tab This property sheet provides you with information about the scan cycle times for the user program If the duration of the longest cycle time is close to the configured maximum scan cycle time there is a danger that fluctuations in the
267. nd The CPUs participating in multicomputing share a common address area Interrupts module by module The address area of a module is always assigned exclusively to one CPU The same characteristic also applies to interrupt assignments hardware and diagnostic interrupts for a module are always directed at one CPU only Target CPU for Interrupt parameter in the Inputs or Outputs tab of configurable modules Setting Multicomputing operation results implicitly when you insert a second third Multicomputing or fourth CPU with multicomputing capability in a rack which is suitable for Operation this purpose for example the rack UR1 You can see whether a CPU has multicomputing capabilities in the information text at the bottom of the Hardware Catalog window which appears for each module you select Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 7 18 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Procedure Display CPU Assignment Change CPU Assignment Downloading to a Module Uploading to the Programming Device The following section tells you what to look out for when configuring a station for multicomputing 1 Insert all the CPUs required for multicomputing 2 Double click on each of the CPUs and set the CPU number in the Multicomputing tab when you insert the CPUs the CPU numbers are assigned automatically in ascending order 3 For all modu
268. nd View gt Online to open a window with the online view of the project 2 Select the menu command Window gt Arrange to arrange the two windows next to each other on the screen 3 Open the S7 or M7 program in the online view window It contains a Blocks container Result The correct programmable controller address is selected automatically and the blocks on the programmable controller are displayed 4 In the offline window select the objects you want to download to the programmable controller 5 Drag the selected objects to the Blocks container in the online window and drop them there Starting from the offline project window following the steps outlined below 1 Use the menu command View gt Online to open a window with the online view of the project 2 Select the menu command Window gt Arrange to arrange the two windows next to each other on the screen 3 Open the S7 or M7 program in the online view window It contains a Blocks container 4 Open the Blocks container Result The Define Node Address dialog box appears Now select a node address in the list beside the input field The list contains all the available addresses Once you have selected an address the blocks on the programmable controller with the selected address are displayed 5 In the offline window select the objects you want to download to the programmable controller 6 Drag the selected objects to the B
269. nd elements of data blocks DB You can access shared data either absolutely or symbolically The SIMATIC Manager is the graphical user interface for SIMATIC users under Windows 95 A source file text file is part of a program which is created with a graphic or text oriented editor and is compiled into an executable S7 user program or the machine code for M7 The CPU goes through the STARTUP state during the transition from the STOP mode to the RUN mode It can be set using the mode selector on the CPU following power on or by an operation on the programming device There is a distinction between the STARTUP types restart and complete restart In S7 300 a complete restart is executed In S7 400 either a restart or a complete restart is executed depending on the position of the reset switch In M7 300 M7 400 a complete restart is executed A statement is the smallest independent part of a user program created in a textual language It represents a command for the processor Statement List is a textual representation of the STEP 7 programming language similar to machine code Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 11 Glossary Station Station Configuration STOP Subnet Symbol Symbol Table Symbolic Addressing Syntax Check System Data Glossary 12 In network communications a station is a device which can be connected as a complete unit to one or more sub
270. nd slaves must not be occupied by I O modules You cannot configure an intelligent DP slave simultaneously as a DP master meaning that a CPU 315 2 DP configured as a DP slave cannot be a DP master for other DP slaves at the same time Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 15 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Basic Procedure Two steps are required to integrate an intelligent DP slave into a DP master system Configuring the intelligent DP slave configuring a station as a DP slave i Inserting the intelligent DP slave configured station in a DP master system Configuring the To configure the CPU 315 2 DP as an intelligent DP slave and insert it in a CPU 315 2 DP as a DP master system follow the steps outlined below DP Slave 1 Configure a station with the CPU 315 2 DP as a DP slave Double click on row 2 1 interface in the configuration table Activate the check box Use Controller as Slave in the Slave Configuration tab 2 Configure a DP master CPU with integrated PROFIBUS DP interface or communications processor with PROFIBUS DP interface in another station 3 Drag the CPU 315 2 DP from the Hardware Catalog window container for already configured stations and drop it on the symbol for the DP master system EET 4 Double click on the first row of the DP slave the name of the DP sl
271. ndard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 2 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling 2 3 Guidelines for Handling Authorizations ZN When to Remove an Authorization Backup Optimizing Your Hard Disk Defective Sectors Write Protection Copy Protection Caution Read the notes in this chapter and in the README TXT file on the authorization disk If you do not adhere to these guidelines the authorization may be irretrievably lost Before you format compress or restore your hard disk drive or before installing a new operating system you must remove any existing authorizations If a backup copy of your hard disk contains copies of authorizations there is a danger that these copies may overwrite the valid installed authorizations when you restore your backup data to the hard disk thereby destroying them To prevent a valid authorization being overwritten by a backup copy you must do one of the following e Remove all authorizations before you make a backup copy e Exclude the authorizations from the backup If you use an optimizing program which offers the possibility of moving fixed blocks of data only use this option once you have transferred all authorizations from the hard disk back to the authorization disk When you install an authorization a special cluster appears on the destination drive which is sometimes marked as defective Do not attempt to restore this cluster as yo
272. nets such as programmable logic controller programming device operator station The configuration data and parameters for a station are stored in system data blocks SDB The following events switch the CPU into STOP mode e Moving the mode selector to the STOP position e An internal error in the CPU e An operation on the programming device All modules are switched to a safe state In S7 In STOP the user program is not processed Certain programming functions and operator interface functions are also possible In M7 In STOP user programs can continue to be processed A subnet comprises all nodes in a network which are connected without gateways A subnet can contain repeaters A symbol is a name defined by the user taking syntax rules into consideration This name can be used in programming and in operating and monitoring once you have defined it for example as a variable a data type a jump label or a block Example Address I 5 0 Data Type BOOL Symbol Emer_Off_Switch A table used to assign symbols or symbolic names to addresses for shared data and blocks Examples Emer_Off Symbol I 1 7 Address Controller Symbol SFB24 Block Using symbolic addressing the address to be processed is entered as a symbol and not as an address The assignment of a symbol to an address is made in the symbol table In incremental input mode for STEP 7 programs a syntax check is run after each line has been completed
273. nfigurations Table 19 2 Possible Mass Storage for M7 Operating Systems Operating System Mass Storage Hard Disk Memory Card OSD M7 RMOS32 Yes Yes M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS Yes M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows Refer to the M7 SYS Product Information for details on which operating system configurations on which mass storage types have been approved for use Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Selecting the Installation Medium In the Medium selection box the following installation media are available for you to choose from 1 MPI RES Select MPI RFS RFS Remote File System if the operating system is to be installed on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system To be able to use this installation medium an MPI connection must exist between the programming device and the programmable control system In general the operating system is installed on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system via MPI RFS For less extensive operating system configurations for example M7 RMOS32 alone a memory card will be adequate For installation via MPI RFS you will always require a boot medium see page 19 6 Memory Card Select Memory Card if the operating system is to be installed on the memory card The operating system and the applications are transferred from the programming device to the memor
274. nfigured depends on the communications resources of the module used STEP 7 monitors the limits of the module and displays a message if the module s resources have been exhausted When you confirm and exit the New Connection dialog box the partner and the connection type appear in the connection table STEP 7 also assigns two IDs connection IDs for the configured connection making it uniquely identifiable The module from which the connection originates the local partner or node receives a local ID the module to which the connection links up is given a partner ID The connection IDs are specified as hexadecimal numbers You will need the local ID and the partner ID for programming the communication blocks You will find a sample program for exchanging data via SFBs in 234 When you create a connection in the connection table you must note the following You only enter the connection once in the connection table for the local node only e If STEP 7 only enters a Local ID for the connection in the connection table special cases are explained in the online help e If STEP 7 enters both a Local ID and a Partner ID for the connection in the connection table STEP 7 automatically enters the connection in the connection table of the connection partner Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections 10 3 Properties of S7 Connections
275. nfirm your selection with OK Then configure the DP identifiers and addresses for input output areas for the DP slave in the configuration table which appears To do this drag the Universal Module from the Hardware Catalog window container for already configured stations to the configuration table and then double click on the corresponding row Note Data exchange between a preprocessing CPU and a CP 342 5 DP within the DP slave is described in 501 NCM S7 for PROFIBUS manual package particularly in Volume 1 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 17 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 9 Example 7 Configuring Multicomputing Operation What Is Multicomputing is the synchronous operation of several 2 to 4 CPUs ina Multicomputing suitable S7 400 central rack Synchronous Synchronous operation means that the CPUs participating in multicomputing Operation are functioning as one CPU with regard to their operating modes and transitions The CPUs start up together for example provided you set the same startup mode restart or complete restart everywhere and they go into STOP mode at the same time Synchronous operation does not mean that the same user program must be executing in every CPU The user program in each CPU executes independent of the programs in the other CPUs This means control tasks can be run in parallel Address Areas a
276. ng 12 19 13 8 Configuration table master system 7 13 opening Configuring central structure 7 6 global data communication modules network Configuring CPU messages procedure 12 24 Configuring messages Connection configured dynamic creating 10 8 point to point 7 10 9 Connection ID 10 8 Connection partner Connection table downloading Connection to CPU establishing 16 7 Connection type 10 4 Connections other stations PG PC SIMATIC S5 stations 10 15 to partners in other projects Consistency check 7 23 Content diagnostic buffer 17 12 Index 2 Context sensitive help 3 5 Copy protection CP 342 5 DP 7 17 CPU 315 2 DP CPU data CPU identification data 17 20 CPU messages archive configuring 12 displaying 12 M7 300 M7 400 19 29 CPU performance data Creating anena cr connection S7 and M7 programs 1 4 5 6 cso g network configurations procedure 8 10 Creating programs general procedure 1 4 ra 6 Cross reference list 14 Cyclic buffer diagnostics 17 11 D Data block DB See Data block DDB file 7 14 17 15 Debugging user program 16 2 Deleting blocks on the CPU Device database file 7 14 Diagnosing hardware See System diagnostics Diagnostic buffer content 17 11 17 12 organization Diagnostic event Diagnostics See System diagnostics Diagnostics symbols 17 4 Dialog boxes 3 4 ta
277. nging the remaining memory card content If you are using a suitable programming device PG 720 PG 740 PG 760 or external prommer and you want to use this function select the installation of the flash file system During installation a dialog box is displayed where you assign parameters to the programming device PC interface Refer to Section 2 5 on page 2 10 If the installation was successful a message appears on the screen to tell you this If any changes were made to DOS files during the installation you are prompted to restart Windows When you have done this you can start the basic STEP 7 application the SIMATIC Manager You can also choose to start the SIMATIC Manager straight from the final installation dialog The following errors may cause the installation to fail e If an initialization error occurs immediately after starting Setup the program was probably not started under Windows e Not enough memory you need to have at least 100 Mbytes of free space on your hard disk for the standard software regardless of the scope of your installation e Bad disk verify that the disk is bad then call your local Siemens representative e Operator error start the installation again and read the instructions carefully Once the installation has been completed successfully a program group is created for STEP 7 Use the usual Windows procedure to uninstall STEP 7 1 Start the dialog box for installing software under
278. ns to one program If no data are to be transferred for an operator station click on the check box in front of the respective operator station to deactivate it In page 3 5 click the Connection button to specify which network connection is to be used for communication between the operator station and the programmable controller In the Select Network Connection dialog box which appears all configured network connections are listed Select the required connection and exit the dialog box with OK Click the Continue button and open page 4 5 Select the required transfer options here These are described in more detail at the start of this section and in the online help for the Mapper 10 Click the Continue button and open page 5 5 The transfer options you selected are displayed here again 11 Check the settings displayed and correct them if necessary by going back and selecting the option again When you are sure that your settings are correct click the Transfer button to start the transfer 12 Click the OK button and confirm with Yes the prompt that any data in the programmable controller should be overwritten The data transfer is started and the Transfer dialog box shows the currently active operation and the progress of the transfer You can stop the transfer at any time by clicking the Cancel button If you selected the Transfer Log option on page 4
279. nt dialog situation from every window You can call the online help in one of the following ways e Select a menu command in the Help menu in the menu bar e Click on the Help button in a dialog box You are then shown help on this dialog box e Position the cursor in a window or dialog box on the topic you need help with and press the F1 key or select the menu command Help gt Context Sensitive Help e Use the question mark cursor in Windows The last three of these ways of accessing the online help are known as context sensitive help A quick help on buttons in the toolbar is displayed when you position the cursor on a button and leave it there for a moment Using the menu command Options gt Font in the help window you can set the font size to Small Normal or Large Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 3 5 User Interface 3 5 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout Overview What Is Saved Saving the Window Layout Restoring the Window Layout Note on Object Hierarchy 3 6 The STEP 7 applications have a feature which enables you to save the current window arrangement and restore it at a later stage When you save the window layout the following information is recorded e Position of the main window e Opened projects and libraries and their respective window positions e Order of any cascaded windows To save the current window arrangeme
280. nt select the menu command Window gt Save Settings To restore the saved window arrangement select the menu command Window gt Restore Settings When you restore a window only the part of the hierarchy containing the object that was selected when the window arrangement was saved is displayed in detail Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 User Interface 3 6 Using Teleservice Overview Requirements Calling the Function Note The optional software package for Teleservice allows you to establish an online connection from a programming device or PC to a remote plant via the telephone network You can then process this remote plant as usual with STEP 7 Owing to the longer reaction times it is recommended that this type of operation only be used for service purposes The requirements for Teleservice operation are as follows e The Teleservice optional software package must be installed e The remote plant must be connected to a telephone network via a correctly set TS adapter and a modem In STEP 7 you must specify the parameters for Teleservice under Setting the PG PC Interface e A local modem must be installed via Windows 95 NT and its properties must be fully set up If the optional software is installed you can start the Teleservice function using the menu command Options gt TeleService You will find further information in the documentation and in the
281. nual Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to ground and to tag circuits equipment and sys tems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Correct Usage Note the following Warning ZN This device and its components may only be used forthe applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Trademarks SIMATIC SIMATIC NET and SIMATIC HMI are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners Copyright Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grantor registration of a utility model or design are reserved Siemens AG Automation Group Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848 D 90327 Nurnberg Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee
282. nual C79000 G7076 C552 01 vii Preface Conventions Additional Assistance Current Information viii As a first time user you should use this manual in the following manner 1 Read the first three chapters before you start to use the software to make yourself familiar with the terminology and the principles of how the system works 2 Use each of the remaining chapters in the manual as you come to a particular step in a programming session such as creating the symbol table If you have already created a small project and gained experience doing this you can read each chapter separately as you require information on the topic it deals with References to other manuals are shown using the part number of the literature between slashes Using these numbers you can find out the exact title of the manual from the literature list at the end of this manual If you have any questions regarding the software described in this manual and cannot find an answer here or in the online help please contact the Siemens representative in your area You will find a list of addresses in the Appendix of 70 or 100 or in catalogs and in Compuserve go autforum You can also speak to our Hotline under the following phone or fax number Tel 49 911 895 7000 Fax 7001 If you have any questions or comments on this manual please fill out the remarks form at the end of the manual and return it to the address shown on the
283. o modules that are not yet included in the Hardware Catalog window but you should note that the parameter assignment rules for STEP 7 are not checked Displaying Module You can display the current status of modules in a configured station Status System Requirement A connection must exist between the programmable controller Diagnostics and the programming device 1 Select the menu command Station gt Open Online The Diagnosing Hardware window is opened with the station configuration as it was determined from the modules for example CPU The status of the modules is indicated by means of symbols Refer to the online help for the meanings of the various symbols If modules are faulty or if configured modules are missing these are listed in a separate dialog box Faulty Modules From this dialog box you can navigate immediately to one of the displayed modules for example Go To button or display the module status Properties button 2 Outside the Faulty Modules dialog box Double click the symbol for the module whose status you want to display A dialog box with tabs depending on the type of module gives you a detailed analysis of the module status 3 Once you have closed the Faulty Modules dialog box select the menu command PLC gt Faulty Modules to be able to analyze the status of additional faulty modules Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79
284. o or more modules in your actual structure with the same node address you can change the node address for a programmable module CPU or FM by following the steps outlined below 1 Switch the module to STOP and connect your programming device to the interface on the programmable module via a connecting cable 2 Open your project in the SIMATIC Manager 3 Open the configuration table for the required station 4 Double click in the row containing the module The dialog box containing tabs for assigning parameters to the module appears 5 Click the button for the required subnet in the General tab The network connection properties dialog box appears 6 In the dialog select the new node address confirm your entry close the configuration table and save the hardware configuration 7 Download the configuration to the programmable controller using the menu command PLC gt Download Note Before you download the configuration to the connected module you must specify the MPI address for the programmable controller Note that when changing the MPI address you should enter the old MPI address here because this is still the valid node address at this point Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 15 Configuring Networks Requirement for Downloading via the Network Checking Consistency in NETPRO Downloading the Configuration to the Programmable Controller via the
285. o the configuration You will find the exact procedure described in the online help Open the connection table see Section 10 1 Create a new connection using the menu command Insert gt Connection see Section 10 2 Select the Other Station you created the PG PC or the SIMATIC S5 station as the connection partner Specify the connection type and confirm your entries Select the row for the connection in the connection table and select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Establishing Communication Connections Additional Procedure for PG PC with SAPI Partner 9 In the dialog box specify the object properties for the connection For S7 connections to a programming device PC with an SAPI S7 programming interface You must make a number of settings in the Address Details dialog box including entering the name of the connection and the virtual field device name of the programming device PC You will find more information on filling out the dialog box in the online help When you have created an S7 connection to a programming device PC with an SAPI S7 programming interface you must generate the local database LDB This means you save the connection data for the S7 connection in a binary or ASCII format in a file You then load the file into the programming device PC You generate the local database in
286. oading User Programs 15 4 Downloading User Programs from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller Uses Function Requirements Procedure During for example the final phase of the program test or to run the finished user program you will want to download a complete user program to the programmable controller You can do this in the SIMATIC Manager Note You can download user programs to a CPU in both the STOP and RUN P modes However when downloading in the RUN P mode remember that the program is transferred block by block If you overwrite an old user program by downloading a new one conflicts may occur The complete user program is downloaded to the load memory the parts relevant to program execution are also loaded into the work memory Figure 15 2 illustrates downloading programs to a CPU CPU PG Load Memory Work Memory EPROM RAM Download the complete Parts of the program to program the CPU a RAM relevant to program execution Figure 15 2 Downloading a User Program from the Programming Device to a CPU The following requirements must be fulfilled for downloading There must be a connection between your programming device and programmable controller The program you are downloading has been compiled without errors To download a program to the CPU select the Blocks container you want to download in
287. odule Information Path project station CPU CPU Operating Mode STOP Status Module Operating Mode General Diagnostic Butter Memory Scan Cycle Time Time System Perf Data Communication Stacks Events 0O Display All Entries may affect the scan cycle time No Time Date Event 1 09 15 22 842 11 12 95 P ower on retentive 18 00 22 378 08 12 95 STOP due to power supply failure 44 8 o Q Jro E 08 peco L 08 22 44 215 08 11 95 FC notloaded 4 5 08 22 44 212 08 11 95 Mode transition from STARTUP to RUN 6 08 22 44 212 08 11 95 Manual complete restart request 0B100 7 08 22 44 197 08 11 95 Mode transition from STOP to STARTUP 8 08 22 38 842 08 11 95 P ower on retentive v Details on Event 3 of 100 Event ID 16 4562 STOP because programming error OB not loaded Previous operating mode RUN requested operating mode STOP internal Priority class OB number responsible 1 1 FC REF Block number 4 Save As Open Block Help on Event Update Print Help Figure 17 4 Diagnostic Buffer Tab The upper list box contains a list of all the diagnostic events that occurred with the following information e Serial number of the entry the newest entry has the number 1 e Time and date of the diagnostic event The time and date of the module are displayed if the module has an integrated clock For the time data in the buffer to be valid it is important that you set the tim
288. ogram in your system Its use within STEP 7 is described in Section 20 2 e All the data for the project without exception must be in the project directory or a subdirectory of the project When working with the C development environment it is possible to store data in other locations but these data would then not be included in the archive file e The file names must fulfil the DOS name conventions eight characters for the name plus three characters for the extension because the archive programs are generally DOS programs Note While archiving and retrieving with DOS archive programs pkzip arj lha a DOS window is open You can only continue working in the SIMATIC Manager again once it is closed In the properties for the archive program you can set whether you want the DOS window to be closed automatically when archiving retrieving is finished To do this select the archive program for example in the Windows 95 Explorer and select the menu command File gt Properties Then select the Program tab in the dialog box Activate the Close on Exit option and click OK Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 20 2 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Archiving 20 2 Archiving Projects and Libraries Setting the Preferred Archive Program Setting the Search Path for Archive Programs Setting Target Directories To set an archive program follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager
289. ogramming languages C and C to be integrated into the STEP 7 development environment e CFC see under Optional Languages for SIMATIC S7 e Borland C contains the Borland development environment Notes on Optional You can add to the functionality of the Standard package by means of the Packages following optional packages e Teleservice This optional package allows you to operate a plant via the telephone network e DOCPRO With this package you can organize all the configuration data you create with STEP 7 into wiring manuals These make it easy to manage the configuration data and allow the information to be prepared for printing according to specific standards e Simulation You can use this optional package to simulate S7 programmable controllers connected to the programming device or PC for purposes of testing e Programming languages In addition to the STEP 7 programming languages included with the Standard software package Ladder Logic Statement List and Function Block Diagram the programming languages Graph 7 HiGraph SCL and CFC are available as options e S7 PDIAG This software package allows standardized configuration of process diagnostics for SIMATIC S7 300 S7 400 Using process diagnostics you can detect faults and faulty states outside the programmable controller for example limit switch not reached Where to Find The tables on the following pages show the basic tasks which are required in
290. olbar Uses You are shown an overview of all the absolute addresses which are used in the user program but for which no symbol has been defined in the symbol table Structure of the Each row displayed in the window corresponds to an entry in the list The List of Addresses entry contains the columns Address and Number of uses The meaning of without Symbols each of the column entries is explained in Table 14 6 Table 14 6 Columns in the List of Addresses without Symbols Column Content Meaning Address Absolute address Number Number of times the address is used in the user program Sorting The list is sorted according to address Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 13 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Downloading and Uploading User Programs Overview Chapter Overview Once you have configured your system assigned parameters and created the program you can download complete user programs or individual blocks to the programmable controller To download the system data created when the hardware was configured the networks configured and the connection table created to the programmable controller you download the object System Data You can select the above mentioned objects in the project window and download them from the SIMATIC Manager PLC menu In the menu bar of the window in which you are editing
291. olic name the address and the data type Being able to store non unique symbols in the symbol table means you can copy entries in the symbol table This means you can interrupt your work on the symbol table at any time save the interim result and complete your work another time Non unique symbols occur when you insert a symbol in the symbol table whose e Symbolic name and or e Address was already used in another symbol row This means both the new symbol and the existing symbol are non unique This happens for example when you copy and paste a symbol in order to change the details in the copy slightly In the symbol table non unique symbols are identified by highlighting them graphically bold type This change in their representation means they still require editing You can either display all symbols or filter the view so that only unique or non unique symbols are displayed A non unique symbol becomes unique when you change the component symbol and or address which caused it to be non unique If two symbols are non unique and you change one of them to make it unique the other one also becomes unique Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 6 5 Assigning Symbols 6 4 Working with the Symbol Table Symbols from Other Editors Opening the Symbol Table Inserting Symbols Sorting Symbols Filtering Symbols 6 6 You can also create the data for the symbol table
292. ommand PLC gt Module Information The Module Information dialog box is displayed Starting Point Starting from the Accessible Nodes window follow the steps outlined Accessible Nodes below 1 Select a node in the Accessible Nodes window 2 Select the menu command PLC gt Module Information The Module Information dialog box is displayed SIMATIC Manager Online Module Information Project s7 S7 Program gt ee Station ee L CPU 6ES7 x Call from SIMATIC Manager HWConfig Diagnosing Hardware Accessible Nodes We Ro Accessible Nodes B 1 T PS 307 5A MPI 2 2 A crus 3 hol Al 300 Call from Accessible Nodes Call from Configuration Tables see 17 2 Module Information Diagnosing Hardware Figure 17 1 17 2 Opening the Module Information and Diagnosing Hardware Dialog Boxes Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware 17 2 Displaying Module Information from Configuration Tables Overview Configuration Table Displaying the Configuration Table Online Updating the Configuration Table Note Displaying Module Information Using this method you can display the Module Information dialog box also for modules without their ow
293. on In the partner stations the complete connection tables are downloaded to the CPUs meaning connections may be downloaded which do not lead to the local station Downloading the connection tables to the local station and the partner stations is always useful because it saves time if you have changed the connection table for a CPU in the local station Using the menu command PLC gt Download gt Selected S7 Connections you can download selected S7 connections from the connection table of the local partner to the respective CPU in the local station This menu command is only to be used for connections of the type S7 connection You select the S7 connections you want to download by clicking the corresponding rows in the connection table To delete all connections of a CPU you have to download an empty connection table to the respective CPU You must be in the connection table view for this CPU when you start downloading for the Local Station or Local and Partner Stations Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Part 3 Working with S7 Programmable Controllers Creating User Programs Creating and Displaying Messages Cperator Control and Monitoring of Variables Displaying Reference Data Downloading and Uploading User Programs Debugging User Programs Diagnosing Hardware 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C7
294. on Working with Access Files To import and export data to and from the Microsoft Excel application use the DIF file format To import data from Excel follow the steps outlined below 1 W SUON CA Create a table in Excel with the four columns Symbol Address Data Type and Comment and fill out the table Open the Save As dialog box using the menu command File gt Save As In the dialog box select the file extension DIF Data Interchange Format Select the directory path and file name and close the dialog box Open the symbol table Open the dialog box using the menu command Table gt Import In the dialog box select the DIF file you just created and confirm the entry with Open To import and export data to and from the Microsoft Access application use the SDF file format In Access select the file format Text with delimiters Use the double inverted comma as the text delimiter Use the comma as the cell delimiter Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 6 9 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Part 2 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to the Hardware Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Configuring Networks Configuring Global Data Communication Establishing Communication Connections Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7
295. on bus for a fast exchange of data with the CPU Examples for function module applications are counting positioning closed loop control The connecting point between two subnets in a network A gateway can also be the connecting point between networks subnets with different characteristics for example between PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet Global data communication is a procedure with which global data are transferred between CPUs without communication function blocks CFBs The HOLD state is reached from the RUN mode via a request from the programming device Special test functions are possible in this mode Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 5 Glossary 1 0 Distributed DP Incremental Input Mode Instance Data Block Instruction Interrupt Ladder Logic LAD Library Load Memory Glossary 6 The distributed I O consists of analog and digital modules which are located at a physical distance from the central rack Characteristic of the distributed T O is the modular rack system whose aim it is to save connecting wires thereby saving costs by placing the I O modules close to the process In incremental input mode every line or every element of a block is checked immediately for errors such as syntax errors Any errors are displayed and must be corrected before you finish entering the block Programs entered with the programming languages Statement
296. onal Electrotechnical Commission s standard IEC 1131 3 or EN 61131 3 for programming languages used with programmable controllers You will find more details in the manuals on the various programming languages and in the standard compliance table in the NORM_TBL WRI file in STEP 7 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Preface Where Does this Manual Fit in with the Rest of the S7 Documentation There is a wide range of user documentation available to support you in configuring and programming an S7 programmable controller which is intended to be used selectively The following explanations should make it easier for you to use the user documentation gt This symbol indicates the order in which you should read the manuals particularly if you are a first time user of S7 Symbol Meaning This documentation introduces the methodology L Reference works which are only required selectively E The documentation is supported by an online help Primer S7 300 Programmable Controller Quick Start 30 Manuals on Manual S7 300 S7 400 Hardware Program System Software for S7 300 S7 400 ming Program Design Manual 234 pa Online Help y Standard Software for S7 User Standard Software for S7 and M7 _ Converter From S5 to S7 Manual STEP
297. online help for the optional software package Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 3 7 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation Overview Projects represent the sum of all data and programs within the scope of an automation task They are used to store the data and programs in an organized manner The data collected together in a project include the following e Configuration data on the hardware structure and parameters for modules e Configuration data for communication in networks e Programs for programmable modules The main tasks involved in creating a project are therefore preparing the above data and creating the programs STEP 7 does not require that the components of a project are edited in a particular order You can start with any of the tasks Notes for the The first part of this chapter describes the main components which make up a Reader project Use this chapter to get familiar with the most important of the objects in a STEP 7 project and the terminology used The second part of this chapter describes the basic operations with the objects in a project for example opening copying and renaming objects A number of sample projects are included with the STEP 7 software Chapter Overview Opening a Project Components for Configuring Hardware and Networks 4 3 Components for Creating Software 4 4 Obje
298. opening and editing projects which were created using STEP 7 version 1 or using other older STEP 7 versions in Appendix A When you create a new project you can specify in the New dialog box whether you want to create a project To be edited with the current version of STEP 7 or To be edited with an older STEP 7 version Projects created in older STEP 7 versions can be saved as projects in the format of and with the functions of the current STEP 7 version using the menu command File gt Save As and then be processed with the wider range of functions available to this version Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 3 Creating and Editing Projects 5 2 Inserting and Configuring Stations Overview Inserting a Station Configuring the Hardware 5 4 In a project the station represents the hardware structure of a programmable controller and contains the data for configuring and assigning parameters to individual modules New projects created with the New Project wizard already contain a station To create a new station in a project open the project so that the project window is displayed if not already displayed 1 Select the project 2 Create an object for the required hardware by using the menu command Insert gt Station In the submenu you can select one of the following e SIMATIC 300 station e SIMATIC 400 station e PC programming devi
299. opriate compiler is called to compile each block Using the menu command View gt Update you can refresh the view of the reference data already displayed in the active window To update the reference data each time you compile a block follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the menu command Options gt Customize in the LAD STL FBD window 2 Select the Create Block tab in the dialog box 3 Select the option Generate Reference Data and confirm your entry with OK The reference data are then generated automatically when a source file is compiled or a block created in incremental edit mode is saved To delete reference data you can also use the menu command Options gt Reference Data gt Delete in the SIMATIC Manager Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 3 Displaying Reference Data 14 3 Displaying Reference Data Overview Note Changing the Preset View Switching the View Note on Displaying Reference Data 14 4 The following possibilities are available for displaying reference data e Open a block in the Blocks container and select the menu command Options gt Reference Data in the window of the corresponding language editor A working window is opened in which the cross reference list is displayed default setting or e Select a Blocks container in the offline view of a project and then select the menu command Option
300. or exchanging data and for program management Examples for data exchange e SEND e RECEIVE e GET Examples for program management e Switching the CPU of the communication partner to STOP e Scanning the status of the CPUs of the communication partner This process creates an executable user program from a source file Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary Complete Restart Configuring Connection Table Consistent Data Control Command FREEZE Control Command SYNC Counter C Cross Reference List D Data Block DB In S7 When a CPU starts up for example when the mode selector is moved from STOP to RUN or when power is turned on before cyclic program processing starts OB 1 either the organization block OB101 restart only in the S7 400 or OB100 complete restart is processed first In a complete restart the process image input table is read in and the STEP 7 user program processed starting with the first statement in OB1 In M7 In a complete restart the process image input table is read in User programs continue to be processed and informed of the operating states STARTUP and RUN Configuring is the selection and putting together of the individual components of a programmable logic controller PLC and the installation of the required software for example the operating system on an M7 automation computer and adapting it to the specific task s
301. or S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 5 Opening and Editing the Network View with DP Slaves Displaying DP Slaves Arranging DP Slaves Requirement You must be in the network view of NETPRO If you want to display previously configured DP slaves or network DP slaves toggle the view to show the DP slaves in the network view using the menu command View gt DP Slaves If you select the menu command again the DP slaves are hidden again in the network view Requirements You must have assigned a DP master to a station when you configured the hardware in the configuration table You must be in the network view in NETPRO Arrange the DP slave in the network view as follows 1 In the network view select the DP master in a station to which you want to assign the DP slave 2 Click in the Catalog window on PROFIBUS DP 3 Click through the hierarchy until you reach the required DP slave Select the DP slave hold the mouse button pressed and drag the DP slave to the window for the graphic network view 4 In the properties dialog box which opens automatically assign a node address for the DP slave Result The DP slave appears in the network view together with its network connection DP slaves are represented in a similar way to a station NETPRO Configuring Networks Network
302. ors or parameters assignment errors are displayed here e Device specific diagnostic texts on the slave The diagnostic texts displayed are evaluated for a specific device on the basis of the device database DDB file If the diagnostic message is not stored in the device database file the diagnosis cannot be displayed in clear text Channel specific diagnostic texts for configured submodules of the DP standard slave are displayed here The exact channel triggering the message is displayed for each diagnostic message entered A channel is described uniquely by e The slot in the module and e The channel number Device specific diagnostic texts are evaluated on the basis of the device database file If the diagnostic message is not stored in the device database file the diagnosis cannot be displayed in clear text With the Hex Format button you can also output the whole diagnostic frame in hexadecimal format Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 15 Diagnosing Hardware 17 11 Displaying the User Memory Utilization Memory Tab In the Memory tabbed page you can display the utilization of the work memory and the load memory and the size of the largest contiguous free memory area for each CPU or M7 FM 356 FM 456 depending on the CPU The memory utilization is shown both as a percentage in a bar diagram and as an absolute value in a table A value shown grayed o
303. ort symbolic addressing Select the type of parameter assignment e Use the default parameters e Assign parameters appropriate for the process You will find more information on configuring the hardware and assigning parameters to modules in Chapter 7 For which parameters you can assign and for the default parameters refer to the online help or the relevant manuals for the hardware 1 6 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling Overview Chapter Overview The Setup program allows you to install the STEP 7 software aided by dialogs and menus You call the Setup program using the standard Windows 95 or Windows NT software installation procedure Newly shipped programming devices PGs have STEP 7 already installed This substantially reduces the time and effort needed to set up the device Section Description Requirements for Installation 2 2 Authorization and Rights of Usage Guidelines for Handling Authorizations 2 3 2 4 Installing and Uninstalling the STEP 7 Software 2 5 Setting the PG PC Interface Multi User Configuration in a Windows Network Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 2 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling 2 1 Requirements for Installation Operating System Basic Hardware Memory Capacity Multipoint Interface Optional External Prommer
304. ory Structure and Methods of Loading Type of Communication between PG and PLC PG PLC connection PG PLC connection PG PLC connection PG PLC connection Plug in EPROM Downloading complete user programs External loading of the EPROM and inserting the memory card Programs stored in the RAM are lost when you execute a memory reset on the CPU or remove the RAM memory card Programs on EEPROM memory cards are not lost following a memory reset and can be transported by removing and inserting the memory card Retentive Data To prevent data loss following power down or a memory reset you can set up retentive memory areas You will find more information in the chapter Memory Areas of the S7 CPUs in the Programming Manual for 7 300 and S7 400 234 and in the online help on assigning parameters to CPUs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 5 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 3 Resetting the CPU in a Programmable Controller Uses Before you download your user program you should reset the CPU to ensure that no old blocks are still on the CPU If you have performed a memory reset you can download a new user program from an EEPROM memory card to a CPU see Result below Procedure You can execute a memory reset on a CPU on line from the programming device using the menu command PLC gt Clear Reset To do this the CPU must be in ST
305. ost Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 19 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 10 Assigning Module Parameters Assigning Parameters Requirement How to Assign Parameters to a Module Other Ways of Assigning Parameters in 7 300 S7 400 Other Ways of Assigning Parameters in M7 300 M7 400 7 20 You can set the characteristics of configurable modules Which parameters can be set depends on the module Before you assign parameters to a module you must have arranged the module in the rack To assign module parameters follow the steps outlined below 1 Double click in the row of the rack containing the module whose parameters you want to set or select the module and then select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties This step is only possible in the detailed view in the lower part of the station window for DP slaves Result A dialog box appears with one or more tabs containing information about the module and the parameters you can set for the module For S7 300 and S7 400 programmable controllers you can set the parameters for some modules in the user program for example for analog modules You need to call the system functions SFCs WR_PARM WR_DPARM and PARM_MOD in the user program to do this These settings are lost following a complete restart You will find more information about the system functions in the Reference Manual System
306. ou can concentrate on the technology used in your branch of industry Entering Programs The control program created with CFC is represented in the form of charts in CFC They determine how the program executes by linking blocks and signals and by defining run properties CFC democfc SIMATIC 400 Station 1 CPU416 1 1 cfc_cntrl2 3 Chart Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help a x faa o N lt Darl S site eels Celta ea x eee MIE x ip B Text BIT_LGC 3 lt COMPARE Sabet CONTROL ass x io r CONVERT ABS BO INC B PULSE lt MATH FP r MULTIPLX TIME 7 3 wRD_LGC KEA mea i T Pea b i S7 Program 1 UND 4 BO EN END BO BO EN Libraries tj he lm Libraries WE 4 gt 1 OB35 cfc_cntrl1 2 Press F1 for help Figure 11 8 Example of Graphic Links with CFC Predefined Blocks You do not need to program many standard functions yourself instead you can use libraries containing standard blocks for ex
307. ou used in your user program for the corresponding SFC52 call This is not checked by the system 4 Exit the dialog box with OK 5 If you want to edit existing user defined diagnostic messages select the appropriate S7 program and the required message and edit the entries as described in steps 1 to 3 6 If you want to copy user defined diagnostic messages you must copy the whole S7 program that contains the relevant messages Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 17 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 5 Translating and Editing User Texts Overview With this function you can translate messages and user texts into any language You can then display user texts in the language of your choice Requirements You can only translate user texts into the languages you have installed on your programming device or PC under Windows 95 Procedure To translate user texts follow the steps outlined below 1 In the SIMATIC Manager set the language into which you want to translate your user texts using the menu command Options gt Display Language 2 In the Add Delete Language Set Standard Language dialog box which appears select the required language from the list of available languages and click the gt button to install this language as a new language in the project For each additional language a new column is added in the text list 3 Repeat step 2 for all re
308. ou will require the M7 optional software in addition to STEP 7 Table 18 1 Optional Software for M7 Programming M7 SYS e M7 RMOS32 operating system e M7 API system library Support for MPI CFC Programming software for CFC Continuous Function Chart programs M7 ProC C e Link for the Borland development environment in STEP 7 e Symbol import editor and generator e Organon debugging tool xdb386 Borland C Borland C C development environment In conjunction with the M7 optional software STEP 7 can also support the following additional tasks Downloading data to the programmable control system via the multipoint interface MPI e Requesting information about the programmable control system e Making particular settings on the programmable control system and resetting the programmable control system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Introduction to M7 Programmable Control Systems Dependencies Figure 18 1 illustrates the dependencies of the M7 optional software C C Programs CFC Programs M7 ProC C CFC Borland C M7 SYS Figure 18 1 M7 Software Options Dependencies for M7 Programming Table 18 2 Summary To create You will require the M7 software option C C programs M7 SYS M7 ProC C Borland C CFC programs M7 SYS CFC Borland C Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 18 3 C7900
309. ow 1 Click the Browse button 2 Select the project or library in the dialog box When you want to open a project or a library again the retrieved object is then displayed in the selection box Selecting a project or library via the Browse button is only possible when you first attempt to open them Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 20 5 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Uses Project Parts Which Can Be Printed Basic Procedure Once you have finished creating the program for your automation task you can print out all the important data for project documentation purposes using the print functions integrated in STEP 7 You can print the following parts of a project To 1 Blocks in Ladder Logic Statement List Function Block Diagram representation or in other languages optional software Symbol table with the symbolic names for absolute addresses Configuration table with the arrangement of modules in the programmable controller and the module parameters Diagnostic buffer content Variable table with monitor formats and monitor and modify values Reference data such as cross reference lists assignment lists program structures lists of unused addresses lists of addresses without symbols Global data table Module information with the module status Documents in optional packages for example programming languag
310. owing symbol for the DP master system Ss The Properties PROFIBUS Node dialog box is opened Here you can set the following Properties for the PROFIBUS subnet transmission rate etc The PROFIBUS address for the DP slave 3 Confirm your settings with OK A symbol is appended to the DP master system to represent the type of the DP slave The DP interface module and the slots for the modules of the modular DP slave are visible in the lower part of the station window as a table 4 Drag the modules from the Hardware Catalog window to the appropriate slot table in the lower part of the station window The modules which can be inserted are arranged in the hardware catalog below each DP slave interface module When configuring the DP slaves ET 200L and DP AS i Link distributed 1 O actuator sensor interface the following applies e ET 200L can be expanded using Smart Connect SC a channel at a time refer to Section 7 6 e DP AS i Link is configured with actuator sensor interface slaves see below When placing a DP AS i Link a configuration table is displayed automatically in which you can place the actuator sensor interface slaves from the Hardware Catalog window If a DP slave does not appear in the Hardware Catalog window you must install the respective device database DDB file in the STEP7 S7DATA GSD directory after starting STEP 7 and then select the menu command Option
311. peated functions S7 GRAPH is a programming language used to program sequential controls steps and transitions In this language the process sequence is divided into steps The steps contain actions to control the outputs The transition from one step to another is controlled by switching conditions S7 HiGraph is a programming language used to describe asynchronous non sequential processes in the form of state graphs To do this the plant is broken down into individual functional units which can each take on different states The functional units can be synchronized by exchanging messages between the graphs CFC for S7 and M7 is a programming language for linking existing functions graphically These functions cover a wide range of simple logic operations through to complex closed loop and open loop controls A large number of functions of this type are available in the form of blocks in a library You program by copying the blocks into a chart and connecting the blocks using lines Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Product Overview Options for The following optional packages are available for use in programming SIMATIC M7 SIMATIC M7 300 M7 400 programmable control systems e M7 SYS contains the operating system M7 RMOS 32 and system programs It is a prerequisite for the use of the M7 ProC C and CFC for M7 packages e M7 ProC C allows the Borland development environment for the pr
312. pecific texts and attributes please read the documentation supplied with your display device When you create a new display device an existing general text is automatically used as the default for texts for the corresponding display device Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 10 When you have created a message template you can associate instance data blocks with it and edit the messages for these data blocks in each instance To do this in the SIMATIC Manager open the block that your configured function block should open for example OB1 by double clicking on it In the open code section of the OB enter the call CALL and the name and number of the function block to be called and data block that you want to associate with the FB as an instance Confirm your entry with RETURN Example Enter CALL FB1 DB1 If DB1 does not yet exist confirm the prompt whether the instance data block should be created with Yes Result The instance data block is created In the code section of the organization block the input variables of the associated function block here Mess01 and the message number allocated by the system here 1 are displayed see Figure 12 4 EN LAD STL FBD TEST S7 Program 1 OB1 lt Offline gt i File Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help Of af 8 ate Ctl gt t ff x
313. perties such as the node address the name of the subnet to which the node is connected for each networked module With STEP 7 you can create as many MPI subnets Industrial Ethernet subnets PROFIBUS subnets and point to point subnets as you need To create a subnet follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the project in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select a subnet using the menu command Insert gt Subnet gt Result STEP 7 inserts in the project a subnet of the type you selected To set the subnet properties follow the steps outlined below 1 In your project select the subnet for which you want to set the subnet properties for example a PROFIBUS subnet 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result Two tabbed pages are displayed in which you can set the name of the network the highest PROFIBUS address and the transmission rate 3 Enter the parameters for the subnet Note For PROFIBUS subnets you can either select a bus profile predefined by STEP 7 or assign a user defined bus profile You will find information on selecting a bus profile in the online help or manual for the module you are using Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 5 Configuring Networks Setting Node Requirement You must have the hardware configuration table open and have Properties and the entered a module in the table which has at least one interface for connecting Ne
314. play according to the following filters e All symbols unique and non unique symbols e Unique symbols only or e Non unique symbols only You can select additional filters using the dialog box which you open with the menu command View gt Filter You can define criteria which the records must fulfil in order to be included in the filtered view The individual criteria are linked by an AND operation The filtered records start with the specified strings Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Assigning Symbols 6 5 Defining Single Symbols in a Dialog Box Overview Displaying Symbols Defining Symbols Editing in the Symbol Table The procedure described below shows you how you can change symbols or define new symbols in a dialog box while programming blocks without having to display the symbol table This procedure is useful if you only want to edit a single symbol If you want to edit a number of symbols you should open the symbol table and work in it directly You can toggle the display of the symbols in an open block in the block window on and off using the menu command View gt Symbolic Representation To define a single symbol during programming follow the steps outlined below 1 Make certain that the symbolic representation is switched on in the block window menu command View gt Symbolic Representation 2 Select the absolute address in the code section of your pro
315. played with the filter settings you made 8 In the symbol table select the row containing the address you want to insert as an accompanying value for example M 1 0 and click on the Add button Result The selected address is added in the SCAN Accompanying Values tab as an accompanying value as shown in Figure 12 7 Message Configuration Contents Of C Siemens step7 s7proj S7prog 7 Message Text Language Deutsch Symbols Symbolic Address Display Dev New Message O vavevotage General Data E New Device Delete Generate SDB Attributes Text SCAN Attributes SCAN Accom Va vee Filter For a Standard SCAN Message Add Accom Value 1 MB 10 Accom Value 6 z Delete Accom Value 2 Accom Value 7 Accom Value 3 Accom Value 8 T T m Representation Accom Value 4 Accom Value 9 Absolute Accom Value 5 Accom Value 10 O Symbolic OK Cancel Help Figure 12 7 SCAN Accompanying Values in Message Configuration Note You will find more information on how to insert these accompanying values in message texts in the topic Inserting Accompanying Values in the online help for message configuration Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 13 Creating and Displaying Messages 9 If you want to add a number of SCAN accompanying values repeat the proc
316. plications can be saved Some M7 400 modules are equipped with an optional OSD Table 18 5 Mass Memory in M7 Programmable Control Systems Current Status Mass Memory Capacity M7 300 Module M7 400 Module Hard disk 512 MB MSM378 MSM478 3 5 floppy disk MSM478 Memory card 1 2 4 8 16 MB CPU 388 3 CPU 488 486 3 FM 456 4 Optional in FM 456 4 A 1 Mbyte memory card is not suitable for installing an operating system Only use this type for transferring programs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 18 7 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Overview Chapter Overview When you edit projects that contain programmable modules CPUs and function modules in a SIMATIC M7 automation computer STEP 7 helps you with the following administration tasks e Installing the operating system e Updating the firmware e Updating the operating system for exchanging modules in the field e Downloading applications to the programmable control system e Deleting software components from the programmable control system e Displaying and changing module information Section Description 19 2 Data Backup in Case of Power Failure Installing M7 RMOS32 on Memory Card 19 4 Installing M7 RMOS32 on Hard Disk 19 5 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS on Hard Disk 19 12 19 6 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS
317. pping can occur see page 2 11 In order to make it easier to assign parameters to the programming device PC interface a set of predefined basic parameters module parameters are displayed in a dialog box for you to select Module To set the module parameters follow the steps outlined below a more Parameters detailed description can be found in the online help 1 In the Control Panel double click on Setting PG PC Interface 2 Set the Access Point of Application to S7TONLINE 3 In the displayed list select the required module parameter assignment for example MPI module parameters for operating the interface on the MPI bus If the module parameters you require are not displayed you must install a module or protocol first using the Install button The module parameters are then created automatically 4 Display the properties of the module parameter assignment 5 Adapt the user specific parameters in the properties of the module parameter assignment Changes will be necessary if conflicts with other settings arise for example with interrupt or address assignments In this case make the appropriate changes with the hardware recognition and control panel in Windows 95 NT see also page 2 11 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 2 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling A N Caution Do not remove the module parameter assignment TCP IP if it is shown
318. ptions certain prerequisites must be fulfilled Other options can be selected freely according to your own choice for example which programming language you use to create your user program Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Product Overview Table 1 2 Options When Creating Your S7 Program Option Description Select the programming language Ladder Logic LAD Function Block Diagram FBD Statement List STL Other programming languages available as optional software packages Example If you want to program using Statement List select the input mode e Create a block using incremental input mode Create a block as a text file STL source file Select the type of addressing to be used e Absolute addressing e Symbolic addressing Select the type of parameter assignment e Use the default parameters e Assign parameters appropriate for the process Select the programming language which best meets the requirements of your project You will find more information in the manuals for the respective programming languages see the Literature List in the Appendix You can enter Statement List instructions directly in a block and the syntax is checked after every statement You can also enter Statement List instructions in a text file The syntax of the instructions is then checked only when the file is compiled There are two types of symbols e Shared symbo
319. py disk or memory card to the mass storage medium of the M7 programmable control system The M7SWINS BAT file must be executed under the CLI of M7 RMOS32 Note If you download to an M7 programmable control system with M7 RMOS32 DOS offline via memory card you must change the entry in the M7SWINS BAT file M7INSTDRIVE MO0 to M7INSTDRIVE B To download M7 programs offline via a data medium follow the steps outlined below 1 Start the M7 management function with the menu command PLC gt Manage M7 System 2 Insert the disk in the drive on the PC programming device 3 Open the Programs tab 4 Make the following selections see Figure 19 3 Medium Floppy Disk or Memory Card The required applications from the Programming Device list box 5 Click the Install button Result The selected software components are transferred to the data medium 6 Insert the data medium in the M7 programmable control system 7 Start the CLI locally on the M7 300 M7 400 or via the Remote Terminal 8 Call the M7SWINS BAT batch file on the disk to copy the software components to the hard disk The M7SWINS BAT file always copies to the currently active drive This means you should enter the following to transfer from floppy disk to hard disk for example cd c A m7swins bat Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems
320. quired languages and exit the dialog box with OK 4 In the SIMATIC Manager select the block for which you want to translate or edit user texts and call the text translation function in the SIMATIC Manager with the menu command Options gt Translate Texts 5 Set the object type All and exit the dialog box with OK Result The text list for the selected block is displayed in the selected languages 6 Translate or edit the user texts The various options in the Edit menu are available here such as Search Replace Sort etc Note that you can only format the message texts for operator panels created in the message configuration application with the help of the icons in the button 7 When you have finished translating and editing save the text list using the menu command File gt Save 8 You can use the menu command File gt Print to print out the text list 9 Exit the function when you have translated or edited all the required texts by means of the menu command File gt Exit Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 12 18 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 6 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable Controller Overview Requirement Inserting Operator Station Objects Selecting the Transfer Options Using the transfer program S7 WinCC Mapper you transfer the message configuration data generated to the WinCC OSx or COROS LS_B database You h
321. r Manual 5 14 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects 5 8 Access to Programmable Controllers without Project Administration Overview Requirement Displaying Connected Programmable Controllers Available Functions Editing Downloaded Blocks Within a project you can access the connected programmable controllers in the online view of the project window You cannot however display symbols in the online view refer to Chapter 6 STEP 7 also enables you to work directly on a connected programmable controller online without project administration This function is intended for commissioning and service purposes The communication between the programming device and the programmable controller must be set up Click the Accessible Nodes button in the toolbar of the SIMATIC Manager or select the menu command PLC gt Display Accessible Nodes to open the Accessible Nodes window see Figure 5 5 All nodes which STEP 7 could find in the network are visible in the window KA SIMATIC Manager Accessible Nodes Ele File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help Das S see Ca Sa Sx ee e a amp Accessible Nodes Accessible Nodes it SFCO 7 MPI 2 Direct a SFC21 Blocks i SFC37 i SFC40 if SFC43 if SFC49 i SFC52 it SFC57 it SFC64 k here fy dia dha dia Oy Gy dha bia Gy iha dia dha hy dhi dha dha bia Gy
322. r all parameters you want to prepare for control and monitoring Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 3 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Assigning WinCC To assign WinCC attributes to the instances of a function block or to shared Attributes to Data data blocks follow the steps outlined below Blocks 1 In the SIMATIC Manager or LAD STL FBD Editor create one or more instance data blocks or shared data blocks that are associated with the prepared function block 2 Select a data block in the SIMATIC Manager 3 Select the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Operator Control and Monitoring 4 In the Operator Control and Monitoring dialog box activate the Operator Control and Monitoring check box 5 Select the General tab The name of the data block is displayed here as it appears in WinCC S7 program name_DBno or S7 program name_symbolic name of DB If necessary enter additional information on the data block in the Comment box 6 Now select the WinCC Attributes tab to edit the WinCC attributes of the respective data block Operator Control and Monitoring Floating point 32 bit_IEEE754 FloatTOFloat Floating point_32 bit_IEEE754 FloatTOFloat LINK_ON Binary variable BTRACK Binary_variable Floating point 32 bit_IEEE754 FloatToFloat Floating point_32 bit_IE
323. r data on the right by clicking them 4 Click the Continue button and open page 3 5 Select the assignment of the programs to the operator stations here as shown in the example in Figure 13 6 Wizard Transfer PLC Data to Operator Station Which programs do you want to assign to which operator stations 3 5 S7 M7 Programs Operator Stations S7 M7 Program Subnet Type Connections a os 3 7 STANTYPE f DRIVE s7 STANDARD s7 MLC PROFIBUS 5 s7 INST PROFIBUS 15 z3 s7 FURN PROFIBUS 23 s7 PROFIBUS 80 5 lt 4 Connection lt Back continue gt Complete Cancel Help Figure 13 6 Assigning Programs to the Operator Stations Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables Displaying the Transfer Log To assign a program to an operator station select the required program and drag it while holding the left mouse button pressed to the operator station which you want to display the messages for this program You can also use the buttons between the two list boxes to add and remove programs Repeat this procedure until you have assigned all programs whose messages you want to be displayed to the appropriate operator station You can assign a number of programs to one operator station or a number of operator statio
324. r station OS you simply configure once using STEP 7 You can transfer the data generated when you configure with STEP 7 to the WinCC database using the transfer program S7 WinCC Mapper part of the software package Process Control System PCS7 during which the consistency of the data and their compatibility with the display device are checked WinCC uses the data in variable blocks and graphic objects Using STEP 7 you can configure or modify operator control and monitoring attributes for the following variables e Input output and in out parameters in function blocks e Bit memory and I O signals e Parameters for CFC blocks in CFC charts Section Description Page 13 1 Overview 13 2 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with Statement List Ladder Logic and Function Block Diagram 13 3 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes via the Symbol Table 13 4 Changing Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with CFC 13 5 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable 13 8 Controller Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 13 1 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 13 1 Overview Basic Procedure The procedure for configuring operator control and monitoring variables is dependent on the selecting programming configuration language and the type of variables you want to control and monitor The basic procedure al
325. rag the DP slave to the following symbol for the DP master system Se The Properties PROFIBUS Node dialog box is opened Here you can set the following Properties for the PROFIBUS subnet transmission rate etc The PROFIBUS address for the DP slave 3 Confirm your settings with OK A symbol is appended to the DP master system to represent the type of the DP slave The I O structure of the compact DP slave is displayed as a table in the lower part of the station window When you select the symbol for the DP master system EE all DP slaves in the DP master system are display in the lower part of the station window When you select a DP slave symbol the structure of the DP slave is displayed in the lower part of the station window You can toggle between these views very simply by using the m or button which appears in front of the name of the DP slave DP master system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 13 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Selecting and Arranging Modular DP Slaves ET 200L and DP AS i Link DP AS i Link If the DP Slave does not Appear in the Hardware Catalog Window 7 14 To configure a modular DP slave follow the steps outlined below 1 Select an interface module for a modular DP slave for example IM 153 for ET 200M from the Hardware Catalog window 2 Drag the interface module to the foll
326. ration and options in your Windows user s guide or in the Windows 95 NT online help The SIMATIC Manager is the basic application for configuring and programming You can perform the following functions in the SIMATIC Manager e Set up projects Configure and assign parameters to hardware e Configure hardware networks e Program blocks e Debug and commission your programs Access to the various functions is designed to be object oriented and intuitive and easy to learn You can work with the SIMATIC Manager in one of two ways e Offline without a programmable controller connected Online with a programmable controller connected Note the relevant safety notices in each case You create automation tasks in the form of Projects You will make it easier for yourself if you read up on the following basic topics before you start work e User interface e Online help e Some basic operating steps Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 User Interface 3 2 User Interface Windows Overview The standard components of a window are shown in Figure 3 1 System menu Title of active Buttons for Maximize Close etc window Minimize Maximize Close Title bar SIMATIC Manager BE Menu bar Fie View PIC Options Window Help Toolbar Dje VEe ain 3 53 a ef a ry UC
327. re Configuration by double clicking one of these stations In this dialog box you can change for example the parameters of the programmable modules being used such as the name and address of the node Small squares depict interfaces of the module nodes for networking Every programmable module CPU CP or FM has one or more interface symbols For example a station may contain a CPU and an Industrial Ethernet communications processor CP Each of these modules has a symbol for an interface because the CPU has an MPI interface and the CP has an Ethernet interface Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 9 Configuring Networks Network Connection Symbol Creating a Network Connection Creating a Network Configuration 8 10 Vertical lines depict a network connection of a node You can open the properties dialog box of a network connection by double clicking one of these lines In this dialog box you can determine the name of the node and if necessary the node address You can easily create a network connection with NETPRO e Click on the symbol for the node interface and hold the mouse button pressed e Drag the mouse pointer to the subnet to which you want to connect the interface Result NETPRO inserts the symbol vertical line in the network view Requirement You must be in the network view of NETPRO The following is a possible sequence of procedures for
328. re and then create the software for it or e Start by creating the software independent of any configured hardware If you want to configure the hardware first follow the procedure described in Section 5 2 Once you configured the hardware the containers required for creating software S7 Program or M7 Program are already inserted Then continue as described in Sections 5 3 and 5 4 by inserting the objects required to create programs Then create the software for the programmable modules Chapter 11 You can also create software without first having to configure the hardware this can be done later The hardware structure of a station does not have to be set for you to enter your programs 1 Insert the required software containers S7 M7 programs in your project Section 5 5 You simply have to decide whether the container should contain programs for S7 or M7 hardware 2 Then create the software for the programmable modules Chapter 11 3 Configure your hardware Section 5 2 and Part 2 of this manual 4 Once you have configured the hardware you can link the M7 or S7 program to a CPU Section 5 5 You will find a description of how you use and debug programs without a hardware configuration in Section 5 9 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects Note Editing projects created in older versions of STEP 7 You will find information on
329. re of the List of Unused Symbols Sorting 14 12 To activate the unused symbol list display select the menu command View gt Unused Symbols or click the corresponding button in the toolbar You are shown an overview of all the symbols with the following characteristics 1 The symbols defined in the symbol table 2 The symbols not used in the parts of the user program for which reference data exist Each row displayed in the window corresponds to an entry in the list The entry contains the columns Symbol Address Data Type and Comment The display of any columns can be deactivated in the Unused Symbols tab of the Filter dialog box You open this dialog box with the menu command View gt Filter The meaning of each of the column entries is explained in Table 14 5 Table 14 5 Columns in the List of Unused Symbols Column Content Meaning Symbol Symbolic address name Address Absolute address Data Type Data type of the address for example BOOL INT etc Comment Comment from the symbol table You can sort the entries by clicking the column header Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Displaying Reference Data 14 9 Displaying Addresses without Symbols Displaying To activate the list of addresses without symbols display select the menu Addresses without command View gt Addresses Without Symbols or click the corresponding Symbols button in the to
330. reating and Editing User Defined Diagnostic Messages 12 15 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 XIII Contents 12 5 Translating and Editing User Texts cc eee e eee 12 18 12 6 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable Controller 12 19 12 7 Displaying CPU Messages and User Defined Diagnostic Messages 12 23 13 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 0000c eee eeeeee 13 1 13 1 OVEMIEW oiingan rE E A E eae A E EE 13 2 13 2 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with Statement List Ladder Logic and Function Block Diagram 00005 13 3 13 3 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes via the Symbol TAG ea e a a a E E 13 4 Changing Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with CFC 13 7 13 5 Transferring Configuration Data to the Programmable Controller 13 8 14 Displaying Reference Data 0c cece eect eee eee 14 1 OVEIVIOW nicest dee ea edie Weve eee ede wee da ene 14 2 14 2 Generating and Deleting Reference Data 00000e eee eee 14 3 14 3 Displaying Reference Data 000 cece eee eee eens 14 4 14 4 Notes on Displaying Reference Data cee cece eee ees 14 5 14 5 Displaying Cross References 2 0 00 c cece eee eee eens 14 6 14 6 Displaying Program Structures 000s cece eee eee eee 14 8 14 7 Displaying
331. required for data exchange via communication blocks is not necessary for global data communication You must fill out one column in the table for each CPU involved in global data communication This specifies the address areas for all CPUs taking part in GD communication To fill out a GD table follow the steps outlined below 1 Enter all participating CPUs in the top row of the table by double clicking on the column header or using the menu command Edit gt Assign CPU 2 Select the CPU required in each case from the dialog box and confirm with OK 3 Enter the global data to be exchanged in the row beneath in the GD table You can select the edit mode for individual cells in the table with the F2 key 4 Define a sender in each row of the GD table by selecting the respective row and clicking the Select As Sender button in the toolbar 5 The global data entered in a row can only be exchanged via a uniform communication route either via communication bus or via MPI cable Figure 9 3 shows a simple communication example and the corresponding entries in the GD table Station1 CPU1 Station2 CPU2 GD 1 1 1 1B100 MB200 MB202 k B100 GD 1 2 1 2 Global data elements Global data table GD Identifier Station1 CPU1 Station2 CPU2 il GD 1 1 1 gt gt 1B100 MB200 GD 1 2 1 MB202 gt gt QB 100 gt gt Indicates the sender Figur
332. retentive area of memory within the CPU which stores the diagnostic events in the order they occurred A diagnostic event causes an entry in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU The events are distinguished according to whether they are e Faults on a module e Faults in the wiring of the process e System errors in the CPU e Operating mode transitions of the CPU e Errors in the user program e User defined diagnostic events With direct addressing the address is assigned the memory location of the value with which the instruction is to work The address can be absolute or symbolic Downloading is the transfer of load objects such as logic blocks from the programming device to the load memory of a connected programmable module A unique code for the slots in a DP slave The ID contains the module type the length of the address area and consistency byte word Example 2DI for a two channel digital input module A DP distributed I O master is a master that conforms to the PROFIBUS DP standard EN 50170 previously DIN E 19245 A DP distributed I O slave is a slave that is run on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS DP protocol In free edit mode the blocks or the whole user program are edited in a source file A syntax check is run when the block or program is compiled Free edit mode is possible in the programming languages Statement List and S7 SCL Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01
333. rform one of the following functions with it e Edit the object using the menu command Edit gt Open Object e Open a dialog box using the menu command Edit gt Object Properties and set object specific options A container can also be a carrier of properties Note If you want to change the settings for an object in the programming device such as the parameters for a module these are not initially active on the programmable controller For this to happen the system data blocks in which these settings are stored first have to be downloaded to the programmable controller If you download the whole user program the system data blocks are automatically downloaded If you make changes to the settings after you downloaded a program you can reload the object System Data to update the settings on the programmable controller Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 B 1 Objects and Object Hierarchy Containers A container or directory can contain other containers subdirectories or objects These are displayed when you open the container Table B 1 Container Objects Project Represents the total sum of all data and programs At the head of an in an automation task object hierarchy Library Can contain S7 M7 programs and is used to store At the head of an blocks to be used more than once object hierarchy SIMATIC 300 station Represents components of the h
334. rformed in most projects Table 1 3 lists for M7 these general tasks for creating S7 and M7 programs and gives a reference to the relevant chapter Table 1 3 General Procedure and Reference Sources Activity See Creating and editing projects Assigning symbols Configuring communication Creating and debugging the program Configuring the hardware structure and assigning parameters to modules Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapters 8 9 10 Manuals on the programming languages Configuring messages programs Documenting the plant Selecting and downloading the operating system downloading Monitoring operation diagnosing hardware Chapter 13 Chapters 18 19 Chapter 17 Optional package manual Options When Creating M7 Programs Table 1 4 The selection options for creating programs for M7 are summarized in Table 1 4 Options When Creating Your M7 Program Option Select the programming language e C C e CFC Continuous Function Chart These programming languages are available as optional software packages Description Select the programming language which best meets the requirements of your project You will find more information in the manuals for the respective programming languages see the Literature List in the Appendix Select the type of addressing to be used e Absolute addressing e Symbolic addressing STEP 7 and the optional software package ProC C both supp
335. rmaceutical Plastic Pulp and Paper Textiles Transportation Other Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 very good to 5 poor Do the contents meet your requirements Is the information you need easy to find Is the text easy to understand Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements Aa TO a Please rate the quality of the graphics tables Additional comments Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 2 C79000 G7076 C552 01
336. rogramming Depending on the programming language you have the choice of incremental input mode editors or free edit mode text editors e Incremental editors for Ladder Logic Function Block Diagram Statement List or S7 Graph in the incremental input mode editors for Ladder FBD STL and S7 Graph you create blocks which are stored in the user program Incremental means that each entry you make is checked immediately The usage of addresses and symbols is checked as is the particular syntax of the programming language e Free edit text editors for Statement List S7 SCL or S7 HiGraph in free edit mode editors you create source files which are then subsequently compiled into blocks For compilation it is important that the particular syntax for the programming language has been adhered to A syntax check is run only when you select the consistency check command or when the source file is compiled into blocks You set which programming language and which type of editor you want to use to create a block or a source file in the object properties when you create the particular block or source file This entry determines which editor is started when the block or source file is opened You start the appropriate language editor in the SIMATIC Manager by double clicking the corresponding object block source file etc by selecting the menu command Edit gt Open Object or by selecting the corresponding button in the toolbar Stand
337. ructure a station has you always configure using the following steps 1 Select a hardware component in the Hardware Catalog window 2 Copy the selected hardware component to the station window using drag amp drop Figure 7 2 shows this operation fa HWConfig Hardware Configuration example SIMATIC 300 Station 3 Els Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help E example SIMATIC 300 Station 3 iE ee Station window a UR 0 1 Joo 2 Hardware Catalog 3 Select Hardware SIMATIC 300 EH RACK 300 l W Rail 6ES7 390 1 0 0AA0 Available in various lengths Press F1 for help Lim 4 Figure 7 2 Arranging a Rack Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Detailed View of a Rack Summary The lower part of the station window shows a detailed view of the inserted selected rack The order numbers and addresses of the modules are shown here in table form The table has the structure shown below for a central rack equipped with modules Module Order No MPI Addr Address Q Address PS 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 olojo IN D O R O p afo As usual in Windows applications
338. ry and a maximum number of counters timers and memory bits can be saved permanently in the backup buffer of the CPU Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 1 Glossary Bit Memory M Block C Central Processing Unit CPU CFC Chart Communication Function Block CFB Compiling Glossary 2 A memory area in the system memory of a SIMATIC S7 CPU This area can be accessed using write or read access bit byte word and double word The bit memory area can be used by the user to store interim results Blocks are part of the user program and can be distinguished by their function their structure or their purpose STEP 7 provides the following types of blocks e Logic blocks FB FC OB SFB SFC e Data blocks DB SDB e User defined data types UDT The CPU is the central module in the programmable controller in which the user program is stored and processed It consists of an operating system processing unit and communication interfaces CFC Continuous Function Chart is a programming language used to describe continuous processes more clearly by graphically interconnecting complex functions A special graphic source file which is created using the programming language Continuous Function Chart CFC A chart is stored in the container charts beneath the S7 program or the M7 program The communication function blocks are system function blocks f
339. s 232 233 and 236 5 Inthe code section of the function block insert the call for the chosen message block here CALL alarm and confirm your entry with RETURN Result The input variables for the called message block here SFB33 are displayed in the code section of the function block 6 Assign the symbolic name you set in step 2 for the message block input to the variable EV_ID here Mess01 as shown in Figure 12 2 Save the block with the menu command File gt Save and close the block aN LAD STL FBD messtest S7 Program 1 FB1 lt Offline gt i File Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help Cf bal cs 22 Claim I lt gt t ff on Mess01 P DW 16 0 Network 1 Hieiad Bee CALL alarm EN_R SIG ID EV_ID SEVERITY DONE ERROR STATUS ACK_DN ACK_UP SD_1 Mess01 File block saved Figure 12 2 Example of a Filled Out Variable Declaration Table and Code Section in a Message Type Function Block Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 12 7 Creating and Displaying Messages 12 8 7 Now open the Message Configuration dialog box using the menu command Edit gt Special Object Properties gt Message in the SIMATIC Manager M
340. s such as STL source file C program C source program C source program M7 program DOS Windows program Chart Graphic CFC source file Charts The optional software package C for M7 is required to create C programs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 B 3 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Literature List 21 30 70 71 72 100 101 102 230 232 233 234 235 236 249 250 251 Technical Overview S7 M7 Programmable Controllers Distributed I O with PROFIBUS DP and AS i Primer S7 300 Programmable Controller Quick Start Manual 7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Reference Manual S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Instruction List 87 300 Programmable Controller Manual 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation Reference Manual S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Reference Guide 7 400 Instruction List CPU 412 413 414 416 Converter Manual Standard Software for S7 From S5 to S7 Manual Statement List STL for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming Manual Ladder Logic LAD for S7 300 and S7 400 Programming Programming Manual System Software for S7 300 and S7 400 Program Design Reference Manual System Software for S7 300 and S
341. s gt Reference Data gt Display in the SIMATIC Manager To display the reference data immediately in the required view and with the required filter select the menu command Options gt Reference Data gt Filter and Display in the SIMATIC Manager If the reference data are incomplete a dialog box is displayed from which you can start an update of the reference data Section 14 2 You can display the reference data for a block compiled with the setting Create Reference Data in the LAD STL FBD Editor directly from the language editor to get a current overview of your user program The reference data are displayed in a window in the default view Cross Reference List To change the default follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the menu command View gt Filter 2 Select the Customize tab in the dialog box displayed 3 Select the view you want to be opened first 4 If the default is to apply to other programs and to other work sessions using the application select the option Save as Standard 5 Close the dialog box with OK You can switch to another view of the reference data using the commands in the View menu or the corresponding buttons in the toolbar see Sections 14 5 to 14 9 Using the menu command Window gt New Window you can open additional windows and display other views of the reference data for example List of Unused Symbols The following section contains gener
342. s gt Update DDB Files The DP slave then appears in the Hardware Catalog window under Additional Field Devices Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 8 Example 6 Distributed I O with Intelligent DP Slaves What Is an Intelligent DP Slave Difference Normal DP Slaves and Intelligent DP Slaves An Intelligent DP Slave Cannot Be a DP Master A feature of an intelligent DP slave is that input output data are not supplied directly from a real input output on the DP master but from a preprocessing CPU the CPU which together with the communications processor and the integrated PROFIBUS DP interface forms the DP slave DP Master Intelligent DP Slave CPU 315 2DP CPU PROFIBUS CP Address area I Q M PROFIBUS Figure 7 4 Data Exchange Principle between DP Master and Intelligent DP Slave In a normal DP slave such as a compact ET 200B or modular ET 200M DP slave the DP master accesses the distributed inputs outputs In an intelligent DP slave the DP master does not access inputs outputs of the intelligent DP slave but accesses the address area of the preprocessing CPU The user program for the preprocessing CPU must take care of data exchange between the address area and the inputs outputs Note The configured input output areas for data exchange between master a
343. s The graphic editor for S7 HiGraph allows you to program some of the blocks 7 HiGraph Based in your program as state graphs This enables you to break down your plant On into independent functional units which can all take on different states You define transitions for switching between the states You describe the actions which are assigned to the states and the conditions for the transitions between the states in a zoom type language similar to Statement List You create a graph for each functional unit which describes the behavior of this functional unit The graphs for a plant are grouped together as graph groups Messages can be exchanged between the graphs meaning the functional units can be synchronized Position cam operated switch 1 2 4 Index withdrawn Turn counter clockwise Coordinator Motor Index inserted Graph for coordinating the Loosen tighten p functional units counter bearing Cis Counter bearing Index Motor N PN 0 a Ps N a Ng Graphs for individual functional units Figure 11 7 Creating Graphs for Functional Units Example Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 11 9 Creating User Programs Source Files and The graph groups created with the editor are stored as HiGraph source files Blocks Created in th
344. s in In dialog boxes you can enter information which is required for executing a Dialog Boxes particular task The components which appear most frequently in dialog boxes are explained using the example in Figure 3 2 Text boxes Search Replace to enter text using the Search For Replace With keyboard 1 G1 0 Q2 0 Whole Word Cell Only X Match Case Option buttons Search Only Search in to select one of a a number of choices gt From Cursor Down x OAll O From Cursor Up 1 Symbol O Whole Table 2 Address O i i Check boxes Selection 3 Data Type to select one or more Seren eoum 4 Comment choices Al Buttons y Search Replace Replace All Cancel Help Figure 3 2 Example of a Dialog Box List Boxes and Text boxes sometimes have an arrow pointing downwards beside them This Combination arrow shows that there are more options available to choose from for this Boxes box Click on the arrow to open a list box or combination box If you click on an entry in the list it is automatically displayed in the text box Tabbed Dialog The content of some dialog boxes is divided up into tabbed pages to organize Boxes the information more clearly The names of the tabbed pages are shown on tabs along the top edge of the dialog box To bring a particular tabbed page to the foreground you simply click on its tab Path test01 Program online CPU Operating Mode STOP Status Module Operating Mode Tabs General Diagnos
345. se relationships are represented on the screen by showing them as part of a logical hierarchy of objects in a way similar to directories At the top of the object hierarchy in Figure 4 1 is the object Example as the icon for the whole project This icon can be used to display the project properties and serves as a container for networks to configure networks stations to configure the hardware and for S7 or M7 programs to create software The objects in the project are displayed in the right half of the project window when you select the project icon The objects at the top of this type of object hierarchy libraries as well as projects form the starting point in dialog boxes used to select objects Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation 4 2 Components for Configuring Hardware and Networks Overview Networks Station You will find the following objects for configuring hardware and networks in a project Network Station Programmable Hardware eT Module a l m Figure 4 2 Components for Configuring Hardware and Networks The icons for networks appear when you select the project icon They represent the information about a network of the given type and are used to set network parameters and gain access to the network configuration application see Part 2 of this manual You can delete any network icons you do not require and cr
346. sic procedures You will find more detailed information on the individual dialogs in the software and how to use them in the relevant online help Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Contents PretaGe nuserie Pte tae etna Se ee te eens 1 Product Overview 0 cece cece eee eee eee eee 1 1 2 Installing and Uninstalling 0 0ce cece eee eee eee eens 2 1 2 1 Requirements for Installation s suus e 00 cece ence eee 2 2 2 2 Authorization and Rights of Usage 0 eee eee 2 3 2 3 Guidelines for Handling Authorizations 000 cece eee eee 2 5 2 4 Installing and Uninstalling the STEP 7 Software 5 2 7 2 5 Setting the PG PC Interface 0 ccc eee eee 2 10 2 6 Multi User Configuration in a Windows Network 005 2 12 3 User IMtertaCe ects eis Sines eee eee Seren ees ree ieee ine lees 3 1 3 1 Starting the STEP 7 Software 00 0 cece eee 3 2 3 2 User Interface Windows 00 c cece teens 3 3 3 3 User Interface Dialog Boxes 0 cece eee ees 3 4 3 4 Calling the Help Functions 0 000 eee ee eee tenes 3 5 3 5 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout 0000eeee eee 3 6 3 6 Using TeleS rviCe ae icc cache cents en eed nantes Oe enti aa wendy aa 3 7 4 STEP 7 Projects and Basic Operation
347. splay the S7 M7 program and the Connections object An empty connection table Connections object is created automatically for each programmable module The connection table is used to define communication connections between programmable modules in a network When you open the connection table a window opens displaying a table where you can define connections see Part 2 of this manual for more information on defining connections Once you have created the hardware configuration you can create the software for your programmable modules The basic procedure is outlined in Section 5 3 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 5 Creating and Editing Projects 5 3 Basic Procedure for Creating Software Overview Procedure 5 6 The software for programmable modules is stored in program containers For SIMATIC S7 modules this object is called S7 Program for SIMATIC M7 modules it is called M7 Program Figure 5 1 shows an example of an S7 Program in a programmable module in a SIMATIC 300 station 5 Project SIMATIC 300 Station Programmable Module A S7 Program Figure 5 1 S7 Program in the Project Structure To create the software for your project follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the S7 program or M7 program 2 Open the Symbols object in the S7 or M7 program and assign the symbols This step can also be done later You
348. stations and SIMATIC S5 stations Other stations in the active project are either e Devices from other manufacturers or e SIMATIC S7 stations that were configured and had parameters assigned with STEP 7 in another project The connection types you can use for other stations PGs PCs and SIMATIC S5 stations are listed in Tables 10 1 and 10 6 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 15 Establishing Communication Connections Establishing a To establish a connection to an other station or to a PG PC or a SIMATIC Connection S5 station follow the steps outlined below 1 In your open project create an other station using the menu command 2 Insert gt Station gt Other Station Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The Object Properties dialog box appears on the screen for a PG PC the Assignment tab also appears Object Properties Other Station General Node List Name Type Address PROFIBUS Node 1 PROFIBUS Node 2 New Properties Delete OK Cancel Help Figure 10 6 Object Properties for Other Stations 3 10 16 Click the New button in the Node List property sheet and in the following dialog boxes specify the subnet whose node is to be the Other Station For the connection partner PG PC you must then assign an interface of your programming device PC t
349. submodule Yellow triangle with The module has diagnostic information on a exclamation mark secondary module Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware Diagnostics The module operating modes provided they have an operating mode are Symbols for shown using the symbols in Table 17 2 Operating Modes Table 17 2 Diagnostics Symbols for Operating Modes Example CPU in a white circle Symbol Description Mode Green triangle above a double STARTUP line Red triangle in a white circle STOP Red triangle with white filling STOP triggered by STOP mode on another CPU in multicomputing operation Blue diamond with vertical bar Purple circle in a white circle RUN HOLD Table 17 3 Diagnostics Symbols for Operating Modes and Forcing Symbol Description Red symbol for a screw clamp above the module a Mode Variables are being forced on this module meaning variables in the user program for the module are assigned fixed values that cannot be changed by the program The symbol for forcing can also appear in combination with other symbols here with the symbol for RUN mode Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 5 Diagnosing Hardware 17 4 Troubleshooting Overview Displaying Diagnostics Symbols Basic Procedure Detailed Procedure
350. t Headers and Footers With the menu command File gt Print Preview you can display a preview of how your page will look when printed To create edit and print standardized wiring manuals you can use the optional software package DOCPRO This creates plant documentation that fulfils the DIN and ANSI standards Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions Appendix Objects and Object Hierarchy Literature List Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Opening and Editing Projects A from Older STEP 7 Versions Chapter Overview Opening Version 1 Projects Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions Other Than Version 1 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 A 1 Opening and Editing Projects from Older STEP 7 Versions A 1 Opening Version 1 Projects Overview Block Version Procedure A 2 In the SIMATIC Manager you can reuse projects created with version of STEP 7 STEP 7 converts the version 1 project into a new version 2 project You can then save the project as a version 2 project or as a version 3 project The following components of a version project are retained e Project structure with programs e Blocks e STL source files e Symbol table e Hardware configuration The program components which are retained can
351. t been connected Select each rack one at a time and connect it to the required interface of the send IM C1 or C2 using the Connect button Connection lines then show how the racks are connected together If you want to expand a configuration comprising of a segmented rack CR2 S7 400 by adding racks the following requirements must be fulfilled 1 Configure the CR2 rack with the send IM 2 Insert only the receive IMs in the expansion racks 3 Make the connections between the interface modules IMs in the racks as described above Only then can you insert modules in the expansion racks Reason Because the address area for a CR2 with a number of CPUs exists more than once the expansion rack must first be assigned an address area of a CPU Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 4 Example 2 Structure with Interface Submodules Using Interface You can use interface submodules in the following ways m l i a Sabmosules e Insert them directly in a CPU or communications processor CP if they have interface submodule slots e In M7 programmable control systems insert them in an expansion module EXM which is assigned to a CPU or a function module FM When you have entered the CPU EXM in
352. t formats A VED Virtual Field Device is a simulation of a programmable controller in a device neutral description The data and the behavior of the programmable controller are described from the viewpoint of a communication partner A number of VFDs can be assigned to one physical device They are configured with a suitable configuration tool A VFD is uniquely identified by its name A number of connections can be configured for a VFD which can all be uniquely identified by their name If the processing time for the user program exceeds the set watchdog time the operating system produces an error message and the CPU goes into STOP The work memory is the RAM Random Access Memory in the CPU which the processor accesses while executing the user program Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Index A Access codes reference data 14 10 Access to programmable controller with project administration 5 12 without configured hardware without project administration 5 15 Accessible nodes 5 15 Address assigning 7 21 Address assignment checking 2 11 Address overview 7 22 Addresses without symbols Addresses without symbols displaying 14 13 Archive programs 20 2 Archive settings Archiving 20 4 project 5 11 Assigning parameters 7 2 in the user program 7 20 modules 7 20 Assignment list LQ M T C Assignment lists displaying 14 10 Authorization origina
353. t is usually reinstalled Note that only a limited number of write accesses are permitted on both types of memory media Further You will find more detailed descriptions of the individual steps and on Information installing the operating system configurations in e The online help on managing M7 programmable control systems e The user manual for the M7 SYS optional software package 282 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 17 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 8 Updating the Operating System for Exchanging Modules in the Field Uses Requirement Procedure Updating the Operating System in the Field 19 18 In STEP 7 you can create a set of disks or memory cards with which you can update the operating system on the hard disk when you exchange modules in the field without requiring a programming device In order to create the data medium for the update you will require the project which contains the hardware configuration with the module you are going to exchange To create the data medium for the update follow the steps outlined below 1 In the Managing M7 PLC Systems dialog box select the Installing Operating System tab 2 In the Medium box select the data medium for the update floppy disk or memory card 3 In the Possible Configurations list box select the required operating system 4 In the Operating System Version i
354. t nodes in the current STEP 7 project This is not necessary for an unspecified partner The following table shows an overview of the possible connection partners in another project depending on the connection type It also shows which connection partners you can configure Table 10 6 Connection Partners in Other Projects Connection Partner in Other Project Configure Connection to Type Can Be Connection Partner S7 Connection PTP Connection FMS Connection FDL Connection PG PC with WincC S7 CPU FM S7 station non Siemens device S7 station S5 station PG PC non Siemens device non Siemens device Unspecified Unspecified Other station for S7 station or non Siemens device S5 station or PG PC created in the SIMATIC Manager ISO Transport S7 station Other station for S7 station or Connection S5 station non Siemens device ISO on TCP PG PC S5 station Connection or PG PC created in the SIMATIC Manager or Unspecified 1 WinCC software which turns a programming device PC into an operator station OS In contrast to the S7 connections for configuring PTP connections to unspecified partners it is not a requirement that the local node is in a network You must simply make sure you connect the communication partners in your real plant before you attempt to use the connection Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User M
355. tall on your M7 programmable control system This step is only necessary if you have a number of versions of the M7 SYS optional package installed on your programming device On the programmable control system If an online connection to the programmable control system is possible this tab shows the current operating system version on the PLC system if it can be determined Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 3 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Selecting the Operating System 19 4 Select an operating system configuration from the list box Possible Configurations Your choice of operating system configuration depends on the types of applications which are to run on the M7 programmable control system Table 19 1 shows you when to select which operating system You should also note the hardware dependencies in Table 18 4 Table 19 1 Operating System Configurations Applications Operating System Configuration M7 RMOS32 applications only M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 and MS DOS applications M7 RMOS32 amp MS DOS M7 RMOS32 MS DOS and M7 RMOS32 amp MS Windows MS Windows applications The memory capacity requirement for M7 RMOS32 without MS DOS Windows is a maximum of 2 Mbytes on the destination medium You must also add the memory requirement for your applications Table 19 2 shows you which mass storage types you can select for the various operating system co
356. tall the operating system on its own partition on the hard disk or on its own mass storage medium Make sure that write access to the partition or the mass storage for the operating system is not possible during operation This ensures that the operating system and the system data remain intact even after a power failure so that a cold restart is always possible Do not place the directories for the backup memory the permanent load memory and the read only memory on the same drive as the operating system but on the drive on which you write during normal operation To do this you must assign the appropriate path names to the environment variables BACKDIR RAMDIR and ROMDIR in the file ETC INITTAB on the boot drive e Do not install the applications on the same drive as the operating system Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 3 Installing M7 RMOS32 on a Memory Card Starting Point Requirement Procedure Installing RMOS with MS DOS Your M7 programmable control system has no hard disk or floppy disk drives In this case you can use the memory card as the destination medium There is space on a memory card for a complete M7 RMOS32 operating system with applications see Table 19 2 You will require the following e A memory card drive on your PG 720 PG 740 PG 760 or a PC with an external prommer e A memory card gt 2 Mbytes To
357. tegrated EPROM of the CPU 312 is erased by overwriting the EPROM again with the current RAM content in which all user blocks had been deleted Blocks stored in the RAM can be deleted directly by removing them from the open CPU The occupied space in the load or work memory becomes free and can be used again Note You can delete blocks both in the STOP and RUN P modes If you delete in the RUN P mode however remember the following point when the user program attempts to access a deleted block either the CPU changes to STOP or an error OB is called To delete blocks on the CPU directly open the project window switch to the online view and select the blocks you want to delete in the online project window Then select the menu command File gt Delete or press DEL Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 9 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 7 Reloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller Uses You can overwrite blocks contained in the load memory RAM or EPROM or work memory with a new version known as reloading The existing version then becomes invalid Blocks in the RAM The existing block in the RAM is deleted by the reload function and the modified block is downloaded to the RAM If the new version is longer than the existing version gaps may occur in the load and work memory see Section 15 9 Compressing the User Memory RAM
358. tems and all parameters assigned In this section you can read about how to save a completed configuration how to download it to the programmable controller and how you can display and modify an existing configuration Central structures and distributed structures PROFIBUS DP are not dealt with separately because the procedures are the same for both You use the menu command Station gt Save or Station gt Save and Compile to save the configuration With Station gt Save and Compile the configuration is saved in the current project as the Station object The system data blocks SDBs are also created and stored in the offline user program of the respective module SDB carrier for example CPU The user program is located in the Blocks container the system data blocks are represented by the System Data object Note If you save incomplete or inconsistent configurations no system data blocks are created under System Data If any existed there they are retained With Station gt Save no system data blocks are created The save process is shorter than Save and Compile but you must note that inconsistencies can arise between the configuration saved in the Station object and the configuration saved in the system data The configuration created must match the actual structure and the configuration must be displayed on the screen A configuration can only be downloaded to the station i
359. that the software can be used only with an authorization If you wish you can run the authorization program immediately or continue the installation and execute the authorization at a later date In the first case insert the authorization disk when you are prompted to do so see Sections 2 2 and 2 3 During installation a dialog box is displayed where you can assign parameters to memory cards e Ifyou are not using memory cards you do not need an EPROM driver Select the option No EPROM Driver e Otherwise select the entry which applies to your programming device e Ifyou are using a PC you can select a driver for an external prommer Here you must specify the port to which the prommer is connected for example LPT1 You can change the set parameters after installation by calling the program Memory Card Parameter Assignment in the STEP 7 program group Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling Flash File Systems Setting the PG PC Interface Completing the Installation If Errors Occur during the Installation Result of the Installation Uninstalling STEP 7 In the dialog box for assigning memory card parameters you can specify whether a flash file system should be installed The flash file system is required for example when you write individual files to or delete individual files from an EPROM memory card in SIMATIC M7 without cha
360. the Hardware Catalog window Drag the module to the appropriate row in the rack Note You can arrange some components in the lower part of the station window only detailed view These are Terminal blocks for Smart Connect TB SC SC submodules AS i slaves Components for modular DP slaves for example modules for ET 200M Repeat steps and 2 until the rack is fully equipped As an alternative to step 2 you can also select an empty row and then double click the module in the Hardware Catalog window or select the module and press RETURN Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 7 7 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules Expanding a Configuration Special Case Configuring with CR2 7 8 If you want to expand your configuration to include additional racks follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a suitable expansion rack from the Hardware Catalog window 2 Drag the racks to the station window one by one 3 Assign modules to the rack as described under Selecting Modules and Arranging Them in the Configuration Table Important The interface modules IM must be inserted in all racks so that connecting up is possible 4 For S7 400 only make the connections between the interface modules in the racks Double click the send IM Select the Connection tab This tabbed page shows all racks that have no
361. the drive on the M7 programmable control system and start the M7 programmable control system Result The M7 system boots with the new operating system and an MPI connection is established between the PC programming device and the M7 system Then M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS and any applications are installed on the hard disk of the M7 300 M7 400 via the MPI connection To download your application to the M7 programmable control system open the Programs tab and follow the procedure described under Downloading M7 Programs via MPI RFS on page 19 25 Start the M7 programmable control system again using the mode selector and adjust the BIOS Setup if required Result The M7 system boots with the new operating system from the hard disk Your application is started if it exists Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 13 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 6 Installing M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows on Hard Disk Starting Point When shipped there is no executable operating system installed on the M7 programmable control system and no MPI connections are possible Requirement To install M7 RMOS32 with MS Windows on the hard disk of the M7 programmable control system you will require the following e A mass storage module MSM 378 478 in your M7 programmable control system e A boot medium 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or memory card gt 2 Mbytes e MS DOS and MS Windows installation
362. the object properties dialog box for the programming device PC in the Node List tab You open this dialog box by double clicking the icon for the PG PC in the SIMATIC Manager How you load the file into the programming device PC is described in the documentation on configuring your PG PC 10 7 Downloading the Connection Table to the Programmable Controller Overview Three Possibilities for Downloading When you save the connection table connection data are created that you must download to the corresponding programmable module Downloading to the CPU or FM is possible via a PG PC which is a node in the MPI PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet subnet Note If STEP 7 only enters a Local ID for the connection in the connection table then you only download the connection table to the local node You will find any special cases explained in the online help If STEP 7 enters a Local ID and a Partner ID for the connection in the connection table you must download both connection tables each to its respective communication partner You have a choice of three methods of downloading the connection data for a local node to a programmable controller Downloading to the local station Downloading to local and partner stations Downloading selected connections Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 10 17 Establishing Communication Connections Requirements
363. the project window and select the menu command PLC gt Download Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 15 7 Downloading and Uploading User Programs 15 5 Downloading Blocks from a Programming Device to a Programmable Controller Uses Function What Must Be Loaded Downloading with the SIMATIC Manager Downloading when Processing Individual Objects 15 8 When creating and debugging a user program it is often necessary to download individual logic blocks and data blocks to the CPU and to run them under test conditions Note You can download blocks from the programming device to the CPU in the STOP or RUN P mode If however the parameters of a block are changed in the RUN P mode the CPU changes to STOP Note the correct block call sequence when downloading in the RUN P mode The CPU will change to STOP if it attempts to call blocks that do not exist Individual blocks are always downloaded to the RAM load memory At the same time the parts of the blocks relevant for program execution are loaded into the work memory To test individual blocks you must download at least one organization block OB the function blocks FBs and functions FCs called by the OB and the data blocks DBs being used You can download the selected components of a user program to the programmable controller using the menu command PLC gt Download You can download blocks or the ob
364. the software a message appears to tell you this If you want to Later Date install the authorization use the program AUTHORS on the authorization disk Note Always enter drive C as the destination drive for the authorization for STEP 7 and STEP 7 Mini Removing an If you should need to repeat the authorization for example if you want to Authorization reformat the drive on which the authorization is located you must back up the authorization first uninstall it You need the original authorization disk to do this To transfer the authorization back to the authorization disk follow the steps outlined below 1 Insert the original authorization disk in drive A 2 Start the program AUTHORS EXE from the authorization disk 3 Select the menu command Authorization gt Remove 4 In the dialog box enter the drive on which the authorization is located and confirm the dialog box A list of all authorizations on the respective drive is displayed 5 Select the authorization you want to remove and confirm the dialog box If the process is completed without error the following message appears Authorization lt Name gt successfully removed from drive lt X gt 6 Acknowledge the message The dialog box with the list of authorizations remaining on the drive is then displayed Close the dialog box if you do not want to remove any more authorizations You can then use the disk again to install an authorization Sta
365. tic Butter Memory Time System Performance Data Communication Stacks Events No Time Date Event 1 09 15 22 842 11 12 95 Power on retentive 2 18 00 22 378 08 12 95 STOP due to power supply failure Figure 3 3 Example of a Dialog Box with Tabs Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 3 4 C79000 G7076 C552 01 User Interface 3 4 Calling the Help Functions Online Help Calling the Online Help Calling the Quick Help Changing the Font Size The online help system provides you with information at the point where you can use it most efficiently You can use the online help to access information quickly and directly without having to search through manuals You will find the following types of information in the online help Contents offers a number of different ways of displaying help information e Context Sensitive Help with the F1 key you access information on the object you just selected with the mouse or on the active dialog box or window e Introduction gives a brief introduction to the use the main features and the functional scope of an application Getting Started summarizes the basic steps you need to execute to get starting with the application e Using Help provides a description of ways of finding specific information in the online help e About provides information on the current version of the application Via the Help menu you can also access topics which relate to the curre
366. tic events up to its maximum capacity All events in the buffer are retained even if another user program is loaded Therefore it is possible that older diagnostic buffer entries may refer to blocks which are no longer present in the CPU In the worst case there may be a new block in the CPU with the same name which did not however cause the diagnostic message In rare cases the following situations can occur e The diagnostic event is older than the date of the last block change The Open Block dialog box appears with the message that the block has been modified This may also mean that the block is simply a block with the same name belonging to another program You can still open the block online in the CPU and edit it if necessary or You can select the block offline in the correct program and edit it offline e The block that caused the event is no longer on the CPU The Open Block dialog box appears with the message that the referenced block does not exist in the CPU The block was deleted after the time of the diagnostic event entry You can select the block offline in the correct program and edit it offline Note If you edited a block offline you must then download it to the CPU so that the changes become effective in your program Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 13 Diagnosing Hardware 17 9 Displaying Diagnostic Interrupts Overvi
367. ties User Blocks Function OB 13 63KB T OB1 Open cycle Start event Startup End OB10 Time of day interrupt Start event Time of day signal OB20 Time delay interrupt Start event Timer signal FC 128 63 KB FB 128 63 KB DB 128 63 KB No Name Family Author Block SFCO SET_CLK CLK_FUNC SIMATIC System IES SFC1 READ_CLK CLK_FUNC SIMATIC Me SHE ae No Name Family Author a SFB 0 em w Figure 17 10 Blocks Dialog Box Uses Before you download a new user program to the CPU you need to check for example which standard blocks your user program contains or can call to ensure that it can run on the selected CPU Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 17 21 Diagnosing Hardware 17 16 Displaying Communication Connections Communication Tab Uses Connection Overview Communication Load Frame 17 22 The Communication tabbed page displays information about for example the number and current status of the communication connections of the CPU or M7 FM 356 FM 456 Module Information Path project station CPU CPU Operating Mode STOP Status Module Operating Mode General Diagnostic Buffer Merei Scan Cycle Time Time System Perf Data Communication Stacks M Transmission Rates z Rate Set Maximum Rate Multipoint Interface MPI 187500 bps 1875000 bps
368. tion You will find a detailed description of entering network parameters in the online help Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 8 8 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 4 Creating Network Configurations with Symbols in the Network View Network View Subnet Symbol Station Symbol Node Interface Symbol Every network view essentially consists of four different symbols which will be explained in more detail in this section Figure 8 4 shows a section of a network view in which the different symbols have been entered NETPRO Configuring Networks Network to Project Model Network Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help al xi lll 2 SIMATIC 400 Station 1 cP E o L oo X Symbol for Subnet MPI 1 Symbol for Station MPI lt Symbol for Network Connection SIMATIC 300 Station 1 p CPU 314 a X Symbol for Node Interface all Ready NUM M Figure 8 4 Network Configuration View Horizontal lines always depict a subnet You can reach the properties dialog box of a subnet by double clicking one of these lines In this dialog box you determine all the parameters relating to the subnet for example the name of the subnet the transmission rate used and the highest node address in a PROFIBUS subnet Large squares depict a station You can open the dialog box for Hardwa
369. tion SFC52 Using SFC52 you can write an entry in the diagnostic buffer and send a corresponding message which you create using the message configuration application Block related and symbol related messages are allocated a unique 32 bit message number automatically by the system which you cannot change For user defined diagnostic messages you can allocate the message number yourself The system will however suggest a suitable message number for you The difference between a message and a message template is that a message template is the template for a message A message template is therefore not allocated a message number You can create message templates for block related messages in function blocks FBs and pass them on together with their texts and attributes as templates to instance data blocks you associate later This makes it easy to create messages of the same type with identical texts and attributes which you can then modify later according to the instance Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Displaying Messages Save and OK in Message Configuration The dialog boxes in message configuration have either the Save button or the OK button depending on the application that called them If you exit a dialog box by means of the Save button the data you configured are saved permanently If you exit a dialog box by means of the O
370. to Project Model Network Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help E x slaa elal x SIMATIC 400 Station 1 CPU 414 Ree Li Li Symbol for DP Master Selected MP PROFIBUS 1 PROFIBUS ET 200L SC 32DI lt Symbol for DP Slave w gt ig Ready NUM 7 Figure 8 5 Example of the View of a Network Configuration with DP Slaves Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 8 11 Configuring Networks Assigning Once you have arranged a DP slave in the network view assign its Parameters to parameters following the steps outlined below DP Slaves 1 Select the DP slave in the network view 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result An object properties dialog box is opened for the DP slave in which you can change its parameters By double clicking the DP slave you change to the configuration table view Selecting a Master You can select a whole master system to copy it for example System 1 Select a DP master or a DP slave in the network view 2 Select the menu command Edit gt Select gt Master System Highlighting a You can highlight a master system in color Master System 1 Select a DP master or a DP slave in the network view 2 Select the menu command View gt Highlight gt Master System Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 8 12 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 6 Selecting Context
371. trol system follow the steps outlined below 1 Select a C7 control system from the Hardware Catalog window These systems can be found under SIMATIC 300 2 Drag the C7 control system to the station window 3 If you want to expand the C7 control system Select rails as racks from the Hardware Catalog window Drag the racks one by one to the station window Arrange modules in each rack as described in Section 7 3 Important The interface modules IM must be inserted in all racks so that connecting up is possible Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 7 10 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring and Assigning Parameters to Modules 7 6 Example 4 Expanding the Structure with Smart Connect Overview Context Smart Connect consists of the following components e Interface module IM 464 for S7 400 only e Terminal blocks TB SC e Electronic submodules each for one or two inputs or outputs The inputs and outputs are located on the electronic submodules Up to eight electronic submodules can be plugged on a terminal block For interface module IM 464 Up to eight terminal blocks can be connected to an IM 464 interface module via round sheath ribbon cable The electronic submodules cannot however be configured cannot have parameters assigned For ET 200L A terminal block can be connected to an ET 200L via round sheath ribbon cable The terminal blocks and electronic submodules ar
372. twork to a subnet for example a CPU To set the node properties and the network Connection connection follow the steps outlined below 1 Select the module 2 Double click the row containing the module or select the menu command Edit gt Object Properties Result The properties dialog box opens for the module 3 Click the button for the required subnet under Nodes Result A dialog box for setting network connection properties appears 4 Set the parameters for the network connection To do this activate the check box The node is connected to the selected network and select the node address and subnet Note If you do not activate this check box the module is not assigned to a subnet Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 8 6 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Configuring Networks 8 3 Setting Your Network Configuration Graphically Starting NETPRO Starting NETPRO Creating the Network View Requirement Before you can start NETPRO you must have created a project in the SIMATIC Manager STEP 7 creates an MPI subnet automatically when you create a new project To start NETPRO follow the steps outlined below 1 Open your project in the SIMATIC Manager 2 Select a subnet for example the MPI network 3 Start NETPRO by double clicking on the subnet or by selecting the menu command Edit gt Open Object Result A window appears with a view of the network configuration Stations whose h
373. u command File gt Open you can open projects from older STEP 7 versions When you open a project from an old version of STEP 7 you only have the functional scope of that STEP 7 version available to you Converting toa With the menu command File gt Save As you can save the project as a project Project for the for the current version if you select the file type STEP 7 Project in the Current Version corresponding dialog box Note Projects saved in a newer STEP 7 version cannot be saved as projects under an older STEP 7 version Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 A 3 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Objects and Object Hierarchy Overview Objects as Carriers of Properties Objects have the following functions e Containers e Carriers of functions which act on the object for example which start a particular application e Carriers of object properties Tables B 1 and B 2 show an overview of the most important objects and their icons used on the user interface The objects listed in the tables are objects which appear in the STEP 7 Standard software with the exception of charts If you have installed the optional software other objects may appear which are described in the documentation on the respective software option Objects can carry both functions and properties such as options When you select an object you can pe
374. u may destroy the authorization The authorization disk must not be write protected Files on the authorization disk can be copied to another drive for example hard disk and used from there Authorization using these copied files is not possible however you will require the original authorization disk for this Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 2 5 Installing and Uninstalling Permitted Drives Where Are Authorizations Stored Number of Authorizations Defective Authorizations Authorization Program Version 2 6 Authorizations cannot be installed on the following drives data media e CD ROM drives e RAM drives e Floppy disks Compressed drives such as DBLSPACE For compressed drives you can install the authorization on the respective host drive The authorization utility prevents authorizations being installed on illegal drives A protected directory is created for the authorizations with the attributes system and hidden to store the authorization files e These attributes must not be changed e The files must not be changed or deleted Otherwise the authorization will be irretrievably lost The protected directory AXNFZZ is created once per drive It contains all the authorizations installed on the drive It is created when the first authorization is installed and deleted when the last authorization is removed For each authorization t
375. uch as assigning parameters to the modules The connection table defines the communication links between programmable modules in a network Consistent data are data which belong together and may not be separated for example time data The DP master sends the control command FREEZE to a group of DP slaves causing the DP slaves to freeze the current states of their inputs The DP master sends the control command SYNC to a group of DP slaves causing the DP slaves to synchronize the current states of their outputs Counters are an area in the system memory of the CPU The contents of these counters can be changed using STEP 7 instructions for example up counter down counter The cross reference list gives you an overview of the addresses from the memory areas I Q M T C P and DB used within an S7 program Data blocks are areas in the user program which contain user data There are shared data blocks which can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data blocks which are associated with a particular function block FB call Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Glossary 3 Glossary Default Value Diagnostic Buffer Diagnostic Event Direct Addressing Download Distributed I O ID DP Master DP Slave Free Edit Mode Glossary 4 The default value is a basic setting which is used when no alternative value is entered The diagnostic buffer is a
376. urations Overview 200eeee eee 8 2 Configuring a Network in the SIMATIC Manager 000005 8 3 Setting Your Network Configuration Graphically Starting NETPRO 8 4 Creating Network Configurations with Symbols in the Network View 8 5 Opening and Editing the Network View with DP Slaves Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Contents 8 6 Selecting Context Functions for Subnets Stations and Modules in the Network VIEW wits eisaai riani idad esa deread naa a a a eaten ki 8 13 8 7 Special Feature when Configuring MPI Subnets in 87 300 8 14 8 8 Changing Node Addresses and Downloading the Configuration via the NWO 2 0cc8sec2eseeckaee EREE ER EAER EEE ERER ARRENE RA 8 15 9 Configuring Global Data Communication 0ee eee eee ee eee 9 1 Global Data sec eccwaritea desea E E tenes eke E REE 9 2 9 2 Opening a Global Data Table 0 eee 9 3 9 3 Filling Out a Global Data Table 00 cece eee 9 5 9 4 Compiling and Downloading a Global Data Table 9 5 Setting Scan Rates 0c cece cece eens 9 6 Displaying and Editing the Global Data Status 9 10 9 7 Configuration Examples 2 0c cece eee eee eens 9 11 10 Establishing Communication Connections 00e scene eee eee 10 1 Communication Connections An Overview 0 20000ee eens 10
377. ut deactivated means that the size of this area cannot be determined by the selected CPU FM or that this type of memory is not available in the CPU for example read only memory in the example in Figure 17 5 Module Information x Path project station CPU CPU Operating Mode STOP Status Module Operating Mode General Diagnostic Buffer Memory Scan Cycle Time Time System Perf Data Communication Stacks m Work Memory ___ _ Load Memory Read Write Memory RAM Read Write Memory RAM Read Only Memory ROM 98 26 Maximum 24576 Bytes Maximum 40960 Bytes Used 6390 Bytes Used 40002 Bytes Free 18186 Bytes Free 958 Bytes Size of Free Block 0 Bytes Size of Free Block 0 Bytes Compress Close Update Print Help Figure 17 5 Memory Tab Uses You can use this function if you want to download a user program to a CPU FM and check whether the current capacity of the load memory in this CPU FM is sufficient You can also use this function if you want to add an object to an existing project and want to know whether there is sufficient continuous free memory for this expansion Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 17 16 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Diagnosing Hardware Compressing for SIMATIC S7 Only When you copy and delete blocks gaps are left in the memory Using the Compress function the occupied blocks i
378. w you can make function block parameters suitable for operator control and monitoring and assign the required O C and M attributes to associated instance DBs or shared DBs in your user program Requirement You must have created a STEP 7 project an S7 program and a function block Assigning System When you configure operator control and monitoring attributes with STL Attributes to Ladder and FBD you must first assign the system attribute s7_m_c to all Function Block parameters of a function block that you want to prepare for control and Parameters monitoring Follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the function block FB 2 Select the parameter in the variable declaration table that you want to prepare for control and monitoring 3 Using the right mouse button select the menu command Object Properties In the Parameter Properties dialog box enter the string s7_m_c in the System Attribute column and true in the Value column of an empty row Parameter Properties System Attribute Value al S7 m c true 2 2 4 2 6 w 8 9 nO Insert Row Delete Row Cancel __ Hep Figure 13 1 Parameter Properties Tab 4 If required enter other system attributes for the parameter You will find a complete list of the system attributes in the online help 5 Exit the dialog box by clicking OK 6 Repeat this procedure fo
379. ware for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 14 7 Displaying Reference Data 14 6 Displaying Program Structures Displaying the Program Structure Uses Selecting a Representation Type Tree Structure 14 8 To activate the program structure select the menu command View gt Program Structure or click the corresponding button in the toolbar The program structure has a graphic display form The call hierarchy nesting levels of the blocks within the user program are displayed giving an overview of the blocks used their dependencies and their local data requirement With the menu command View gt Filter you open the Filter dialog box In the Program Structure tab you can choose between the following two representations to display the program structure e Tree structure e Parent child structure table form You can specify whether you want all blocks to be displayed or whether the hierarchy should start from a specific start block Recursions in the call are recognized and indicated visually in the tree structure The significance of the graphic elements used in the program structure for example of blocks not called is explained in the online help ke Program Structure for proj test blocks blocks BE _ S7 Program OB1 lt Maximum 66 gt FB10 DB101 42 DB10 dbten 42 FC10 DB10 dbten 66 SFBO CTU DB100 66 SFC52 WR_USMSG 66 FC10 D
380. ways includes the following steps however 1 Assign system attributes for operator control and monitoring to the parameters of a function block or to the symbols in a symbol table The step is not required in CFC because you take blocks that have already been prepared from a library 2 Assign the variables you want to control and monitor with the required attributes such as limit values substitute values and logging properties in a dialog box 3 Transfer the configuration data generated with STEP 7 to your display system WinCC by means of the S7 WinCC Mapper Naming For the configuration data for WinCC to be saved and transferred they are Conventions stored under a unique name automatically assigned by STEP 7 The names of the variables for operator control and monitoring the CFC charts and the S7 programs form part of this name and for this reason are subject to certain conventions e The names of the S7 programs in an S7 project must be unique different stations may not contain S7 programs with the same name e The names of the variables S7 programs and CFC charts may not contain underlines blanks or special characters Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual 13 2 C79000 G7076 C552 01 Operator Control and Monitoring of Variables 13 2 Configuring Operator Control and Monitoring Attributes with Statement List Ladder Logic and Function Block Diagram Overview Using the procedure described belo
381. will find more information on assigning symbols in Chapter 6 3 Open the Blocks container if you want to create blocks or the Source Files container if you want to create a source file 4 Insert a block or a source file using one of the following menu commands more details can be found in Section 5 4 Insert gt S7 Block Insert gt S7 Software Insert gt M7 Software 5 Open the block or the source file and enter a program You will find more information on programs in the programming language manuals 6 Document the project using the menu command Insert gt Project Documentation For documenting a STEP 7 project you can organize all the configuration data you create with STEP 7 into wiring manuals This function is only available if the DOCPRO optional package is installed Depending on your task you may not need to perform all these steps Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Creating and Editing Projects 5 4 Inserting Components for Creating Software in S7 and M7 Programs Existing Components Creating S7 Blocks Using Blocks from Standard Libraries An S7 M7 program is created automatically for each programmable module as a container for the software The following objects already exist in a newly created S7 program e Symbol table Symbols object e A Blocks container for blocks with the first block e A Source Fil
382. with your configured settings You must have inserted a programming device PC station in your project You must have created a node list for this programming device PC and assigned the module parameter sets installed in your programming device PC to the nodes In the SIMATIC Manager select the menu command PLC gt Assign PG PC If unique assignments are possible you do not need to do anything else If unique assignments are not possible a dialog box is displayed In the Assignment tab you can select a configured module for your PG PC and a configured network node PG PC A unique assignment may not be possible for example if more than one of any type of module parameter assignment exists on your programming device To undo all assignments select the menu command PLC gt Remove PG PC Assignment in the SIMATIC Manager Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 5 17 Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Assigning Symbols Overview In a STEP 7 program you work with addresses such as I O signals bit memory counters timers data blocks and function blocks You can access these addresses in your program absolutely for example I 1 1 M 2 0 FB21 but your programs will be much easier to read if you use symbols for the addresses for example Motor_A_On or other identifiers according to the code system used within your company or industry
383. wo files with the same name and different extensions are created in the protected directory These files are given the same name as the authorization You can install as many authorizations on a drive as you wish provided the required memory capacity is available These authorizations do not interfere with each other Defective authorizations on a hard disk drive cannot be removed with the AUTHORS program They may even prevent you installing new and valid authorizations In this case contact your local Siemens representative Use the current version V 4 x of the authorization utility AUTHORS and not an older version V 1 x V 2 x Note As not all older authorizations can be recognized with V 4 x you should work with an older version of AUTHORS in these cases Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Installing and Uninstalling 2 4 installing and Uninstalling the STEP 7 Software Overview Preparing for Installation Starting the Installation Program STEP 7 contains a Setup program which executes the installation automatically Prompts on the screen guide you step by step through the whole installation procedure The main stages in the installation are e Copying the data to your programming device e Setting the drivers for EPROMs and communication e Authorization if required Note Siemens programming devices such as the PG 740 are shipped with the STEP 7 softwar
384. y card Then the memory card is inserted in the M7 programmable control system and the programmable control system is booted from the memory card To be able to use a memory card you will require a PG 720 PG 740 or PG 760 programming device or a PC with external prommer Note A 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk can hold a minimum M7 RMOS32 system but is not intended as a destination medium for installing the operating system on the M7 300 M7 400 You can use a floppy disk as the boot medium or data medium for applications Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 19 5 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems Selecting the Local Drive and Partner Drive Boot Medium 19 6 If you use the transfer medium MPI RFS RFS Remote File System for the installation Under Windows 95 an MPI connection is established between the local drive of a PC programming device and a drive on the M7 programmable control system Under Windows NT a different communication mechanism is used for the Remote File System than under Windows 95 A local drive is no longer required for the connection to the programmable control system but the partner drive is addressed directly In the Managing M7 PLC Systems dialog box you only need to specify the partner drive if you select MPI RFS and not a local drive The Local Drive box is deactivated under Windows NT Local Drive only on Programming
385. ystem via data medium floppy disk or memory card you must make the entries yourself if you want the programs to be executed automatically on system startup You will find the appropriate entries in the temporary ETC INITTAB INS file Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 User Manual C79000 G7076 C552 01 Managing M7 Programmable Control Systems 19 11 M7 300 M7 400 Monitoring and Modifying Functions Information Functions What Is Different in M7 CPU Messages Settings Monitoring and Modifying Variables Using the menu command PLC gt Module Information you can display the following information about the M7 CPUs on the PC or programming device e Time system and CPU time e M7 CPU data e User memory utilization e CPU scan cycle times e Communication connection status e Diagnostic buffer content In contrast to the S7 modules you cannot display the following information for M7 CPUs e Block data e Stack contents The corresponding tabs and boxes are present on the user interface but are empty Using the CPU Messages function asynchronous messages on error events and user defined messages can be displayed see Section KEIN MERKER You can make the following settings on the M7 CPU just as for an S7 CPU e Change the operating mode reset the CPU see Chapter 15 e Set the date and time see Chapter 17 With the menu command PLC gt Monitor Modify Variables the following functions are

User Manual for STEP 7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents